00 00 00 - PROJECT MANUAL cover - Concordia · 2015. 9. 3. · Kansas City, MO 64112-2023 (816)...

PROJECT MANUAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Issued: May 18, 2015

Broadway Plaza 112 West 6th Street Concordia, Kansas 66901

BBN Architects, Inc.

411 Nichols Road, Suite 246 Kansas City, MO 64112-2023 (816) 753-2550

sbingham

Text Box

600 Broadway

sbingham

Text Box

Re-Issued: September 1, 2015

BROADWAY PLAZA

BBN ARCHITECTS, INC. MAY 18, 2015

ARCHITECTURAL DISCLAIMER 1 OF 1

ARCHITECT’S DISCLAIMER OF RESPONSIBILITY

I, Lorie A. Doolittle, hereby specify that the specifications intended to be authenticated by my personal seal are limited to the following:

Division 02

Division 03

Section 03 45 00

Division 04

Division 05

Section 05 50 00

Section 05 52 13

Section 05 58 00

Division 06

Division 07

Division 08

Division 09

Division 10

Division 12

Section 12 36 61

and I hereby disclaim any responsibility for all other specifications, or other documents or instruments relating to or intended to be used for any part or parts of the construction at Broadway Plaza at 112 West 6

th Street, Concordia, KS 66901.

SEAL

Registration Expires: June 30, 2016

BROADWAY PLAZA


LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT’S DISCLAIMER 1 OF 1

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT’S DISCLAIMER OF RESPONSIBILITY

I, Scott A. Bingham, hereby specify that the specifications intended to be authenticated by my personal seal are limited to the following:

Division 12

Section 12 93 00

Division 13

Division 32

and I hereby disclaim any responsibility for all other specifications, or other documents or instruments relating to or intended to be used for any part or parts of the construction at Broadway Plaza at 112 West 6

th Street, Concordia, KS 66901.

SEAL

Registration Expires: December 31, 2016

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLUMBING DISCLAIMER 1 OF 1

PLUMBING ENGINEER’S DISCLAIMER OF RESPONSIBILITY

I, _________ ______, hereby specify that the specifications intended to be authenticated by my personal seal are limited to the following:

Division 22

and I hereby disclaim any responsibility for all other specifications, or other documents or instruments relating to or intended to be used for any part or parts of the construction at Broadway Plaza at 112 West 6th Street, Concordia, KS 66901.

SEAL Registration Expires:

Thomas C. Orazem

April 2017

BROADWAY PLAZA


MECHANICAL DISCLAIMER 1 OF 1

MECHANICAL ENGINEER’S DISCLAIMER OF RESPONSIBILITY


Division 23



Thomas C. Orazem

April 2017

BROADWAY PLAZA


ELECTRICAL DISCLAIMER 1 OF 1

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER’S DISCLAIMER OF RESPONSIBILITY


Division 26



Thomas C. Orazem

April 2017

BROADWAY PLAZA BBN ARCHITECTS, INC. MAY 18, 2015

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title

©WSS LLC 2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 01 Project Title Page 00 01 05 Certifications Pages 00 01 10 Table of Contents

PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bid 00 11 16 Invitation for Bid 00 21 00 Instructions to Bidders (AIA A701-1997) 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 43 00 Bid Bond (A310-2010)

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 52 00 Agreement Form (AIA A101-2007) 00 61 00 Performance Bond and Payment Bond (AIA A312-2010) 00 71 00 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA A201-2007) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 41 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents

FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 45 00 Architectural Precast Concrete


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title


DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 21 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 05 58 00 Formed-Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 54 23 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 92 00 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 71 00 Door Hardware

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 61 13 Floor Sealers 09 61 15 Concrete Staining 09 91 00 Painting

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 14 23 Panel Signage 10 21 19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 74 13 Exterior Clocks

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (Not Used)

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops 12 93 00 Site Furnishings

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 14 14 Aquatic Play Equipment DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (Not Used)

sbingham

Rectangle


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title


FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 00 00 Plumbing DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 01 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements 23 05 00 HVAC Materials and Methods 23 25 00 Insulation (Mechanical) 23 60 00 Heating Equipment 23 65 22 Ductless Split D-X Air Conditioning Systems 23 80 00 HVAC Equipment – Airside 23 85 00 Ductwork and Accessories 23 99 00 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (HVAC)

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 16 00 Power Distribution Equipment 1200 Amperes and Less 26 17 00 Motor And Circuit Disconnects 26 50 00 Lighting

SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 20 00 Earth Moving 31 20 01 Excavation and Trenching

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 18 24 Outdoor Synthetic Surfacing 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation 32 91 19 Landscape Grading 32 92 20 Turf Grass 32 93 00 Plants 32 94 43 Tree Grates

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 01 30 Sanitary Sewer Construction 33 12 16 Valves and Fittings 33 31 13 PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe 33 41 00 Storm Sewer Installation 33 46 00 Subdrainage

APPENDIX Geotechnical Exploration, Broadway Plaza, dated October 24, 2014 with Supplement

dated March 2, 2015 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

This page is intentionally left blank.

BROADWAY PLAZA

BBN ARCHITECTS, INC. JUNE 9, 2015

© WSS 2015 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

00 11 13 - 1

SECTION 00 11 13 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

1.1 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Notice to Bidders: Qualified bidders may submit bids for project as described in this Document. Submit bids according to the Instructions to Bidders.

B. Project Identification: Broadway Plaza.

1. Project Location: 600 Broadway, Concordia, KS 66901.

C. Owner: City of Concordia, 701 Washington St., Concordia, KS 66901

D. Construction Manager: Campbell & Johnson Engineers, 113 West 7th Street, Concordia, KS 66901

E. Architect: BBN Architects Inc., 411 Nichols Road, Suite 216, Kansas City, MO 64112; 816.753.2550.

F. Project Description: Project consists of following:

1. Earthwork, grading, and plantings. 2. Construction of a new one story Restroom Building. 3. Water feature. 4. Outdoor plaza and artificial turf seating area. 5. Brick facing of existing building.

G. Construction Contract: Individual bids will be received for each phase of work as described in Section 011000: 1. Phase 1 Existing Building Wall 2. Phase 2 Temporary Facilities, Demolition and Rough Grading 3. Phase 3 Restroom Building, Building Utilities and Seat Wall 4. Phase 4 Site Paving, Site Utilities and Amenities 5. Phase 5 Landscaping

1.2 BID SUBMITTAL AND OPENING

A. Owner will receive sealed lump sum bids until the bid time and date at the location given below. Owner will consider bids prepared in compliance with the Instructions to Bidders issued by Owner, and delivered as follows:

1. Bid Date: September 29, 2015. 2. Bid Time: 2:00 p.m., local time. 3. Location: City Clerk, Concordia City Hall, 701 Washington St., Concordia, KS 66901, 701

Washington St., Concordia, KS 66901

B. Bids will be thereafter publicly opened and read aloud.

1.3 BID SECURITY

A. Bid security shall be submitted with each bid in the amount of 5 percent of the bid amount for any bids greater than or equal to $100,000.00. No bids may be withdrawn for a period of 60

BROADWAY PLAZA

BBN ARCHITECTS, INC. JUNE 9, 2015

© WSS 2015 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

00 11 13 - 2

days after opening of bids. Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive informalities and irregularities.

1.4 DOCUMENTS

A. A copy of the bid documents will be available at the Construction Manager’s office during regular business hours. Requests for electronic or hard copies of the bid documents should be directed to the Construction Manager.

1.5 TIME OF COMPLETION

A. Successful bidder shall begin the Work on receipt of the Notice to Proceed and shall complete the Work within the Contract Time stated for each phase. The Owner intends to have the entire project complete by September 15, 2016.

1.6 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS

A. Bidders must be properly licensed under the laws governing their respective trades and be able to obtain insurance and bonds required for the Work. A Performance Bond, separate Labor and Material Payment Bond, and Insurance in a form acceptable to Owner will be required of the successful Bidder for contracts greater than or equal to $100,000.

1.7 NOTIFICATION

A. This Advertisement for Bids document is issued by the City of Concordia.

END OF SECTION 00 11 13

BROADWAY PLAZA


INVITATION FOR BID 00 11 16 - 1

SECTION 00 11 16 - INVITATION FOR BID

Project: Broadway Plaza 600 Broadway Concordia, KS 66901 Construction Manager: Campbell & Johnson Engineers 113 West 7th Street Concordia, KS 66901 Architect: BBN Architects, Inc. 411 Nichols Road, Suite 216 Kansas City, Missouri 64112 Owner: City of Concordia 701 Washington St Concordia, KS 66901 The City of Concordia (the Owner) is soliciting bids from bidders for the Broadway Plaza construction project (Work). Bids for each phase shall be on “Stipulated Sum” basis. The Owner will receive sealed bids until 2:00 p.m., local time on September 29, 2015 at their offices at 701 Washington St., Concordia, KS 66901. Bids received after this time will not be considered. Bids will be thereafter publicly opened and read aloud. Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the bidder for a period of sixty days (60) days after the actual date of the opening of bids. The Owner will provide a completed Bid Tabulation for consideration at the next scheduled meeting of City Commissioners. A formal recommendation as to bid acceptance will be placed on the agenda. Final schedule and date of Notice to Proceed will be determined by actions of the City Commissioners. Bidders shall begin the Work on receipt of the Notice to Proceed and shall complete the Work within the Contract Time stated for each phase. All questions regarding the Bidding Documents shall be submitted to Scott Bingham, BBN Architects, at [email protected] in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Bidders will be required to provide Bid Security if their bid is greater than or equal to $100,000, in the form of a Bid Bond, or a certified check, payable to the Owner in the amount of a sum no less than 5 percent of the Bid Price. Federal, State and local taxes shall not be included with the bid. The Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities and or irregularities in the bid and to reject any or all bids if it is in the Owner's best interest to do so. Unless all bids are rejected, award will be to the low responsive, responsible and best Bidder.




© WSS 2015 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 00 - 1

SECTION 00 21 00 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders - 1997 Edition, and as amended, forms the instructions to bidders for the purpose of preparing bids for the designated Work defined in the Bidding Documents and are an integral part of the Bidding Documents. Provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. AIA Documents are available from the following AIA Office: AIA Kansas City 1801 McGee, Suite 100 Kansas City, MO 64108 Phone: 816-221-3485 Fax: 816-221-5653 Contact: Tiffany Shepherd [email protected] www.aiakc.org END OF SECTION 00 21 00


BROADWAY PLAZA


BID FORM 004100 - 1

SECTION 00 41 00 - BID FORM

1.1 BID INFORMATION

A. Bidder: ___________________________________________________________.

B. Project Name: Broadway Plaza

C. Project Location: Concordia, Kansas.

D. Owner: City of Concordia, Kansas

E. Construction Manager: Campbell & Johnson, Engineers PA

F. Architect: BBN Architects, Inc.

1.2 CERTIFICATIONS AND BASE BID

A. The undersigned Bidder, having carefully examined the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, and all subsequent Addenda, as prepared by BBN Architects and Architect's consultants, having visited the site, and being familiar with all conditions and requirements of the Work, hereby agrees to furnish all material, labor, equipment and services, including all scheduled allowances, necessary to complete the construction of the following phase(s) of the Broadway Plaza Work, according to the requirements of the Procurement and Contracting Documents, for the stipulated lump sum of:

1. Phase 1 Existing Building Wall a. ________________________________________________

Dollars ($______________). 2. Phase 2 Temporary Facilities, Demolition and Rough Grading

a. ________________________________________________ Dollars ($______________).

3. Phase 3 Restroom Building, Building Utilities and Seat Wall a. ________________________________________________

Dollars ($______________). 4. Phase 4 Site Paving, Site Utilities and Amenities

a. ________________________________________________ Dollars ($______________).

5. Phase 5 Landscaping a. ________________________________________________

Dollars ($______________).

1.3 BID GUARANTEE

A. If the lump sum amount is greater than or equal to $100,000, the undersigned Bidder agrees to execute a contract for this Work for the above amount and to furnish surety

BROADWAY PLAZA


BID FORM 004100 - 2

as specified within 14 days after a written Notice of Award, if offered within 60 days after receipt of bids, and on failure to do so agrees to forfeit to Owner the attached cash, cashier's check, certified check, U.S. money order, or bid bond, as liquidated damages for such failure, in the following amount constituting five percent (5%) of the Base Bid amount above:

1. __________________________________________Dollars($______________).

B. In the event Owner does not offer a Notice of Award within the time limits stated above, Owner will return to the undersigned the cash, cashier's check, certified check, U.S. money order, or bid bond.

1.4 TIME OF COMPLETION

A. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees hereby to commence the Work of the Contract Documents on a date specified in a written Notice to Proceed to be issued by the Construction Manager, and shall fully complete the Work within calendar days stipulated in the Summary of Work (Section 011000).

1.5 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA

A. The undersigned Bidder acknowledges receipt of and use of the following Addenda in the preparation of this Bid:

1. Addendum No. 1, dated ____________________. 2. Addendum No. 2, dated ____________________. 3. Addendum No. 3, dated ____________________. 4. Addendum No. 4, dated ____________________.

1.6 BID REPRESENTATIONS

A. Owner reserves the right to reject this Bid;

B. Bidder is familiar with federal, state, and local laws and regulations;

C. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents and additional examinations, investigations, explorations, test, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents;

D. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of an undisclosed person, firm, or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with an agreement or rules of a group, association, organization, or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited another Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced a person, firm, or corporation to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself an advantage over another Bidder or over Owner.

BROADWAY PLAZA


BID FORM 004100 - 3

E. Upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of the bid, Bidder will execute a formal Agreement (AIA A101-2007) within fourteen (14) days and deliver Insurance Certificates as required.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE

A. The undersigned further states that it is a duly licensed Contractor, for the type of work proposed, in Concordia, KS, and that all fees, permits, etc., pursuant to submitting this proposal have been paid in full.

1.8 SUBMISSION OF BID

A. Respectfully submitted this ____ day of ____________, 2015.

B. Submitted By:___________________________________(Name of bidding firm or corporation).

C. Authorized Signature:___________________________________ (Handwritten signature).

D. Signed By:______________________________________________ (Type or print name).

E. Title:___________________________________ (Owner/Partner/President/Vice President).

F. Witnessed By:_________________________________________(Handwritten signature).

G. Attest:________________________________________________(Handwritten signature).

H. By:____________________________________________________(Type or print name).

I. Title:_________________________________(Corporate Secretary or Assistant Secretary).

J. Street Address:___________________________________________________________.

K. City, State, Zip:___________________________________________________________.

L. Phone:______________________________________________________________.

M. License No.:_____________________________________________________________.

BROADWAY PLAZA


BID FORM 004100 - 4

N. Federal ID No.:_____________________________________(Affix Corporate Seal Here).

END OF DOCUMENT 004100


© WSS 2015 BID BOND 00 43 00 - 1

SECTION 00 43 00 - BID BOND AIA Document A310 - Bid Bond, 2010 Edition - Electronic Format, is considered an integral part of the Bid documents, for use in fulfilling Bid Security requirements in lieu of submitting a certified check. AIA Documents are available from the following AIA Office: AIA Kansas City 1801 McGee, Suite 100 Kansas City, MO 64108 Phone: 816-221-3485 Fax: 816-221-5653 Contact: Tiffany Shepherd [email protected] www.aiakc.org END OF SECTION 00 43 00



© WSS 2015 AGREEMENT FORM 00 52 00 - 1

SECTION 00 52 00 - AGREEMENT FORM AIA Document A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the Basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum - 2007 Edition, and as amended, forms the basis of Contract between the Owner and Contractor, and is considered an integral part of the Bid Documents. Provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. AIA Documents are available from the following AIA Office: AIA Kansas City 1801 McGee, Suite 100 Kansas City, MO 64108 Phone: 816-221-3485 Fax: 816-221-5653 Contact: Tiffany Shepherd [email protected] www.aiakc.org END OF SECTION 00 52 00



© WSS 2015 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 00 61 00 - 1

SECTION 00 61 00 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND AIA Document A312 - Performance Bond and Payment Bond - 2010 Edition is considered an integral part of the Bid Documents, and once signed and executed by the successful Bidder and Surety, will be bound into the executed Contract. AIA Documents are available from the following AIA Office: AIA Kansas City 1801 McGee, Suite 100 Kansas City, MO 64108 Phone: 816-221-3485 Fax: 816-221-5653 Contact: Tiffany Shepherd [email protected] www.aiakc.org END OF SECTION 00 61 00



© WSS 2015 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00 71 00 - 1

SECTION 00 71 00 – GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AIA Document A201 General Conditions Of The Contract For Construction - 2007 Edition forms the conditions of Contract between the Owner and Contractor and is considered an integral part of the Bidding Documents. Provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. AIA Documents are available from the following AIA Office: AIA Kansas City 1801 McGee, Suite 100 Kansas City, MO 64108 Phone: 816-221-3485 Fax: 816-221-5653 Contact: Tiffany Shepherd [email protected] www.aiakc.org END OF SECTION 00 71 00



© WSS 2015 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 1

SECTION 00 73 00 –SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. These Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract are incorporated into the General Conditions of the Contract, AIA Document No. A201-2007

B. The following modifications to the General Conditions of the Contract modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract, AIA Document A201-2007. Where any article of the General Conditions of the Contract is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by the Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause shall remain is effect.

3.4 – LABOR AND MATERIALS: Add the following

3.4.2.1 Procedures for requests for substitutions after award of contract are specified in Section 01 25 00 “Substitution Procedures.”

3.18 – INDEMNIFICATION: Add the following subparagraph:

3.18.3 Contractor agrees to include in contracts with each Subcontractor provisions requiring the Subcontractor to indemnify and defend the Owner and Architect for any claims arising out of the negligence or breach of contract by the Subcontractor or their employees.

15.1.5 – CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME: Add the following subparagraph:

15.1.5.2.1 Adjustments to the contract time due to weather will be determined as follows: 1. Adjustments will be considered only when the weather experienced at the Project Site is

documented as unusually severe, which is defined as weather that is more severe than the adverse weather normally anticipated for the project location during any given month.

2. Adjustments will be accepted only when the unusually severe weather actually causes a delay in the Completion of the Project.

3. The following schedule defines the normal number of adverse weather days by month. Contractor’s progress schedule shall reflect the delays associated with these adverse weather days. January 10 days July 5 days February 6 days August 4 days March 4 days September 5 days April 5 days October 4 days May 7 days November 3 days June 6 days December 5 days

4. Contractor shall document the daily occurrence of adverse weather and the resulting impact on normally scheduled work. To qualify as an adverse weather day, weather conditions shall prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the Contractor’s scheduled work day. Written documentation of adverse weather days shall be submitted to Architect as requested, but on no less than a monthly basis.

5. Architect will, on a monthly basis, make a recommendation to the Owner regarding adjustments to the Contract Time, based on the following: a. the cumulative total of adverse weather days documented for the Project; b. the cumulative total of normal adverse weather days per the above schedule, and



c. the number of days already added to the Contract Time due to adverse weather days.

15.3 - MEDIATION: Delete the second sentence of Subparagraph 15.3.3 and replace with the following:

“The mediation shall be held in Concordia, Kansas unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Any dispute under this agreement not resolved through mediation shall be litigated in the courts of The City of Concordia, Kansas, or the closest court thereto.”

15.4 - ARBITRATION: Add the following new Paragraph:

15.4.4 Demands for arbitration made pursuant to Paragraph 15.4.1, and answering questions thereto which include any monetary claim must contain a statement that the total sum or value in controversy as alleged by the party making such demand or answering statement is not more than $100,000 (exclusive of interest and costs). The arbitrators will not have jurisdiction, power, or authority to consider, or make findings (except in denial of their own jurisdiction) concerning any claim, counterclaim, dispute, or other matter in question where the amount in controversy thereof is more than $100,000 (exclusive of interest and costs) as to render a monetary award in response thereto against any part which totals more than $100,000 (exclusive of interest and costs).

ARTICLE 9 – PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.8 -SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Revise subparagraph 9.8.1 as follows:

Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work is, in the judgement of the Owner and the Architect, sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy and utilize the Work for its intended use.

ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS: Revise as follows:

Revise subparagraph 11.1.1 as follows:

In the first line, following the word “maintain,” delete the phrase “in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located” and insert the following phrase:

“with a company or companies licensed to do business in the State of Kansas”

Add the following:

11.1.1.9 Liability insurance shall include major division of coverage and be on comprehensive basis including: 1. Premises – operations X, C, U Required 2. Independent Contractor’s Protective 3. Products and completed Operations 4. Personal Injury Liability with employment exclusion deleted. 5. Contractual, including specified provisions for Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph

3.18.



6. Owner, non-owned, and hired motor vehicle and aircraft 7. Broad Form Property Damage including completed operations. 8. Endorsement for per project aggregate.

11.1.1.10 If the General Liability coverages are provide by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract, the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverage required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2.

Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 11.1.2:

The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits, or greater if required by State Statutes:

1. Workman’s Compensation: – Statutory 2. Employer’s Liability:

a. $500,000 by disease b. $500,000 each accident c. $500,000 each employee.

3. Comprehensive General Liability: a. Personal Injury - $1,000,000 combined single limit. b. Property Damage - $1,000,000 combined single limit. c. Contractor’s Protective Liability - $1,000,000 combined single limit.

4. Comprehensive Automobile Liability - $1,000,000 combined single limit. 5. Umbrella Policy: $2,000,000

Delete Subparagraph 11.3.1.3 and replace with the following:

11.3.1.3 Notwithstanding other provision of this Subparagraph, the Owner will provide property insurance with a deductible clause of $1,000 per occurrence that excludes tools and equipment owned by Contractor or Subcontractors, based on the mutual understanding that Job Site security is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Losses of $1,000 or less and the $1,000 of any larger loss shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor has the option of purchasing insurance to cover this deductible exposure or of “self-insuring,” in either case the expense involved shall not be included in the Contract Sum.

Add the following new Subparagraph:

11.3.7.1 The Waivers of Subrogation in Subparagraph 11.3.7 shall apply equally to waive claims to the extent covered by Contractor’s Comprehensive General Liability Insurance (CGL). This provision shall be included in agreements between Contractor and Contractor’s Subcontractors and Suppliers. The policies of insurance shall provide such Waivers of Subrogation buy endorsement or otherwise. Any cost associated with obtaining such endorsement shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

11.4 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

Delete Subparagraphs 11.4.1 and 11.4.2 and replace with the following:

11.4.1 Contractor shall furnish Performance Bond and labor and Material Payment Bond in amounts equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum. Bonds shall be issued on AIA Document A312, Standard Form Current Editions. Such bonds shall be executed by a Surety authorized to do business in the State of Kansas.



11.4.2 A copy of the Labor and Material Payment Bond shall be filed with the Clerk of the District Court of Cloud County, Kansas and a receipt of filing furnished to the Owner.

12.2 – CORRECTION OF WORK

Delete the second to the last sentence in Subparagraph 12.2.2.1, which reads:

“During the one-year period……for breach of warranty.”


12.2.6 As part of the Contract Work, Contractor shall perform a one-year warranty inspection with the Architect and Owner, within one year after Substantial Completion of the Work. The purpose of this inspection is to ascertain defects or failures of the Work which may be covered by warranties provide by Contractor, Subcontractors, or equipment or material Supplier on the Project. If such defects, deficiencies, or failures are noted, the Contractor shall promptly remedy such defect and shall assist the Architect and Owner in notifying the appropriate manufacturer, if any, of the nature of the problems and the applicable warranty.


13.2 Contractor shall comply, during the course of this Agreement, with all provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act, 42 U.S.C. Subsection 12101, et seq., and related regulations as applicable to Contractor’s services and as amended from time to time.


BROADWAY PLAZA


SUMMARY OF WORK 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification formats and conventions.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and

procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Broadway Plaza 1. Project Location: 600 Broadway, Concordia, KS 66901.

B. Owner: City of Concordia, 701 Washington St., Concordia, KS 66901

C. Architect: BBN Architects Inc., 411 Nichols Road, Suite 216, Kansas City, MO 64112; 816.753.2550.

D. Construction Manager: Campbell & Johnson Engineers, 113 West 7th Street, Concordia, KS 66901

1. Construction Manager has been engaged for this Project to serve as an advisor to Owner and to administer the Contract for Construction between Owner and each Contractor, according to a separate contract between Owner and Construction Manager.

E. The Work consists of the following:

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: a. Earthwork, grading, and plantings. b. Construction of a new one story Restroom Building. c. Water feature. d. Outdoor plaza and artificial turf seating area. e. Brick facing of existing building. Insert additional paragraphs for other

major items of work. See Evaluations for model text.

F. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under multiple contracts. See description in this section for a description of work included under each separate contract.

1.4 WORK PHASES

A. General 1. Work shall be conducted in 5 phases under separate contracts in the following

order, with each phase substantially complete before beginning the next phase. 2. Document references may not be limited to those listed. Bidder shall be

responsible for reviewing the entire set of bid documents.

B. Phases

1. Phase 1 Existing Building Wall a. Scope of work

1) All work required to provide a new brick veneer to the existing building’s east wall adjacent to the property and the pilaster and its associated pre-cast panel at the wall’s north end.

2) Remove subsurface foundation as shown on Sheet D101 and H4/L104.

3) Provide all associated subsurface work with the wall, including excavation, compaction and the wall foundation.

4) Provide an electrical junction box for the bracket clock (that will be installed in a later phase).

5) Provide a ¾ inch conduit with pull wire behind the brick veneer extending from the junction box and extending out at the base of the pilaster.

b. Document References 1) The site features for the proposed plaza features along the wall are

identified on Sheets L101-2; related details are on Sheets L103-4, and the proposed grades are on L201.

2) Specifications related to this work include Division 0, Division 1 (excluding Section 015000), Division 2, Division 3, Division 4, Section 079200, Division 26, and Section 312000.

c. Duration 1) Work of this phase shall be substantially complete within 60 calendar

days after the Notice to Proceed.

2. Phase 2 Temporary Facilities, Demolition and Rough Grading

BROADWAY PLAZA



a. Scope of work 1) Provide all work associated with the temporary facilities and controls. 2) Provide all demolition, with the exception of the subsurface wall

removal for the adjacent building’s wall. 3) Provide all rough grading including the establishment of subgrade

elevations. b. Document References

1) The demolition and erosion control measures are identified on Sheet D101.

2) Proposed pavement or other surface sections are identified on Sheets CS1, CS2, L103 and L104.

3) The layout for the plaza is shown on Sheets L101-2; related details and the proposed grades are on L201.

4) The temporary facilities and controls are identified in Section 015000, Division 2,

5) Specifications related to this work include Division 0, Division 1, and Section 312000.


days after the Notice to Proceed. 2) The temporary facilities and controls shall be maintained by this

Phase’s contractor for a period of 330 days.

3. Phase 3 Restroom Building, Building Utilities and Seat Wall a. Scope of work

1) Provide all work associated with the Restroom Building’s service utilities from the point of connection to inside the building including water, electrical, sanitary sewer, and the conduit for the fiber optic line so that the building is fully operational. Utility trenches shall be compacted.

2) Extend roof drains 5’ feet outside building for to allow for connections by the following phase of work.

3) Extend electrical from building to an in-grade junction box just north of the panel approximately 2 feet north of Restroom Building’s exterior wall.

4) Provide the water feature supply lines extending from the individual jet locations into the building with 5’ of additional pipe for each run. The water feature’s manifold will be installed in the next phase.

5) Provide the Restroom Building in its entirety, with the exception of the irrigation controller and the water feature’s manifold and controls.

6) Provide a stub-out for the irrigation service approximately 5’ north of the plumbing chase.

7) Provide compaction for the Restroom Building and seat wall’s foundations and floor slabs as required.

8) Provide the seat wall in its entirety, backfill as necessary, and provide the necessary block-outs and conduit to accommodate the proposed electrical outlets and linear lighting.

b. Work By Others 1) The canopy structure, located on the east side of the plaza, will be

provided by others during the course of this phase.

BROADWAY PLAZA



c. Document References 1) Proposed site utilities are shown on Sheet CS1. 2) The layout and final grades for the seat wall and the building relative

to the site are shown on Sheets L101-2 and L201. 3) Details for the seat wall are shown on Sheet L103. 4) The water feature service lines are identified on Sheet L101. 5) The architectural drawings for the building are shown on Sheets

A101-3. 6) The M/E/P drawings for the building are shown on Sheets ME1-3. 7) Locations of the seat wall’s electrical outlets and the linear lighting is

shown on ME1. 8) Specifications related to this work include Division 0, Division 1

(excluding Section 015000), Division 3, Division 4, Division 5 (with the exception of Section 055213), Divisions 6-9, Division 10 (with the exception of 107413), Section 123661, Division 22, Division 23, and Division 2, Section 312000, Section 330130, Section 331216, and Section 333113.

d. Duration 1) Work of this phase shall be substantially complete within 150

calendar days after the Notice to Proceed.

4. Phase 4 Site Paving, Site Utilities and Amenities a. Scope of work

1) Provide all the site utilities not serving the building. Connect with the stub-outs and junction box provided in the prior phase.

2) Provide the required compaction of the subgrade for the work described in this phase.

3) Provide all site paving, including the plaza pavement, stage, accessible ramp, stairs, and water feature surfacing.

4) Provide the associated handrails, subbases, compaction and foundations for the elements listed above.

5) Provide site amenities including storm inlets, tree grates, raised planters, ornamental fencing and gates.

6) Provide the water feature in its entirety, including the controls and manifold system within the building and the surface paint. The supply lines to each individual jet are provided in a prior phase.

7) Provide the artificial grass and its associated foam pad, gravel and anchors.

8) Provide the proposed irrigation system. The backflow prevention within the building and the stub-out just outside the building will be provided by others in a prior phase.

9) Provide the site electrical fixtures and mount the owner-furnished clock.

b. Work By Others 1) The video screen and truss columns, located on the west side of the

plaza, will be provided by others during the course of this phase. c. Document References

1) Proposed site utilities are shown on Sheet CS1. 2) Proposed pavement or other surface sections are identified on

Sheets CS1, CS2, L103 and L104.

BROADWAY PLAZA



3) Details of the bracket clock are shown on Sheet L104. 4) The layout and final grades for the plaza are shown on Sheets L102

and L201. 5) The site electrical layout is shown on Sheet ME1. 6) The building plumbing floor plan is on Sheet ME2. 7) Specifications related to this work include Division 0, Division 1

(excluding Section 015000), Section 033000, Section 055213, Section 099100, Section 107413, Section 129300, Division 13, Division 26, Section 312000, Section 321313, Section 321373, Section 321824, Section 323119, Section 328400, Section 329443, Section 334100 and Section 334600.

d. Duration 1) Work of this phase shall be substantially complete within 80 calendar


5. Phase 5 Landscaping a. Scope of work

1) Provide all topsoil, planting soil and compaction required for landscape work.

2) Provide all plantings and turf areas and their associated materials. 3) Adjust irrigation heads and drip hoses as required.

b. Document References 1) The planting plan is shown on Sheet L301. 2) Specifications related to this work include Division 0, Division 1

(excluding Section 015000), Section 329119, Section 329220 and Section 329300.



1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes transferring the product from the Concordia airport hanger, installing the product and making electrical services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products: 1. Wall mounted clock system with remote clock controller as defined in Section 10

74 13 “Exterior Clocks.”

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. Construction Manager will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.7 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Streets and Sidewalks: Keep public access ways clear and available to the public

and emergency vehicles at all times. 2. In the event that closure of public access is required, provide clearly marked

barricades to prevent access.

1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise authorized by the Construction Manager. 1. 1. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: As agreed to with the Construction Manager.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed

utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Construction Manager's written permission before proceeding with utility

interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to occupants of adjacent building with Construction Manager. 1. Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed

disruptive operations.

BROADWAY PLAZA



2. Obtain Construction Manager's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms

used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published

as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes

referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000



© WSS 2015 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific



features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.





© WSS 2015 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1

SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.


© WSS 2015 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





© WSS 2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment.

4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element.



B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.



a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.



F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from

every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. Schedule of tests and inspections. 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:



1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled.






© WSS 2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings.


1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.



1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Project closeout activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:



1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow 10 working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.



3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within four days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before site mobilization, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.



c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Lines of communications. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of record documents. l. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Parking availability. u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. First aid. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 60 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.



4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings.



1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.






© WSS 2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Site condition reports. 6. Special reports.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

E. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

F. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

G. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.




A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 2. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 3. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 4. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 5. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 6. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Construction Manager’s administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.



1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.

2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Use of premises restrictions. c. Seasonal variations. d. Environmental control.

D. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 15 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. 16. Partial completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on



and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



© WSS 2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit an electronic schedule of submittals, arranged to allow sorting by chronological order by dates required by construction schedule and numerical order of specification sections . Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.



1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal Schedule: Submit within 14 days of Notice of Award. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect’s final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor certain digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form provided by Architect.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.



C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals

may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 14 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks.



5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

6. Include the following information, where applicable, within each submittal:

a. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials. b. Applicable reference standards. c. Options requiring selection by Architect.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.



a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in PDF electronic file format.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in PDF electronic file format:

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.



1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.



2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in PDF electronic file format:

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.



T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions.

1. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

a. Contractor’s approval stamp shall include Project name, submittal number, Specification Section number, name of reviewer, and date of approval.

2. Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval stamp.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

1. “No Exceptions Taken” - When the Architect marks a submittal "No Exceptions Taken," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

2. "Make Corrections Noted” - When the Architect marks a submittal "Make Corrections Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

3. "Revise and Resubmit" - When the Architect marks a submittal "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.

a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

4. "Rejected – Submit Specified Item" - When the Architect marks a submittal "Rejected – Submit Specified Item," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal. The Work covered by the submittal does not conform to the design concept or meet Contract Document requirements. Prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark

a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked “Rejected – Submit Specified Item” at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.



5. "Action Not Taken" - Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Taken."

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.



© WSS 2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.



E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.



2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

a. Contractor performed tests and inspections including subcontractor performed tests and inspections

1) Include required tests and inspections and Contractor elected tests and inspections.

b. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Owner performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents

3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.



2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:



1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

1. Should manufacturer’s instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

a. Do not proceed with Work without clear instructions from Architect.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.



2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Construction Manager.

2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager five days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager’s approval of mockups before starting work,

fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow five days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.



7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Develop and maintain Contractor's quality control program to perform inspections and testing of items of Work, including those of subcontractors, to ensure conformance to Contract Documents.

1. Perform quality control inspections on routine basis to ensure continuing compliance with Contract requirements.

2. Provide appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of Contractor's quality control program.

3. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, Site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

4. Ensure quality control procedures apply to manufactured and shop fabricated items. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Perform quality control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

6. Tests and inspections:

a. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility.

b. Tests and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

c. Where testing and inspections are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality control services.

d. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

e. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

f. Inspection procedures:

1) Ensure materials, Products, and equipment conform to requirements of Contract Documents, and required submittals have been reviewed by Architect as required by Contract Documents.

2) Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

3) Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 4) Confirm prior Work has been performed in accordance with requirements of

Contract Documents.



7. Contractor's inspection reports: Where quality control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality control service.

a. Submit report from each inspector and technician noting observation and recommendations made.

b. Indicate non-conforming items with explanation of cause, proposed remedial action, and corrective action taken.

c. Submit copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.



7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.



B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager’s reference during normal working hours. Submit updated log with each Application for Payment.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



© WSS 2015 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1

SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.


© WSS 2015 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 2. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov. 3. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 4. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov. 5. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 6. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov. 7. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 8. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity

Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 9. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

3. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 4. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point;

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.


© WSS 2015 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3

b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design

Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.

5. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 6. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See

USAB).






© WSS 2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.



D. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. 2. Provide construction service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient

locations. 3. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution

boxes. 4. Provide flexible power cords as required. 5. Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary electrical

installation before use.

a. Obtain required certifications and permits.

E. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. The intersection of 6th & Broadway is a part of Kansas Highway 9 and cannot be restricted or blocked without written permission from Kansas Department of Transportation.

2. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 3. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of existing parking areas for construction personnel.

1. When inadequate space is available for on-site parking, provide additional parking areas off-site.

2. Maintain dedicated parking for Owner and Architect.

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.



C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.

2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.

4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Secure partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.



4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."




© WSS 2015 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 01 42 00 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.



8. If off-site storage is required, provide bonded storage facilities.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:



1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.



2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.





© WSS 2015 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01 73 29 “Cutting and Patching” for removal, fitting, and repair work required to

restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work 4. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for Substantial Completion procedures and final

cleaning.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer.

E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.


© WSS 2015 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 2

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to


© WSS 2015 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 3

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."

E. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.


© WSS 2015 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 4

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and

90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.


© WSS 2015 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 5

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.


© WSS 2015 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 6

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



© WSS 2015 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1

SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for demolition of site elements and existing buildings.

2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 20 through 29 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.



7. Architect's Review and Acceptance: Obtain acceptance of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Acceptance does not relieve Contractor of its obligation to comply with the Construction Documents, nor does acceptance waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. Architect assumes no responsibility for means and methods of cutting and patching proposal or the effects of the final result.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced, and specialized firm.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.



B. Do not cut and patch construction exposed to the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the opinion of the Architect, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching.

1. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner, to result in a condition acceptable to the Architect.

C. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load carrying capacity or load deflection ratio.

D. Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Conveying systems. i. Electrical wiring systems. j. Operating systems of special construction.

E. Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Equipment supports. e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. f. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.

F. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections of Divisions 31 and 32 where required by cutting and patching operations.



5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils and grease, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.




© WSS 2015 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final Completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 01 73 29 “Cutting and Patching” for removal and repair of new construction

requiring modifications. 3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 4. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting final record Drawings,

record Specifications, and record Product Data.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.



1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Archtiect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.



9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect.



d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in PDF electronic file. Format. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:



a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

k. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

l. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

m. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. n. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 73 00 “Execution."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.



3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



© WSS 2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.



a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.



2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood.



3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions.



4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,



maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents."

F. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.




© WSS 2015 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. As a condition of Final Payment, provide Project Record Documents as follows:

1. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal: Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one set of prints.

2. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

3. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

a. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.



4. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

5. Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Locations of concealed internal utilities. i. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. j. Changes made following Architect's written orders. k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. m. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.



B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.



2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect’s reference during normal working hours.



© WSS 2015 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of the existing building and site elements as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and

environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Section 01 73 29 "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective

demolition operations. 4. Section 09 91 00 “Painting” for remediation requirements for lead-based paints. 5. Sections in Divisions 21 through 28 for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating

mechanical and electrical items.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.



3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's and tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. 6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for removal of building systems and analysis of buildings structures that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material and extent.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.



D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

D. Asbestos-Bearing Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials in the form of asbestos will be encountered in the Work.

1. Asbestos-bearing hazardous materials will be removed before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Lead-Based Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials in the form of lead-based paint are present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished.

1. Selective removal of lead-based materials is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Do not disturb lead-based materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.

B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

E. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

F. Engage a professional engineer to perform and engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.

C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding

with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.

4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

D. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.



3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

D. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.

E. Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before and during selective demolition operations.

3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.

1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.

B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each level before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing

before selective demolition operations began.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.



3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 19 mm (3/4 inch) at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings."

3.7 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.




© WSS 2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 09 61 13 “Floor Sealers” for liquid penetrating floor treatment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete Subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.




A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Samples: For vapor retarder.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, ready-mix manufacturer, and preconstruction testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."



B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

C. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) for slab-on-grade and 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS

A. Manufacturers/Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide materials by one of the following or other qualified concrete suppliers:

1. Abram Ready Mix, Inc. 2. Concordia Ready-Mix

2.2 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

2.3 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

2.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.



2.5 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire or plastic according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete slabs, where legs of wire bar supports sit on vapor retarding membranes, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire.

2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.

F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Florprufe 120. b. Raven Industries, Inc; Vapor Block VB15.



c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A. d. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Perminator 15 mil.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.


a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment for Concrete Floors Scheduled to Receive Floor Coverings: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.



3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment for Concrete Floors Scheduled to be Left Exposed: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 20 percent or 100 pounds, whichever is less.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings and Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50. 1. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m). 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Air Content: 4 to 7 percent.



4. Aggregates shall be proportioned such that mix design shall contain a minimum of 50 percent coarse aggregate per the gradation requirements specified in ASTM C33/C33M.

B. Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m). 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6. Aggregates shall be proportioned such that mix design shall contain a minimum of 50

percent coarse aggregate per the gradation requirements specified in ASTM C33/C33M.

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.



F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 12 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated, or if not indicated, at a maximum of 60’-0” (18

m) on center. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.



D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.



3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with waterproofing applied directly to concrete.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M),

for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.



3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.



a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3.12 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.



2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M will be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample or from each batch of concrete delivered to the Project site.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Additional tests will be performed when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.



4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample will be cast and cured in the laboratory.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; one set of two laboratory-cured specimens will be tested at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test will be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

8. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests will contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency will make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 24 hours of finishing.



© WSS 2015 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00 - 1

SECTION 03 45 00 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Architectural precast concrete panels.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing connection anchors in concrete. 2. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for wet- or dry-cast cast stone trim and accessories. 3. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for kickers and other miscellaneous steel shapes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and texture, preapproved by Architect.





B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption tests.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. 2. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each

unit. 3. Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface finish. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail

loose and cast-in hardware and connections. 5. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or

attached to structure or other construction. 6. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials.



7. If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept.

D. Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of three, representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).

1. Include example of painted lettering engraved into precast concrete.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For architectural precast concrete indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Show governing panel types, connections, types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement, and concrete cover on reinforcement. Indicate location, type, magnitude, and direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame from architectural precast concrete.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.


C. Material Certificates: For the following items:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Reinforcing materials. 3. Admixtures. 4. Bearing pads.

D. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

E. Preconstruction test reports.

F. Source quality-control test reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector who has retained a "PCI-Certified Field Auditor" to conduct a field audit of a project in same category as this Project and who can produce an Erectors' Post-Audit Declaration.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.



1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units or designated as an APA-certified plant for production of architectural precast concrete products.

C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

E. Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of two sample panels approximately 4 sq. ft. (0.4 sq. m) in area for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels.

1. Locate panels where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and

demonstrate adequacy of repair techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes. 3. After acceptance of repair technique, maintain one sample panel at manufacturer's plant

and one at Project site in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

4. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.


A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit unloading units temporarily on the ground or other rehandling.

B. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.

C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.

D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.

E. Handle and transport units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses that cause cracking or damage.

F. Lift and support units only at designated points indicated on Shop Drawings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS

A. Manufacturers/Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide materials by one of the following or other qualified concrete suppliers:

1. Abram Ready Mix, Inc. 2. Concordia Ready-Mix

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design architectural precast concrete units.

B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Loads: As indicated. 2. Design precast concrete units and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to

allow for fabrication and construction tolerances, to accommodate live-load deflection, shrinkage and creep of primary building structure, and other building movements as follows:

3. Thermal Movements: Provide for in-plane thermal movements resulting from annual ambient temperature changes of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

2.3 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that provides continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.

1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced form-release agent that does not bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

2.4 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117.




A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, white.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33/C 33M, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: Uniformly graded.

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand compatible with coarse aggregate; to match approved finish sample.

C. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

2.6 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A or ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.

D. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

1. For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon and 2.5 times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-Paint 20.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 BEARING PADS

A. Provide one of the following bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as recommended by precast fabricator for application:

1. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer



hardness of 50 to 70, ASTM D 2240, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa), ASTM D 412.

2. Frictionless Pads: PTFE, glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless or mild-steel plate, or random-oriented-fiber-reinforced elastomeric pads; of type required for in-service stress.

3. High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, high-density plastic or steel shims, and other accessories required to install architectural precast concrete units.

2.9 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

1. Use a single design mixture for units with more than one major face or edge exposed. 2. Where only one face of unit is exposed use either a single design mixture or separate

mixtures for face and backup.

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to ASTM C 642, except for boiling requirement.

F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.

G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.



2.11 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.

B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.

1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work. 2. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds limits specified in ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.

2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.

3. Place reinforcing steel to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

4. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses and specified in-place loads.



F. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

G. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units.

H. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.

I. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

J. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that does not show in finished structure.

K. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.

L. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.

2.13 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.

B. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each finished unit complies with the following product tolerances:

1. Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Exposed to View: As follows:

a. 10 feet (3 m) or under, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). b. 10 to 20 feet (3 to 6 m), plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), minus 3/16 inch (5 mm). c. 20 to 40 feet (6 to 12 m), plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). d. Each additional 10 feet (3 m), plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

2. Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Not Exposed to View: As follows:

a. 10 feet (3 m) or under, plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. 10 to 20 feet (3 to 6 m), plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 3/8 inch (10 mm). c. 20 to 40 feet (6 to 12 m), plus or minus 3/8 inch (10 mm). d. Each additional 10 feet (3 m), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. Total Thickness or Flange Thickness: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). 4. Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of the Two Diagonal

Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch/72 inches (3 mm/1830 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) total, whichever is greater.



5. Bowing: Plus or minus L/360, maximum 1 inch (25 mm). 6. Local Smoothness: 1/4 inch/10 feet (6 mm/3 m). 7. Warping: 1/16 inch/12 inches (1.5 mm/300 mm) of distance from nearest adjacent corner. 8. Tipping and Flushness of Plates: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 9. Dimensions of Architectural Features and Rustications: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2.14 FINISHES

A. Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match approved sample panels and as follows:

1. Honed Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and rubbing procedures.

B. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units with as cast finish.

2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, ASTM C 1610/C 1610M, ASTM C 1611/C 1611M, ASTM C 1621/C 1621M, and ASTM C 1712.

B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.

1. Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for additional testing and evaluation.

C. Strength of precast concrete units is considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements for concrete strength.

D. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, precaster will employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M and ACI 318 (ACI 318M).

1. A minimum of three representative cores shall be taken from units of suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect.

2. Test cores in an air-dry condition. 3. Strength of concrete for each series of three cores is considered satisfactory if average

compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.

4. Report test results in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports include the following:

a. Project identification name and number. b. Date when tests were performed. c. Name of precast concrete fabricator. d. Name of concrete testing agency.



e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.

E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.

F. Defective Units: Discard and replace recast architectural concrete units that do not comply with acceptability requirements in PCI MNL 117, including concrete strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not match approved samples, sample panels, and mockups. Replace unacceptable units with precast concrete units that comply with requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, bearing surface tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place concrete has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength and supporting steel or other structure is structurally ready to receive loads from precast concrete units.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are completed.

1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims as precast concrete units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.

2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.

3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch (19 mm).

C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

1. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.



D. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.

2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet as specified by AWS.

3. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply a minimum 4.0-mil- (0.1-mm-) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.

4. Visually inspect welds and remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.

E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot.

F. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout and finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment, without exceeding the following noncumulative erection tolerances:

1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:

a. Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3. Support Elevation from Nominal Support Elevation: As follows:

a. Maximum Low: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Maximum High: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 100 Feet (30 m): 1 inch (25 mm).

5. Plumb in Any 10 Feet (3 m) of Element Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Joint Width (Governs over Joint Taper): Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 7. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 8. Differential Bowing or Camber, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design:

1/4 inch (6 mm).




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E 165 or to ASTM E 709 and ASTM E 1444. High-strength bolted connections are subject to inspections.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.5 REPAIRS

A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. Architect reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet (6 m).

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.

D. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.

B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.



© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 1

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Clay face brick. 4. Cast stone trim. 5. Mortar and grout. 6. Steel reinforcing bars. 7. Masonry-joint reinforcement. 8. Ties and anchors. 9. Embedded flashing. 10. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 11. Masonry-cell fill.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:

1. Steel lintels in unit masonry. 2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.





B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing

bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 2

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units. 2. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Cast stone trim. 4. Colored mortar. 5. Weep holes/cavity vents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Decorative CMUs. 2. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Special brick shapes. 4. Cast stone trim. 5. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project. 6. Weep holes. 7. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations

establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Integral water repellant used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Reinforcing bars. 7. Joint reinforcement. 8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 3

D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness.

2. Build sample panels facing south. 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 4

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place.

B. Do not apply uniform roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.


A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, Tables 1 and 2.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 5

2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 5 feet (1.5 m) vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.

2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners and door jambs unless otherwise indicated.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514/E 514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. 2) Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.

C. Insulated Decorative and Regular CMUs: Where indicated, units shall contain rigid, specially shaped, cellular thermal insulation units complying with ASTM C 578, Type I, designed for installing in cores of masonry units.

1. Individually molded polystyrene units to fit into cells.


1) Concrete Block Insulating Systems, Korfil 2) Shelter Enterprises, In.

D. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive as determined by unit strength method testing.

2. Weight Classifications

a. Exterior Walls: Normal weight; 125 lb/cu. ft. (2002 kg/cu. m), except as otherwise indicated.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 6

b. Interior Partitions: Medium weight; 105 to 125 lb/cu. ft. (1682 to 2002 kg/cu. m), except for interior structural load-bearing partitions.

3. Initial Rate of Absorption: 13 pounds per cubic foot for all exterior concrete unit masonry and 15 pounds per cubic foot for all interior concrete masonry.

4. Provide concrete masonry units with the following characteristics:

a. Maximum linear shrinkage: 0.035 percent b. Maximum moisture content: 35 percent

5. Size: (Actual Dimensions): 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) wide by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) high by 15-5/8 inches (397 mm) long.

6. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample.

E. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Trenwyth Architectural Masonry Units.

2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive as determined by unit strength method testing.

3. Weight Classifications: Normal weight; 125 lb/cu. ft. (2002 kg/cu. m), except as otherwise indicated.

4. Initial Rate of Absorption: 13 pounds per cubic foot for all exterior concrete unit masonry and 15 pounds per cubic foot for all interior concrete masonry.

5. Provide concrete masonry units with the following characteristics:

a. Maximum linear shrinkage: 0.035 percent b. Maximum moisture content: 35 percent

6. Size: (Actual Dimensions): 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) wide by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) high by 15-5/8 inches (397 mm) long.

7. Pattern and Texture: Standard pattern, split-face finish. 8. Colors: Two colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.5 MASONRY LINTELS

A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.6 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 7

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216Grade , SW Type FBS, and as follows

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Kansas Brick & Tile Co., supplied by Cloud Ceramics.

2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 3350 psi (23.10 MPa).

3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67.

4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced."

5. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) long.

6. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. 7. Color and Texture: Pawnee Sand Modular supplied by Cloud Ceramics.

2.7 CAST STONE UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Custom Cast Stone 3. Midwest Cast Stone

B. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364.

1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory test-ing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.

C. Reinforce units as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) of material.

D. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces at least 1:12, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Fabrication Tolerances:


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 8

1. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater.

3. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch (10 mm) on unformed surfaces.

F. Cure and finish units as follows:

1. Cure units in enclosed, moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F (38 deg C) for 12 hours or 70 deg F (21 deg C) for 16 hours.

2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:

G. Acid etch units to remove cement film from surfaces indicated to be finished.

2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.


a. Davis Colors. b. Solomon Colors, Inc.

D. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:


1) Holcim (US) Inc. 2) Lafarge North America Inc.

2. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

3. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 9

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.


a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.

H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.


a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.

I. Water: Potable.

2.9 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.


a. Dur-O-Wal; a Hohmann & Barnard company. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. Wire-Bond.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 10

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with single pair of side rods.

E. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) wide, plus two side rods at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) wide or less.

2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe, but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and maximum vertical adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe.

2.10 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B-2 coating. 2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc

coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50 mm) long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units.

2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 11

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide single-screw veneer anchors for existing construction. 2. Fabricate wire ties from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire

unless otherwise indicated. 3. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a corrosion-resistant, self-

drilling, eye-screw designed to receive wire tie. Eye-screw has spacer that seats directly against existing construction.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; “2-Seal Concrete-Seal Tie.”

4. Polymer-Coated, Carbon Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 14 (6.76-mm) diameter by length required to penetrate existing construction with not less than three exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

2.11 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 3-inch (76-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.


1) Cheney Flashing Company. 2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.

4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop at walls adjacent to pedestrian walkways. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

6. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated. 7. Solder metal items at corners.

B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal

flashing.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 12

C. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts designed to be built into mortar bed joints and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.


a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. b. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.

D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn96, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and remain watertight.

E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity. Use only for weeps.

2. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch (9-mm) OD by 4 inches (100 mm) long.

3. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm) long.

4. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.


1) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 13

2) Wire-Bond.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mortar Net USA, Ltd “Mortar Net” or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

2. Configuration: Provide one of the following:

a. Strips, full depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail-shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.

2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.


a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a division of Sandell Construction Solutions. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. PROSOCO, Inc.

2.14 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type N. 4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is

not indicated, use Type N.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 14

C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Mix to match Architect's sample. 3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Decorative CMUs. b. Clay face brick. c. Cast-stone trim units.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa).

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.



A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 15

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet ((6 mm in 3 m),) or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 16

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in runningbond, stack bond, or bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches (100 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

H. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay face brick and CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed

anchors and ties in mortar.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 17

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Set cast-stone units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes.

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.

2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 4. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 COMPOSITE MASONRY

A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:

1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (914 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically.

2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.

B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of other wythe into place.

C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units as well as masonry bonding.

D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows:

1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped

units.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 18

3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.

3.7 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:

1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically.

a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties. b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use

adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.

c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

C. Parge cavity face of backup wythe in a single coat approximately 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick. Trowel face of parge coat smooth.

3.8 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 25

inches (635 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. (0.33 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 19

B. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of backup construction.

1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.

3.9 MASONRY-CELL FILL

A. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.

3.10 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and

parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.11 ANCHORING MASONRY TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

A. Anchor masonry to existing construction to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide between face brick and existing construction unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor brick with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to existing construction.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

1. If not indicated, locate control joints at the lesser of the following:

a. A distance of 20 feet (6 m) on center. b. A distance equal to 1-1/2 times the height of the wall.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 20

2. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.

3. In addition to the above requirements and unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, provide vertical control joints in masonry walls as follows:

a. Within 10 feet of wall corners and intersections, b. Adjacent to and over openings:

1) On one side of openings less than 6’-0” (1.8 m). 2) On both sides of openings 6’-0” (1.8 m) wide and greater.

c. Changes in wall height or wall thickness, such as at pipe and duct chases and pi-lasters.

d. At movement construction joints in foundations, in roofs, and in floors.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.

Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 2. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch

(10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.13 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.14 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents at


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 21

shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm), and 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into the inner wythe.

3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer, and up face of existing construction at least 8 inches (200 mm). Fasten upper edge of flexible flashing to sheathing through termination bar.

4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

5. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

6. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

E. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products or open-head joints to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking

down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 4. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 5. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with

loose-fill insulation. 6. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.

F. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

G. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/cavity vent products or open-head joints to form cavity vents.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 22

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.15 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 23

3.17 PARGING

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in two uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat, and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.18 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 7. Clean cast stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.

3.19 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.


© WSS 2015 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 24

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



© WSS 2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 1

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.


1. Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame and not defined as structural steel. 3. Section 09 91 00 "Painting" for surface-preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.





B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings.



3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. 5. Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator and testing agency.


C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

D. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

E. Survey of existing conditions.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P3 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."



1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C. Construction: Combined system of moment frame and shear walls.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345).

B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.



E. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain.

C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain.

D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Section 09 91 00 "Painting."

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.



B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or

erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.



B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

C. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

D. Splice members only where indicated.

E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.



G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting."




© WSS 2015 STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 1

SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.


1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel

shapes. 3. Section 09 91 00 "Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.



B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 ROOF DECK


1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. Cordeck. 3. Epic Metals Corporation. 4. Nucor Corp.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:

1. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib. 3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch (0.75 mm). 5. Span Condition: Double span or more.



6. Side Laps: Overlapped.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

G. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.

H. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.

I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M or SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

J. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.



D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per

deck unit at each support. Space welds 18 inches (457 mm) apart or, if required by FMG, maximum 12 inches (305 mm) apart in the field of roof and 6 inches (150 mm) apart in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28.

3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 18 inches (457 mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Roof Sump Pans: Install over openings provided in roof deck and mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one fastener at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and mechanically fasten.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.



1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.

2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Section 09910 “Painting."




© WSS 2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Miscellaneous steel trim. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.



B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; 0.0966-

inch (2.5-mm) minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel.

F. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 00 "Painting."

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.



D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.



2.7 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

C. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting."

2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed be-low:



1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

C. For galvanized handrails and railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

D. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

E. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting."

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.



3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M, Annex A2.



© WSS 2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 1

SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe handrails and railings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this section.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected handrails and railings.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans, ele-vations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components indicated below and of same thickness and metal indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations ex-pected.

1. 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, includ-ing handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.

2. Fittings and brackets.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon-strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci-fied.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.




A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to prac-tice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering ser-vices of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installa-tions of handrails and railings that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, de-sign, and extent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

1.6 STORAGE

A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.


A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before fab-rication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railings with-out field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions corre-spond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings, tem-plates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.



C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C, material surfaces).

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

B. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

2. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

1. For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

3. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.



D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit ma-sonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing ac-cording to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Stainless Steel: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Cold Galvanizing Repair Compound: Premixed liquid organic zinc compound, complying with the following:

1. Primer: Organic zinc rich primer utilizing either an epoxy or urethane binder with a mini-mum volume solids of 52 percent and a minimum zinc content of 95 percent by weight in the dry film and complying with the requirements for ASTM A780 for galvanizing repair. Apply two coats of primer at a rate to achieve a dry film thickness of 1.5 mils per coat. Finish shall replicate the appearance of the original galvanizing to the greatest extent possible.

a. Available Product: "ZRC" Galvilite Galvanizing Repair Compound.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, di-mensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that re-quired to support structural loads.

B. Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending.

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member through-out entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.

E. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings de-signed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.



F. Interconnect members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated.

1. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined, and weld all around.

2. Weld joint for pipes, tubes, and bars shall match Finish #1 as defined by NOMMA “Guideline 2; Joint Finishes.”

G. Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to inter-connect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by hand-rails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

I. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.

J. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or other-wise impairing the Work.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

L. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.

M. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

N. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for rec-ommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, tempo-rary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are ac-ceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are ac-ceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of handrails and railings.



2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed be-low:

1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

C. For galvanized handrails and railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

D. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

E. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting."

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechani-cal or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of

steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads.

3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.



B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than re-quired to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inch-es (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.

3.3 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Anchor posts to concrete surfaces with round floor type flanges as required by conditions, connected to posts as follows:

1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 2. Use anchorage devices and fasteners for securing posts and for properly transferring

loads to in-place construction.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair gal-vanizing to comply with ASTM A 780, Annex A2.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.




© WSS 2015 FORMED-METAL FABRICATIONS 05 58 00 - 1

SECTION 05 58 00 - FORMED-METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Stainless steel counters.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation requirements for sealing edges and interfaces of counters with surrounding surfaces.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of the following formed-metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of components and their connections. Show an-chorage and accessory items.


A. Deliver formed-metal fabrications wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.

B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing formed metal similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient pro-duction capacity to produce required units.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each formed-metal item through one source from a single manufac-turer.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Where formed-metal fabrications are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for formed-metal items. Furnish setting drawings, tem-plates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assem-blies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL

A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, except use Type 316 for exterior applications.

1. Satin Finish: No. 4 directional satin.


A. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recom-mended by producer of metal to be welded or brazed and as necessary for strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.

1. Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined and will not cause discol-oration.

B. Fasteners: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting formed-metal fabrications and for attach-ing them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble formed-metal fabrications in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of formed-metal fabrications with those of ad-joining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush sur-faces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch (12-mm) wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a ra-dius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) and support with concealed stiffeners.



D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness specified for stretcher-leveled sheet metal and sufficient strength for indicated use.

1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment.

E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoin-ing construction. Reinforce formed-metal units as needed to attach and support other construc-tion.

F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and acces-sories needed to install formed-metal fabrications.

G. Where welding is required, weld joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to pro-duce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.

1. Use welding procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration of metal being joined.

2. Weld shop-made joints, and grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured finish, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

3. Where field-made joints are required, provide hairline butt-joints mechanically bolted through continuous channels welded to underside at edges of joined ends. Keep field jointing to a minimum.

2.4 COUNTERS

A. Counters: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Ease exposed edges and corners. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets.

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: 0.060-inch (1.6-mm) nominal thickness. 2. Extend top down 1 inch (25 mm) at edges with a 1/2-inch (13-mm) return flange under

frame. Apply heavy coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to undersurface. 3. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface. 4. Provide rolled edge, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conceal fasteners where possible; otherwise, locate where they will be as inconspicuous as possible. Size fasteners to support closures and trim, with fasteners spaced to prevent buckling or waviness in finished surfaces.

C. Drill and tap holes needed for securing closures and trim to other surfaces.

D. Miter or cope trim members at corners and reinforce with bent metal splice plates to form tight joints.

2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for rec-ommendations for applying and designating finishes.



B. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet finish.

C. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

D. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured finish, free of cross scratch-es and matching No. 4 satin finish. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

E. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

F. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, tempo-rary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place formed-metal fabrications level, plumb, and in alignment with adjacent con-struction.

B. Use concealed anchorages. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Seal edges of counters and interfaces with dissimilar materials with clear sanitary grade silicone sealant.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of formed-metal fabrications from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.



© WSS 2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Interior and exterior plywood panels.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners.


A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent, unless otherwise indicated.



2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof blocking. 3. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in

connection with roofing. 4. Plywood backing panels.



2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Joists and Rafters: Select Structural grade, in one of the following species:

1. Southern pine; SPIB. 2. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. 5. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 6. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. 7. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.6 PLYWOOD PANELS

A. Provide concealed plywood with 15 percent maximum moisture content.

B. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.



D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



© WSS 2015 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 54 23 - 1

SECTION 07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation and cover boards. 4. Copings

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.

1. Section 06 10 00 “Rough Carpentry” for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for metal roof penetration flashings,

flashings and counterflashings. 3. Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definition of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section.


A. Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that ma-terials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing, fastening

spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing. 4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

C. Samples for Verification: Of the following products:

1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.

2. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) squares of roof insulation. 3. Full-size concrete roof paver in each color and texture required with pedestal.



4. 12-inch (300-mm) length of metal termination bars. 5. 12-inch (300-mm) length of battens.


A. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is ap-proved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that the roofing system complies with requirements specified in the "Performance Requirements" Article. Upon request, submit evidence of meeting requirements.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of components of roofing system with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product compositions.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of roofing system's compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Warranty: Sample copy of standard roofing system manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.

G. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roof-ing installation.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Sec-tion 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project and who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners, and flashings for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by mem-brane roofing manufacturer.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.



B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liq-uid materials from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, mois-ture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent de-flection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard "Full System War-ranty," without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace compo-nents of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warran-ty period. Failure includes roof leaks. Warranty shall include all roofing components and ac-cessories from the roof deck up, exclusive of vegetative roofing assembly.

1. Warranty shall be signed by the President of roof system manufacturer. Warranty shall include a 72 MPH Wind Warranty.

2. Special warranty includes roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, roofing accessories, roof pavers, and other components of roofing system, exclusive of vegetative roofing assembly.

3. Provide form that was submitted in product literature as of date of Contract Documents, for a period of 15 years after date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. GAF Materials Corporation. 3. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.




A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. FM Global (FMG) Listing: Roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FMG 4450 or FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A- 90. 2. Hail Resistance: SH.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response char-acteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL, FM, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-tion. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class B; ASTM E 108, for application and slopes indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which

roofing materials are a part.

2.3 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim re-inforced, uniform, flexible fabric-backed TPO sheet.

1. Thickness: 80 mils (2.0 mm), nominal. 2. Exposed Face Color: White. 3. Physical Properties:

a. Breaking Strength: 225 lbf (1 kN); ASTM D 751, grab method. b. Elongation at Break: 25 percent, minimum; ASTM D 751. c. Tearing Strength: 70 lbf (312 N) minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B. d. Brittleness Point: Minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C). e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch- (75-mm-)

diameter mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F (40 deg C) and an ozone level of 100 pphm (100 mPa); ASTM D 1149.

f. Resistance to Heat Aging: 100 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 573.

g. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at 158 deg F (70 deg C); ASTM D 471.

h. Solar Reflectivity: ASTM C 1549 and E 408; White membrane, minimum 75 percent based on Solar Spectrum Reflectometer.

i. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204.



2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intend-ed use and compatible with membrane roofing material.

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdic-tion.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, thickness, and color as sheet membrane.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.

D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars, approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide by 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, roll formed and prepunched.

E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide by 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick, prepunched.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions of FMG 4470, designed for fastening sheet to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. Fasteners shall be sized to extend no more than 1/2 inch through the upper flute of the steel roof decking.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flash-ings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, seam calk, termination reglets, and other accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

1. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard rubberized asphaltic lap adhesive, FMG approved for vapor-retarder application.

2.6 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roofing manufac-turer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indi-cated and that produce FM Global-approved roof insulation..

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. GAF Materials Corporation. c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.



C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where in-dicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for in-tended use and compatible with sheet roofing material.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions of FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and ac-ceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: One of the following Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive. 2. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive. 3. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.

D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, factory primed.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Company.

2.8 COPINGS

A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with finish matching coping caps.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer-ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ATAS International, Inc. b. Hickman Company, W. P. c. Merchant & Evans, Inc. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. e. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Coping Caps: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, nominal 0.034-inch (0.86-mm) thickness.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded. 4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Face leg hooked to continuous cleat with back leg

fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.

a. Face-Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with require-ments in Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation accord-ing to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of the roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retard-er, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), respectively.

1. Seal laps with tape. 2. Seal laps with roofing membrane manufacturer's standard adhesive.

B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.



B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated and to Shop Drawings.

D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches (50 mm) or greater, install required thickness in 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints stag-gered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. Set subsequent layers of insulation by one of the following methods: a. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation ad-

hesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. b. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insula-

tion adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.

1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.5 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before in-stalling.

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimen-sions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.



D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufactur-er, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring.

H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements.

I. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing as recom-mended by manufacturer.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.

F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termi-nation bars.

3.7 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.

1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine com-pliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing membrane from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair sub-strates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and deteriora-tion at the time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures required by manufacturer of affected construction.



© WSS 2015 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1

SECTION 07 62 00-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.



B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of finish for each item. 4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and

expansion-joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.



C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.


2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Surface: Mill phosphatized for field painting.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Solder for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.




A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

2.5 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.



4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.

Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel

and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

H. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.

3.2 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.



B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm).

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.3 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.




© WSS 2015 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants.




A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Product test reports.

B. Preconstruction laboratory test reports.

C. Preconstruction field-adhesion-test reports.

D. Field-adhesion-test reports.

E. Sample warranties.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.




A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials.

3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with stone substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following:

1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of

250 g/L or less. 3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of

775 g/L or less.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.



B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS. b. Momentive Performance - Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. c. Pecora Corporation; 898NST. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonalastic TX1. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic.

B. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.


a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterSeal SL 1 (Pre-2014: Sonolastic SL1).

b. Pecora Corporation; NR-201.

C. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.


a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterSeal SL 2 (Pre-2014: Sonolastic SL2).

b. LymTal International Inc; Iso-Flex 880 GB. c. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 200. d. Tremco Incorporated; THC 900/901.

2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.




a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; SCS1700

Sanitary. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.



B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints in stone masonry c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 25, NT.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT.



C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior and exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.



© WSS 2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Results:

1. Hollow-metal doors and frames.


1. Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware” for door hardware and coordination requirements. 2. Section 09 91 00 “Painting” for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, and finishes for each type of hollow metal door and frame specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide a schedule of hollow metal doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings:

C. Coordination Drawings: Drawings of each opening, including door and frame, drawn to scale and coordinating door hardware. Show elevations of each door design type, showing dimensions, and locations of door hardware.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.



1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.

1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating hollow metal frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following members of the Steel Door Institute (SDI):

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 3. CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. 4. Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Kewanee Corporation (The). 6. Mesker Door Inc. 7. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 8. Republic Builders Products Company. 9. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.



2.2 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) b. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with

minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. c. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. d. Core: Vertical steel stiffener.

1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch (1.7 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.



C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate hollow metal doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.

2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm).

3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets.

4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.



1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish hollow metal door and frames after assembly.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm).

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of hollow metal doors and frames.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.

B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:



1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install hollow metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames for doors, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.

b. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Hollow Metal Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).




A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Clean grout and other bonding material off hollow metal doors and frames immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.




© WSS 2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 1

SECTION 08 33 23 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of manually operated overhead coiling doors:

1. Counter shutters.


1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.


A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components:

1. Wind Load: Uniform pressures (velocity pressure) indicated on the Drawings, acting inward and outward.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of coiling counter door and accessory.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed

on structure.

C. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Curtain Slats: 12 inches (305 mm) long. 2. Bottom Bar: 6 inches (150 mm) long. 3. Guides: 6 inches (150 mm) long.



4. Brackets: 6 inches (150 mm) square. 5. Hood: 6 inches (150 mm) square.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COUNTER DOOR ASSEMBLY


1. Clopay Building Products. 2. Cookson Company. 3. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 4. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 5. Overhead Door Corporation. 6. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.

C. Curtain R-Value: 4.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.792 K x sq. m/W).

D. Door Curtain Material: Stainless steel.

E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) center-to-center height.

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. 2. Gasket Seal. Manufacturer's standard continuous gaskets between slats.

F. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated stainless steel and finished to match door.

1. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene; for placement between angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion bumper for interior door.



G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Stainless steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise.

H. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.

1. Shape: Square. 2. Mounting: Face of wall.

I. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Stainless steel.

1. Mounting: Face of wall.

J. Sill Configuration: No sill.

K. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock and chain lock keeper.

L. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.

2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Stainless-Steel Door Curtain Slats: ASTM A 666, Type 304; sheet thickness of 0.025 inch (0.64 mm); and as required.

2. Insulation: Fill slat with manufacturer's standard polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within metal slat faces.

3. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat.

B. Endlocks for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.

C. Curtain Jamb Guides for Service Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) thick galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.

D. Curtain Jamb Guides for Counter Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of stainless-steel sheet, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.



2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Stainless Steel: 0.025-inch- (0.64-mm-) thick stainless-steel sheet, Type 304, complying with ASTM A 666.

B. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Provide welded assemblies of the following sheet metal:

1. Fabricate from minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick stainless-steel sheet, Type 304, complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666.

C. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.

1. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.

D. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

E. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load.

C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.

D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

2.5 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. Provide manual chain-hoist operators.



B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Provide manual chain-hoist operator consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 35-lbf (155-N) force for door operation. Provide alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.


A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install coiling counter doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.




© WSS 2015 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format[ and use same door numbers] as in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.

2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.

3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the



course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

3. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

D. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames shall be prepared and reinforced to receive the installation of the specified hardware without additional in-field modifications.


A. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:



1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.

2.2 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

B. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000.


a. Allegion plc. b. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Hager Companies. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.4 AUXILIARY LOCKS

A. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.


a. Allegion plc. b. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Hager Companies. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.



1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.

B. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.6 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

1. No Master Key System: Only change keys operate cylinder. 2. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders. 3. Existing System:

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. b. Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system.

4. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.

2.7 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Operating Trim includes push plates, door pulls, push bars, and pull bars


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.



2.8 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.9 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


a. Hager Companies. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc.

2.10 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.


a. Hager Companies. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc.

2.11 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.

B. Metal Protective Trim Units include door protection plates




a. Allegion plc. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.12 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE

A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.

B. Auxiliary Hardware includes door stops and door guards.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.13 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.



C. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

D. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

F. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

G. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.




© WSS 2015 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16 - 1

SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Results:

1. Interior gypsum board ceilings. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.



B. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.

C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.


A. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufac-turer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

D. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS

A. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board for Ceilings: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.2 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Exterior Soffit Board. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; ToughRock Fireguard. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Exterior Soffit Board. d. United States Gypsum Company; USG Sheetrock® Brand Exterior Gypsum

Ceiling Board.

2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X or C.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.



c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape for Interior and Exterior Gypsumboard: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsumboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated.

C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. United States Gypsum Company.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 954.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.3 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.



B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

G. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels, except in chases braced internally.

1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

H. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

3.4 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Mold-Resistant Type: On ceilings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.5 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.

1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.

2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Do not crimp accessories for attachment.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.



C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:

1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Section 09 91 00 “Painting.”

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



© WSS 2015 FLOOR SEALERS 09 61 13 - 1

SECTION 09 61 13 - FLOOR SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes clear penetrating floor for Restroom floors.


A. Provide products that comply with the following requirements:

1. VOC compliant. 2. Oil and chemical resistance. 3. Eliminates dusting of concrete surfaces. 4. Maintains slip resistance of 0.80 dry and 0.69 wet.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for floor sealers.

B. Samples: 12 inch square sample of material on concrete surface.

C. Weather Conditions: Proceed with installation when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following

1. Permanent Water and Stain Resistant Sealer:

a. “Consolideck LS“ ProSoCo, Inc. b. “Euco Diamond Hard,” Euclid Chemical Co. c. “Ashford Formula,” Curecrete Distribution, Inc. d. “Protecrete with Repeller,” Applied Concrete Technology, Inc. e. “ChemTec One,” ChemTec International f. “Dynasylan BH-N Plus,” Degussa


© WSS 2015 FLOOR SEALERS 09 61 13 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for preparation of substrates to receive floor sealer.

B. Clean all floor surfaces of old paint, trash, concrete spillage, etc. to ensure concrete slab to be sealed is restored to original condition.

C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive floor sealer and close off floor drains, to prevent spill-age and migration of liquid materials outside membrane area.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Permanent Sealer: As recommended by manufacturer

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide protections to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance.



© WSS 2015 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 1

SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following substrates:

1. Shop fabricated structural steel and miscellaneous metals. 2. Shop primed metal surfaces. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Interior and exterior gypsum board.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel Framing” for fabricated steel requiring shop application of primer.

2. Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications” for fabricated miscellaneous items requiring shop application of primer.

3. Section 05 52 13 “Pipe and Tube Railings” for fabricated railings requiring shop application of primer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.


A. Source Limitations for Field Applied Systems: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

1. Applicator shall verify compatibility of field applied materials with shop applied primers. Application of finish coat establishes acceptance of primed surfaces.

B. Benchmarks: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.


© WSS 2015 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 2

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.


A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).

B. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during applica-tion and drying periods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Sherwin-Williams Co.

2.3 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Compliance: Provide materials that comply with the Air Quality Control regulations of the local Air Quality Management District having jurisdiction over the location of the project or EPA Region II. In the event that local regulations are silent on specific applications, comply with the National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings (40 CFR Part 59)

C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application


© WSS 2015 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 3

indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

2.4 PAINT COLORS

A. Basis-of-Design Colors: The design is based on the colors indicated by manufacturer's designations in the Finish Legend. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide exact duplicates of the named colors.

2.5 PAINT MATERIALS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for each type of paint is based on the products named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

B. Primers:

1. Latex Based Interior Primer: Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC “Interior Latex Primer” B28W02600.

2. Epoxy Block Filler: Sherwin Williams “Kem Cati-Coat Epoxy Block Filler," B70 Series. 3. Miscellaneous Metals and Steel Rust Inhibiting Primer: Sherwin-Williams “Pro-Industrial

B66-310 Series. 4. Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal Primer: Sherwin-Williams “DTM Acrylic

Primer/Finish B66W1.”

C. Finish Paint Materials:

1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Industrial B66-650 Series. 2. Finish: Two component, high-performance, high solids solvent borne epoxy coating:

Sherwin Williams: "Macropoxy 646-100 Fast Cure Epoxy," B58-620/B58V620."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 18 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.


© WSS 2015 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 4

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete and concrete masonry surfaces to be painted.

Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where mois-ture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Ferrous Metals:

a. Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with surface preparation specifications prepared by The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC).

b. Abrasive blast clean steel surfaces as recommended by paint system manufactur-er and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.

c. Treat bare and abrasive blast cleaned metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

d. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

C. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written in-structions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.


© WSS 2015 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 5

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain paint before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detri-

mental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,

convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiators, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings into these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed sur-faces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting within eight hours of preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. Sand between applications to produce a smooth, even surface accord-ing to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Omit full coat primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.

a. Repair damaged shop-applied primer by spot priming with compatible materials.

3. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to en-sure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for material applied and of appropriate size for the surface or item being coated.


© WSS 2015 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 6

a. Apply primers and first coats by brush unless manufacturer's written instructions permit using roller or mechanical applicators.

b. Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. c. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness,

or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for the material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply coating if permitted by manufactur-er's written instructions and governing regulations.

a. Use airless or air-assisted spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

b. Apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. c. Do not double back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two coats in

one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. Finish coats shall be provided in the dry film thickness specified in the schedules located at the end of this Section.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work: Paint the following equipment and materials that are exposed in the finished project, except in janitor and mechanical rooms.

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

2. Electrical Work: Paint the following equipment and materials that are exposed in the finished project, except in janitor and mechanical rooms.

a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

F. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

G. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.4 SHOP PAINT SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide the following paint system for the substrate indicated.


© WSS 2015 PAINTING 09 91 00 - 7

B. Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metal Shapes and Plates:

1. Primer: Rust Inhibiting Primer (3 mils)

3.5 FIELD PAINT SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide the following paint system for the various substrates indicated.

B. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units in Areas Subject to Moisture and Food Preparation:

1. High-Performance, Amine-epoxy Coating:

a. Block Filler: Acrylic Cementitious Block Filler b. First Coat: Polyamine Epoxy Finish (4 mils) c. Second Coat: Polyamine Epoxy Finish (4 mils)

C. Interior and Exterior Gypsum Board on Ceilings:

1. High-Performance, Amine-epoxy Coating:

a. Primer: Polyamine Epoxy Primer (4 mils) b. First Coat: Polyamine Epoxy Finish (4 mils) c. Second Coat: Polyamine Epoxy Finish (4 mils)

D. Ferrous Metal, including hollow metal doors and frames; touchup damaged shop applied primers:

1. Primer: Rust Inhibiting Primer 2. First Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils) 3. Second Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)

E. Shop Primed Structural Steel: Miscellaneous Shapes and Plates: touchup damaged shop ap-plied primers.

1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish: Three coats

a. First Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils) b. Second Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)

F. Galvanized Metals:

1. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer 2. First Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils) 3. Second Coat: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Polymer (3 mils)




© WSS 2015 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 1

SECTION 10 14 23 - PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Panel signs. 2. Room-identification signs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers.



B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square, including corner. 2. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample. 3. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.



E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.




B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.

2.2 SIGNS


1. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Best Sign Systems, Inc. 3. InPro Corporation (IPC). 4. Seton Identification Products.

B. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Laminated Aluminum-Sheet Sign: Aluminum sheet laminated to both sides of acrylic core sheet with painted edges.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl or film paint.

2. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated over subsurface graphics to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl or film paint

3. Laminated Polycarbonate-Sheet Sign: Polycarbonate face sheet laminated to each side of phenolic base sheet to produce composite sheet.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl or film paint.

4. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Sign: Plastic-laminate face laminated to contrasting phenolic core to produce composite sheet.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Engraved Graphics: Characters engraved through plastic-laminate face sheet to

expose contrasting phenolic core. c. Plastic-Laminate Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range. d. Core Color: Manufacturer's standard dark color.

5. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition, Vertical and Horizontal Edges: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.

6. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with concealed anchors. 7. Surface Finish and Applied Graphics:

a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish and Graphics: Manufacturer's standard, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



b. Painted Finish and Graphics: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied acrylic polyurethane, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

c. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating.

8. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille typeface as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color.

9. Flatness Tolerance: Sign panel shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions as indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner.

C. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated to

acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl or film paint. c. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Beveled. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with concealed anchors. 4. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille typeface as selected by

Architect from manufacturer's full range. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color.

2.3 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

B. Polycarbonate Sheet: ASTM C 1349, Appendix X1, Type II (coated, mar-resistant, UV-stabilized polycarbonate), with coating on both sides.

C. Fiberglass Sheet: Multiple laminations of glass-fiber-reinforced polyester resin with UV-light stable, colorfast, nonfading, weather- and stain-resistant, colored polyester gel coat, and with manufacturer's standard finish.

D. Plastic-Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3, general-purpose HGS grade, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal thickness.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:



a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper-resistant spanner-head slots unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.

5. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other trades into concrete or masonry work.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

4. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 5. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel surface indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.

1. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply manufacturer's standard opaque background color coating to back face of acrylic sheet.

3. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to expose contrasting core ply.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.



B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

2. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.



2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as indicated and according to accessibility standard.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.




© WSS 2015 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 19 - 1

SECTION 10 21 19 – PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Overhead braced solid plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.



B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains.

C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product certificates.





1. Door Hinges: Six hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: Three latches and keepers with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: Three door bumpers with associated fasteners. 4. Door Pull: Three door pulls with associated fasteners. 5. Fasteners: Thirty fasteners of each size and type.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS


1. Accurate Partitions Corp.; ASI Group. 2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 3. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 4. Scranton Products.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Floor anchored.

D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, no-sightline system, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, stainless-steel strip fastened to

exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion. 3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

E. Pilaster Shoes: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters; with shoe matching that on the pilaster.

G. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

2.2 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.



1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick stainless-steel continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber-tipped cast-stainless-steel bumper at out-swinging doors. Mount with through-bolts.

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

C. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

C. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes at posts to conceal anchorage.

D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels; 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls.

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

C. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

D. Floor-Anchored Urinal Screens: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (51 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Attach screens to walls with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.



© WSS 2015 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 1

SECTION 10 28 13 – TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Warm-air dryers. 3. Underlavatory guards. 4. Custodial accessories.


1. Section 10 21 19 "Plastic Toilet Compartments" for robe hooks mounted in each toilet compartment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.





1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Hand Dryer Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace repair or replace defective hand dryers that fail under normal use and service due to material or workmanship defects within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide indicated products by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. or comparable products by one of the following:

1. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI). 2. Bradley Corporation.

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Model B-B-2888. 2. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch- (127-mm-) diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

C. Grab Bars:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Model B-6806.99. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: Straight, as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Model B-254. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Hinged Lid: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).



E. Mirror Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Model B-2908. 2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.

a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: 24 inches by 36 inches (600 by 900 mm). 5. Glazing: 1/4 inch (6 mm) tempered plate glass complying with ASTM C1036.

F. Diaper-Changing Station:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick (Koala Kare Child Care) Model KB110-SSWM. 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with

child-protection strap.

a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-lb (113-kg) static load when opened.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches (100 mm) from wall when closed.

4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin), with replaceable insulated

polystyrene tray liner and rounded plastic corners. 6. Liner Dispenser: Built in.

2.2 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES



B. Mop and Broom Holder:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Model B-239. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, and holders beneath shelf. 3. Length: 34 inches (864 mm). 4. Shelf Size: 8 inches (203 mm) deep. 5. Hooks: Four. 6. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 7. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.



2.3 WARM-AIR DRYERS



B. High-Speed Warm-Air Dryer:

1. Basis of Design Product: Bobrick Model B-778: 2. Description: High-speed, warm-air hand dryer for rapid hand drying. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with operation time of 10 to 20 seconds. 5. Cover Material and Finish: Bright-polished chrome, one-piece aluminum die-cast cover. 6. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 132A, 1380 W.

2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS


1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.

B. Underlavatory Guard:

1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446.



© WSS 2015 EXTERIOR CLOCKS 10 74 13 - 1

SECTION 10 74 13 - EXTERIOR CLOCKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Installation of Owner-furnished exterior wall mounted clock system with remote clock controller including connecting to building electrical service.


1. Facility Services Subgroup Sections for electrical components including but not limited to conduit, wiring, and junction boxes necessary for clock controller.

1.2 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO CONTRACTOR

A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings for installation of tower clock and connections to building power system, and installation of remote clock controller will be provided by the Owner. Drawings will include plans, elevations, and large scale details of clock numeral and marker layout. Anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details will be shown. Furnish Location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction will be included.

1. For components supported by or anchored to permanent construction, setting drawings, full-size spacing templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other appropriate anchors will be furnished.


A. UL Compliance: Electrical components for exterior tower clocks will be labeled and listed by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.


A. Fabricated clocks will not be delivered to the site until they are ready for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CUSTOM TOWER CLOCK MATERIALS

A. Owner-Furnished Products: Electric Time Company, Inc., “Renaissance Design,” Style WP-63A30-MI.

1. Dial Face:

a. Material: Provide aluminum dial with off-white finish.


© WSS 2015 EXTERIOR CLOCKS 10 74 13 - 2

b. Crystal: Flat, clear tempered glass. c. Overall Size: 39-3/4-inches (1010 mm) in diameter d. Sight Opening Size: 28-1/2-inches (725 mm) in diameter

2. Frame, Casing, and Mounting Brackets: Aluminum components 3. Movement: Synchronous, totally enclosed, high torque, hysteresis motor used to drive

into a cast aluminum gear box with permanently lubricated worm gear reducers. 4. Remote Clock Control: 115-Volt, 60-Hertz controller.

a. Product: Electric Time Company, Inc., “99B-MI Clock Controller.” b. Controller will have internal battery backup in order to keep time during power

failures.

B. Finish: Baked-enamel or powder-coat complying with AAMA 2603.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts.

B. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate and install clock and remote clock controller in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Location: mounted and installed, according to manufacturer’s recommendations, in a remote location Place in Electrical Room in Restroom Building.

C. Touchup damaged areas of ship finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish



© WSS 2015 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61 - 1

SECTION 12 36 61 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications” for countertops supports.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square.


A. Maintenance Data: For quartz agglomerate countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS-1, except for composition.




a. Cambria. b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. c. LG Chemical, Ltd.

2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions and the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Countertops: 3/4-inch (20-mm) thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same material.

D. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch (20-mm) thick, quartz agglomerate.

E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

a. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch (10-mm) radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening.

2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m).

B. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

D. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

E. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.

F. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."




© WSS 2015 SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 1

SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Planters.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch- (152-mm-) long linear components and 4-inch- (102-mm-) square sheet components.

E. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANTERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Landscape Forms, Rosa,” or comparable product by one of the following:

1. FairWeather Site Furnishings; a division of Leader Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Sitecraft 3. Victor Stanley, Inc.


© WSS 2015 SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 2

B. Plastic Facing Surrounds: UV resistant molded lightweight polyethylene (LMPDE) shape.

C. Planter Shape and Form: As indicated by specific product specified with drain hole.

D. Overall Depth: 23 inches (585 mm).

E. Overall Diameter: 36 inches (900 mm).

F. Installation Method: Surface mounted.

G. LMPDE Color: Millstone.

1. Finish: Smooth.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant.

1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic LMPDE resin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and positioned at locations indicated on Drawings.


BROADWAY PLAZA


AQUATIC PLAY EQUIPMENT 131414 - 1

SECTION 13 14 14 - AQUATIC PLAY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Aquatic play equipment. B. Activation devices for aquatic play equipment.

C. Controllers for aquatic play equipment.

D. Distribution Manifold

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to the General Conditions for Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for specified systems, including all

components.

C. Shop Drawings

1. Indicate component connection details and details of interface with adjacent construction, utilities, and equipment, including plumbing, electrical, and layout of proposed sprays.

D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate installation instructions for specified equipment including

each component.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instruction for specified equipment.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with not less than five (5) years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum of three (3) years experience.

C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters’ laboratories (UL) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. This installation shall comply with all applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following

codes:

NEC National Electrical Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association UBC Uniform Building Code

BROADWAY PLAZA



UPC Uniform Plumbing Code

B. Materials furnished hereunder shall comply with the latest edition of applicable standard specifications published by the following organizations:

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ANSI American National Standards Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering AWWA American Water Works Association CS Commercial Standards NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation

1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install aquatic playground materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation,

temporary construction, and special or occasional services as required to effect a complete working installation, as shown on the Drawings and described in the Specifications.

B. Work included:

1. Aquatic playground equipment, valves, and piping. 2. Plumbing and electrical services including water, waste, and power supply to designated points of connection with site utilities.

1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Protection:

1. Equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. Equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times prior to installation. Pumps motors, electrical equipment, and other equipment having anti-friction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weather-tight warehouses that are maintained at a temperature of at least 60 degrees F.

2. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted surfaces that are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

3. Electrical equipment controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture or water damage. Space heaters and sump pumps provided in the equipment shall be kept connected and operating at all times until the equipment is placed in service.

4. Store materials under cover and elevated above grade.

B. Replacements: 1. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to

the approval of Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Equipment not listed within these Specifications or on Drawings as furnished by the equipment

supplier, but required for the complete installation of the water feature mechanical or electrical systems, shall be furnished by the Contractor.

B. Products shown on the Drawings, but not listed in this Section, shall be provided in accordance

with information shown on the Drawings and the General Provisions of this part of the Specification.

BROADWAY PLAZA



C. Recommended manufacturer 1. Water Odyssey™ by Fountain People, Inc., P.O. Box 807, 4600 Highway 123, San

Marcos, TX 78666, telephone (512) 392-1155, facsimile (512) 392-1154. Local Water Odyssey™ Representative: ATHCO, LLC. Telephone (913-469-5600).

2. OR Approved Equal.

2.02 AQUATIC PLAY EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Aquatic playground materials and component parts shall be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and workmanship, for a period (two years) from date of shipment. Additional warranties shall include; 1. Coating system shall be warranted for a period of (two years) against peeling or fading

under normal environmental conditions. 2. Stainless steel pipe and anchor bases shall be guaranteed against structural failure for

a period of (twenty-five) years under normal usage. 3. Controller shall be guaranteed against failure for a period of (three years) under normal

usage.

2.03 AQUATIC PLAY EQUIPMENT

A. Spray components shall be designed to operate at the specified flow rates.

B. Anchoring, mounting and assembly hardware shall be constructed of 304/304L Stainless Steel,

cast Bronze or Red Brass. All anchoring systems shall include an integrated leveling system facilitating a flat surface installation free of non-compliant protrusions. Exposed and accessible hardware shall be tamper resistant, vandal deterring, theft resistant and shall require a special tool for removal

C. Top Plates, Component Heads and Spray Nozzles shall be constructed of materials resistant

to vandalism, deterrent to theft, require special tools for removal and free from degradation in transmitting pressurized, chemically treated, potable water. Top Plates, Component Heads and Nozzles constructed of Stainless Steel, Bronze or Red Brass shall be given preference.

D. Where color coated finishes are appropriate or specified, the color coating shall be Aqua

Armor™; an elastomeric polymer that is vandal resistant, UV resistant and resistant to degradation in the presence of chemicals at measureable levels typically used to maintain proper water quality levels in swimming pools.

E. Accessible edges shall be rounded, beveled or otherwise designed to prevent safety hazards.

All components and component parts shall be designed to ensure a safe play environment with no pinch points, head entrapments or protrusion hazards. All products shall be designed in accordance and compliant with ASTM F1487, ASTM F2461 and CSA Z614-98 standards for public playgrounds and aquatic playgrounds.

F. All play equipment shall be bonded/grounded per the requirements of NEC article 680 and the

codes of the local jurisdiction of authority concerning non-residential, permanently installed swimming pools or fountains.

G. Concrete footings shall be as shown on the Drawings and specified. The Contractor shall

provide all labor, material and equipment to construct the concrete footings as shown and shall conform with concrete design specifications.

H. Winterization covers shall be supplied with Aquatic Play Equipment.

BROADWAY PLAZA



2.04 PLAY FEATURES

A. Play Feature Equipment List:

1 Each W093 Water Odyssey™ Water Weave™ 7 Each W228 Water Odyssey™ Air Stick™ 5 Each W344 Water Odyssey™ Duet Jet – Mini Series™

B. W093 Water Weave™

1. Housing: The below grade canister shall be constructed of 20 gauge deep-drawn type 304 stainless steel with bonding/grounding connection and 2" FPT inlet. It shall be supplied with 3/8" threaded, 18/8 stainless steel anchor/leveling bolts with nuts, washers and a wooden pour template. Bonding/grounding shall be compliant with codes of the jurisdiction having authority.

2. Top Plate Anchors: The housing stabilizers and plate anchors shall be ½" x 5" machined brass with 30° hook bend

3. Construction Cover: The temporary cover shall be a reusable flat 13" diameter HDPE (high density polyethylene) plate. 4. Top Plate: The operational cover shall be a 13" diameter, slightly domed, cast bronze

plate with interchangeable nozzle assembly. 5. Gaskets: The leak preventing seal shall be an O-Ring of 70 durometer EPDM 6. Fasteners: All accessible fasteners shall be tamper-resistant 18/8 stainless steel. 7. Nozzle: The 18 nozzles for the operational plate shall be constructed of precision

machined brass. 8. Interactive water effect: The spray pattern shall be a basket weave pattern of water

streams. 9. Hydraulic Requirements: The designed operational water supply shall be a maximum

14GPM @ 2PSI and produce a 4’ High x 8’ Diameter spray pattern. 10. Finish: When specified for solid, patterned or theme painted coloring the component

shall be coated with Aqua Armor™; a UV stabilized, textured structural elastomeric polymer with a UV and chlorine resistant sealer coat.

C. W228 Air Stick™ 1. Housing: The below grade housing shall be constructed of machine cast bronze with

bonding/grounding connection and 2" FPT inlet. It shall be supplied with ¼”-20" threaded, 18/8 stainless steel anchor/leveling bolts with nuts, and washers.

2. Construction Cover: The temporary cover shall be an adhesive polyethylene tape. 3. Top Plate: The operational cover shall be a 3 1/4"" diameter, slightly domed, cast

bronze plate with interchangeable Delrin® nozzle assembly. 4. Fasteners: All accessible fasteners shall be tamper-resistant 18/8 stainless steel. 5. Nozzle: The interchangeable nozzle for the Stepper Series operational plates shall be

constructed of precision machined Delrin®. 6. Interactive water effect: The spray pattern shall be a highly aerated stream of water. A

child steps on the movable nozzle to turn it off or to divert water when on a common manifold with other components

7. Hydraulic Requirements: The designed operational water supply shall be 5.2GPM @ 6PSI and produce a 4’ High stream spray pattern.

8. Finish: When specified for solid, patterned or theme painted coloring the component shall be coated with Aqua Armor™; a UV stabilized, textured structural elastomeric polymer with a UV and chlorine resistant sealer coat.

D. W334 Duet Jet™ Mini Series 1. Housing: The below grade housing shall be constructed of machine cast bronze with

bonding/grounding connection and 2" FPT inlet. It shall be supplied with ¼”-20" threaded anchor/leveling bolts with nuts, and washers.

BROADWAY PLAZA



2. Construction Cover: The temporary cover shall be an adhesive polyethylene tape. 3. Top Plate: The operational cover shall be a 3"" diameter brass stock with ¼” thick top

flange. Overall length shall be approximately 1”. The Top Plate nozzle insert shall have 2”NPS (straight) threads

4. Fasteners: All accessible fasteners shall be tamper-resistant 18/8 stainless steel. 5. Nozzle: The interchangeable Top Plate nozzle insert for this Series shall have precision

machined orifices through the Top Plate to achieve the desired water spray effect 6. Interactive water effect: The spray pattern shall be two arching streams. 7. Hydraulic Requirements: The designed operational water supply shall be 6 GPM @

3PSI. 8. Finish: The finish shall be polished brass.

2.05 AQUATIC PLAY ACTIVATION DEVICES

A. Equipment List:

1 Each W017-W Water Odyssey™ Wireless Launch Pad

B. W017-W Wireless Launch Pad™ 1. Housing: The flush mount (at grade) housing is machined from solid PVC stock. 2. Anchors: The housing plate anchors shall be stainless steel concrete anchors supplied

by the Manufacturer. 3. Fasteners: All accessible fasteners shall be tamper-resistant 18/8 stainless steel. 4. Transmitter: The radio frequency transmitter shall be solid state with encoded signal

and integral, omni-directional antenna. 5. Activator Power: The Transmitter Board shall be powered by an integral 3 Volt lithium

CR2477 style battery 6. Finish: When specified for solid, patterned or theme painted coloring the component

shall be coated with Aqua Armor™; a UV stabilized, textured structural elastomeric polymer with a UV and chlorine resistant sealer coat.

7. Safety and Compliance: the spray feature meets ASTM safety standards, is ADA compliant, and inspected by a Certified Playground Safety Inspector prior to shipment of product.

2.06 DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD

A. Equipment List:

1 Each WMFS-06 Water Odyssey™ Distribution Manifold

B. WMFS-6 Distribution Manifold 1. Distribution Header: The distribution manifold header shall be 4” type 304 stainless

steel pipe with flanged connections on both ends. 2. Water Hammer Arrestor: The water hammer arrestor shall be 2” copper and brass

construction with pre-set operating pressure of 10-35 PSI. 3. Drain Valve: The distribution manifold header shall have a ¾” hose bib style drain valve

constructed of cast bronze. 4. Pressure Gauge: The distribution manifold header shall have a 0-60 PSI discharge

pressure gauge 5. Solenoid Valves: The distribution manifold header shall have six solenoid valves

constructed die cast bronze with stainless steel hardware, DIN connector with 15’ cord and 24 VAC UL Recognized.

6. Balancing Valves: The distribution manifold header shall include six true union ball valves constructed of schedule 80 PVC for balancing and throttling the discharges.

7. Mounting Brackets: Shall be type 304 stainless steel with stainless steel u-bolt.

BROADWAY PLAZA



2.07 CONTROL PANEL

A. Equipment List:

1 Each DSC-0-16-W Water Odyssey™ DSC Series Controller

B. DSC-0-16-W Dynamic Sequencing Controller™ 1. Housing: The enclosure shall carry a NEMA 4X rating with a lockable hasp. 2. Input Power Supply: The input power supply shall be 120VAC/60 Hertz, 20 Amps

capacity. 3. Power Cord: The power cord shall be 6 foot, 16-3 type SJT with grounded plug 4. Output Power Supply: The output power supply shall be 24VAC/60 Hertz, 0.75 Amps

capacity continuous per output. 5. Cord Seals: The cord seals shall be PVC compression seal fittings with neoprene

gland for 16-2 solenoid valve cables. 6. Time Clock: The time clock shall be integral, electronic, 7 day, 24 hour. 7. Interface: The user interface shall be an integral keypad with 20 keys and a 4 x 20

backlit LCD display. 8. Antenna/Receiver: The antenna/receiver shall be enclosed in a weather resistant PVC

housing with 150 feet of CAT 5 crossover cable supplied.. 9. Programmable Events: The programmable events shall be timed duration, cycled,

defined, random and/or cued sequencing. The events shall be field adjustable. The program shall not exceed a 60 gpm flow rate.

10. Programming: The programming shall be through the keyboard interface, set at the factory and shall be field adjustable.

11. Safety: The Dynamic Sequencing Controller shall be ETL and Underwriters’ Laboratories Listed.

12. Wireless Inputs: The Controller shall have the capacity to receive 32 wireless inputs maximum.

13. Outputs: The Controller shall have the capacity to receive 16 outputs of the specified output power supply.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SITE AND DRAWING EXAMINATION

A. Contractors submitting a proposal for this work shall first examine the site of the proposed

work that they may fully understand facilities, difficulties, and restrictions attending the execution of the contract. No subsequent allowances shall be made because of omission, error, or negligence in connection with this provision.

B. Contractors submitting a proposal for this work shall carefully examine the Drawings and

Specifications. C. Questions pertaining to work that do not appear to be sufficiently detailed or explained, or

pertaining to the true meaning of any part of the Drawings or Specifications, or discrepancies found existing in or between the Specifications and Drawings, shall be referred to the Owner’s Representative for clarification or correction.

3.02 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with subcontractors of other trades, whose work is in anyway affected by, or affects the work under this Section.

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. The Contractor shall coordinate the work under this Section with that of other trades to effect a complete installation consistent with the requirements and intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

B. The Contractor shall furnish materials so as to avoid delay in the progress of the work and

shall store them as to prevent interference with other work.

3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install and connect all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations unless otherwise noted. If specified installation is contrary to manufacturer's instructions, cease installation of affected components or systems.

Notify Owner’s Representative and do not resume installation without clear instructions. B. Protect pipes, conduits, and equipment from damage from inclement weather. C. Parts to be cast in concrete shall be located as detailed on the Plans shall be rigidly supported

to resist loads imposed during concrete pour. D. Water pipe lines shall be flushed free of debris as follows:

1. Completely drain water feature piping and equipment. 2. Remove construction debris and thoroughly sweep all reservoirs and play area clean.

Do not flush debris from play area into system drainage system.

3.04 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIALS

A. Materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings, or different

from the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, or defaced or injured, shall be removed and satisfactory material and work substituted.

3.05 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, the Contractor shall remove unused equipment

and implements of service, and leave the entire area involved in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition as approved by the Owner.

1. Soiled, abraded, or discolored surfaces of the aquatic play area shall be cleaned and left free from blemishes or defects.

3.06 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. General: The Contractor shall test equipment installed by him to show that it complies with specified requirements. Testing shall be done in a manner approved by the Architect.

B. Electrical tests:

1. Electrical circuits, feeders, and equipment shall be tested and proven free of faulty grounds, open circuits, or shorts, as required by local codes.

2. Contractor shall, at his expense, make the aquatic playground operational and make tests, adjustments, and corrections, until it is shown to be in proper operating condition.

END OF SECTION


BROADWAY PLAZA


ORAZEM & SCALORA ENGINEERING, PA. 14046

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 1

SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. This Section of the Specification includes the furnishing and installation of complete drainage, water supply, plumbing fixtures and other equipment as described herein and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. The requirements of Section 23 01 00, Basic Mechanical Requirements, apply to this work.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit complete printed catalog and descriptive data for each major piece of equipment, clearly indicating exactly what features, options and accessories are being provided.

B. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals, and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or series designation.

C. See Section 23 01 00.

1.3 SEWER, WATER AND GAS CONNECTIONS:

A. Connections to street or on site sewer, water and gas services shall be in accordance with the requirements of the 2012 International Plumbing Code, the respective Utility Company and the City. Pay all associated fees including tap charges and cost of meter installations.

B. Before any new sewer work is done, the Contractor shall uncover the sewer line where connection is to be made and shall determine the actual elevation. If the actual elevation of the sewer at the point of connection is such that the new drainage line cannot be installed with the required slope to the new fixtures, the matter shall be referred to the Architect as soon as possible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING:

A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe: Hub-and-spigot cast-iron pipe not larger than 15-inch size shall be service weight ASTM A74, coated. All changes in pipe size of soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reduction fittings or reducers. Changes in direction, where space permits, shall be made with long sweep bends, Y-fittings and 1/8 or 1/16-bends, or combination Y and 1/8-bends. Sanitary tee branches and 1/4-bends may be used for connections of branch lines to fixtures and on vertical runs of pipe. Hub-and-spigot cast-iron pipe larger than 15-inch size shall be Type II or III; Grade C, cast-iron pressure pipe.

1. Gasketed Joints: Molded neoprene elastic compression type gaskets. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 564, and pipe, fittings, and gaskets shall bear the symbol of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured with the spigot ends plain and beveled, and the bells shall be modified to receive the gaskets. Service weight soil pipe and fittings shall be joined with service weight gaskets. Service weight gaskets shall be clearly designated and identified. A

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 2

lubricant shall be used in making the joints. When the joint is completed, a tight seal shall be formed between the external face of the pipe and the internal face of the bell. Gaskets shall be capable of making and maintaining a tight seal with a deflection not to exceed 5 degrees. Deflection of pipe will not be allowed to avoid the use of a fitting. Joints shall be assembled by the tools and as recommended by the pipe, fittings, and gasket manufacturers.

B. "N0-Hub" Cast-Iron Pipe: "No-Hub" cast-iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Specification 301 and ASTM A-888. Pipe, fittings, and couplings shall bear the symbol of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. "No-Hub" piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Threaded Steel Pipe: Threaded steel pipe shall be galvanized, Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A 53.

D. Threaded Copper Nickel Steel Pipe: Threaded copper nickel steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A 714, Grade V, galvanized.

E. Threaded Cast Iron Pipe: Threaded cast iron pipe shall comply with ASTM A-74.

1. Fittings on threaded ferrous soil, waste, and drain piping, including storm drainage piping and couplings on pipes 6- inches and smaller, shall comply with ANSI B 16.12. Short tee branches and short turn elbows may, except for wall hung water closets, be used for connections of branch lines to fixture and on vertical runs of pipe; long turn fittings shall be used in all other locations where space permits. Fittings may be galvanized or black, coated or uncoated. Couplings on pipes 8-inches and larger shall be standard weight steel, zinc-coated (galvanized) and need not be recessed; steel couplings shall not be used on piping 6- inches and smaller.

2. Fittings on threaded ferrous vent pipes shall comply with ANSI B 16.3, B16.4, or B 16.12. Couplings shall be as specified above for soil, waste, and drain piping.

F. Copper Tubing: Copper tubings shall be Type M, in accordance with ASTM B-88, or Type DWV in accordance with ASTM B 306. Ends of tubing shall be cut square and shall be reamed before being made up. Tubing ends shall enter the full depth of the fitting recesses without binding.

1. Fittings for copper tubing shall be solder type, recessed drainage pattern, of wrought copper or cast brass. Recesses shall be smooth and correctly sized to provide proper clearance over the tubing. Solder shall be composition 95/5 tin-antimony or Brigit. Flux shall be noncorrosive. Tubing ends and fitting recesses shall be thoroughly cleaned. Solder shall penetrate fully and shall fill the joint completely.

G. Plastic Pipe and Fittings:

1. Schedule 40 PVC, ASTM D-1784 with solvent welded joints. 2. Schedule 40 CPVC - ASTM D-1784 and F441 with solvent welded joints, Type IV, Grade 1

chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), with a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not higher than 50 per ULC S102.2.

2.2 UNDERGROUND WATER PIPING:

A. Underground domestic water piping beyond five feet outside the building shall be as specified by the Civil Engineer.

B. Underground water piping beneath the building to a point five feet outside the building shall be one of the following:

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 3

1. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX).

a. Material Standard: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 and tested for compliance by an independent third party agency.

1) Standard grade hydrostatic design and pressure ratings from Plastic Pipe Institute. 2) Minimum Bend Radius (cold bending): No less than 6 times the outside diameter. Use

a bend support as supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer for tubing with a bend radius less than stated.

3) Nominal Inside Diameter: Provide tubing with nominal inside diameter, in accordance with ASTM F876.

b. Fittings:

1) Joints below grade shall be avoided if possible. 2) Fittings shall be of a type approved by the piping manufacturer for the application, and

shall be supplied by piping manufacturer. 3) Material: Fittings shall be suitable for direct burial in earth, and shall be manufactured

from one of the following – 4) Same material as piping. 5) Pollyalloy (ASTM 2359). 6) Bronze (w/ stainless steel sleeve) (ASTM 877). 7) Dezincified brass (ASTM 1807). 8) Material Standard: Comply with ASTM F1960.

c. Accessories

1) Bend supports designed for maintaining tight radius bends shall be supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

2) Tools required to install the piping fittings shall be supplied by the PEX tubing manufacturer.

3) The tubing manufacturer will provide clips and/or PEX rails for supporting tubing runs.

d. Warranty:

1) Warranty Period for PEX piping and fitting system shall be 25-year, non-prorated warranty against failure due to defect in material or workmanship, beginning with date of substantial completion.

e. Acceptable Manufacturers – Mr. Pex, Uponor, Viega.

2. Copper tubing, Type K, soft drawn, ASTM B-88.

a. Joints below grade shall be avoided if possible. b. Where necessary, joints below grade shall utilize fittings of the recessed solder-joint type of

either wrought copper or cast brass. Solder shall be silver solder having a melting point of not less than 1120°F. Adapters for connection to threaded valves, fittings, meters and other equipment shall be cast brass. Recesses shall be smooth and correctly sized to provide proper clearance over the tubing.

2.3 ABOVEGROUND WATER PIPING:

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 4

A. Aboveground domestic water piping 3-inches in size and smaller, shall be copper tubing, Type L, hard drawn, ASTM B-88. Fittings shall be one of the following:

1. Recessed solder- joint type of either wrought copper or cast brass. Adapters for connection to threaded valves, fittings, meters and other equipment shall be cast brass. Recesses shall be smooth and correctly sized to provide proper clearance over the tubing. Solder shall be composition 95/5 tin-antimony or Brigit. Flux shall be noncorrosive. The solder shall contain no lead.

2. Mechanical grooved joint pipe couplings may be used for connecting equipment to the piping system, headers, and distribution piping in lieu of soldered tube or fitting connections for water piping with NSF-61 rated temperatures to +180°F.

a. Coupling housing clamps shall consist of two ductile iron castings complying with ASTM A-536, cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads. Housing clamps shall hold in place an elastomer water sealing gasket of a FlushSeal® pressure responsive design. Clamps and gaskets shall be manufactured to copper-tube dimensions. (Flaring of tube or fitting ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted.)

1) Victaulic Style 607 ‘Quick-Vic’ installation ready coupling, for direct stab installation without field disassembly.

2) Victaulic Style 606.

b. Fittings shall be manufactured to copper-tube dimensions, ASME B16.22. Victaulic Copper-Connection.

c. Flange Adapter: Flat face, ductile iron housings with elastomer pressure responsive gasket, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. For use with copper-tube dimensioned grooved ends. Victaulic Style 641.

3. For pipe sizes 1-1/2” and smaller, Victaulic Permalynx push-to-connect ASME B16.22 or B16.18 fittings and couplings may be used for operating pressures to 200 psi. Fittings shall be complete with 301 stainless steel internal components and NSF-61 rated EPDM seal.

4. Viega ProPress Fitting: Copper and copper alloy press fittings shall conform to material requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements for press fittings shall be EPDM. Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied by fitting manufacturer. Press end shall have SC (Smart Connect) feature design (leakage path). Smart Connect ™ (SC Feature) In ProPress ½” to 4" dimensions the Smart Connect Feature assures leakage of liquids and/or gases from inside the system past the sealing element of an unpressed connection (when testing from ½ to 85 psi). The function of this feature is to provide the installer quick and easy identification of connections which have not been pressed prior to putting the system into operation.

B. At contractor’s option, branch piping serving toilet rooms and downstream of toilet room isolation valves, and piping serving individual fixtures may be PEX piping as specified for underground water piping.

2.4 UNDERGROUND SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN PIPING:

A. Underground soil, waste, vent and storm drainage piping shall be as follows (unless otherwise indicated on Drawings):

1. Underground sanitary and storm drain lines shall be hub- and-spigot cast-iron, or plastic pipe.

2.5 ABOVEGROUND SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN PIPING (includes condensate drain piping):

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 5

A. Aboveground soil, waste, vent and drainage piping:

1. Where exposed in rooms or where located in return air plenums, piping may be hub- and-spigot cast iron, or "No-Hub" cast iron, threaded galvanized steel, threaded copper nickel steel, threaded cast iron, copper tubing, or CPVC pipe. PVC piping shall not be used where exposed or located in return air plenums.

2. Where installed inside walls or above ceilings that are not return air plenums, piping may be hub- and-spigot cast iron, or "No-Hub" cast iron, threaded galvanized steel, threaded copper nickel steel, threaded cast iron, copper tubing, PVC or CPVC pipe.

3. Exposed waste piping and fittings in toilet rooms, and in finished areas, shall be chromium plated brass. Pipe shall be red brass, standard weight, iron pipe size and thickness, ASTM B-43, and fittings shall be threaded cast-brass of the recessed drainage pattern. Chromium plated piping shall be carefully measured and cut so that no more than one full turn of thread shall be exposed beyond any fittings. Joints between brass and ferrous pipes shall be threaded.

2.6 TRAPS:

A. Traps shall be extra heavy cast-iron, ASTM A-74. Above ground 'P' (1/2S) traps have threaded brass cleanout plugs in the bottoms of same.

B. Provide deep seal traps on all floor drains.

2.7 CLEANOUTS AND FERRULES:

A. Cleanouts shall be installed as shown on Drawings and where required by the building code.

B. Cleanout plugs for threaded fittings shall be in accordance with Table 52 of CS 188. Except for test openings, where size must be sufficient to admit test plug, bushings will be permitted on pipes 5-inches and larger to reduce plug size to 4-inches; cleanout plugs for piping 4-inches and smaller shall be the same size as the pipe.

C. Cleanout plugs for hub-and-spigot fittings shall be screwed into ferrules caulked into the fitting. Ferrules and plugs shall be in accordance with Table 54 of CS 188.

D. Cleanout plugs on copper drainage lines shall be installed in solder-joint fittings having threaded openings provided for the cleanout, or in solder-joint fittings with threaded adapters.

E. Acceptable Manufacturer - Josam, MiFab, Smith, Zurn, Wade.

2.8 FLASHING:

A. Provide flashing where floor drains are installed in waterproofed floors above grade, consisting of a sheet of 4# lead at least 12-inches in diameter greater than outside diameter of drain collar, and flash waterproofing membrane into flashing clamp devices provided with drains.

B. Openings in roof for sanitary vent pipes shall be flashed and soldered watertight. Flashings shall be either sheet lead, weighing not less than 4 pounds per square foot, flanged and made watertight at roof and extended around and up into vent pipes; or flexible rubber boots clamped to vent pipe and flashed into roofing. Coordinate compatibility of flashing type with roofing contractor. Products and installation shall be watertight and shall be approved by the National Roofing Contractor's Association.

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 6

2.9 DIELECTRIC ISOLATORS:

A. Provide a dielectric isolator at all points of connection between ferrous and nonferrous piping. Isolators shall be made of Teflon or nylon made up in the form of screwed type unions or insulating gaskets and bolt sleeves and washers for standard flanged connection.

B. Dielectric adapter nipple with grooved and/or threaded ends may be used in lieu of unions or flanged connections. The nipple shall be electroplated steel or ductile iron, with inert thermoplastic lining. Victaulic Style 47.

C. Connections may be made with Schedule 80 CPVC nipples, nylon or Teflon bushings selected for the temperatures and pressures of the system.

2.10 VALVES:

A. All valves shall be designed for 125 psi minimum water working pressure, but in no case less than 150% of the system operating pressure, whichever is greater.

B. Provide valves with extended necks in insulated piping.

C. All valves installed in potable systems shall be lead-free in accordance with Federal Government S.3874.

D. Ball Valves:

1. For size 4- inch and smaller shall be 2 piece, full port brass ball valves with RPTFE seats and packing, blow out proof stem, and sweated or threaded ends.

a. Equivalent to Apollo 77FLF.

E. Check Valves:

1. Check valves 2-inch in size and smaller shall be soldered bronze body, horizontal swing check type with regrindable seat and Buna-N disc.

a. Equivalent to Nibco S-413.

2. Check valves 2 1/2-inch in size and larger shall be flanged, cast iron, spring actuated, , horizontal swing check type with stainless steel spring, aluminum bronze bushing, Buna-N bonded to bronze seat, and bronze disc.

a. Equivalent to Nibco F-910-B-LF.

F. In lieu of brass or bronze valves with threaded ends, brass or bronze valves with recessed ends for brazing or soldering may be used on piping having recessed brazing fittings and on tubing having recessed solder fittings, respectively.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers – Apollo, DeZurik, Legend, Milwaukee, Nibco, and Victaulic, Watts.

2.11 WALL HYDRANTS:

A. Wall hydrants shall be cast bronze, chrome plated nonfreeze type with 3/4-inch inlet and 1-inch copper casing of sufficient length to extend through walls as required to place valve inside the building. Valve

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 7

rod and seat washer shall be removable through the face of the hydrant. Hydrants shall be furnished complete with adjustment locknuts, union elbows, detachable T-handles, and integral vacuum breaker.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Josam, MiFab, Prier, Smith, Wade, Watts, Woodford, Zurn.

2.12 FIXTURE SUPPLY PIPING SUPPORTS:

A. Support and position fixture rough-in piping in plumbing chases, shafts, fixture walls or batteries, at each fixture with metal strut framing system or angle iron supports and U- bolt clamps or high impact polystyrene or ABS anchoring channels designed for the purpose. Anchors shall effect positive electrolytic isolation, noise dampening, solid support, and rough-in positioning.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Sumner, Pipefix, Channel.

2.13 BACK-TO-BACK FIXTURE MANIFOLD:

A. Wherever fixtures utilizing both hot and cold water are installed back-to-back on a partition, the hot water shall be on the left and the cold water shall be on the right on both sides of the partition. Cast bronze manifold fittings designed for the purpose, and to offset around stack may be used.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Precision Plumbing Products "BAC 2 BAC", or approved equal.

2.14 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL:

A. Provide plumbing fixtures scheduled, at locations and mounting heights indicated on architectural drawings.

B. Provide fixture, trim and equipment specified or of similar quality, design, capacity, appearance and function by acceptable manufacturer listed.

C. Provide required trim for each fixture including faucets, stops, drains, tail pieces, traps and escutcheons.

D. Flush valves shall be factory matched to the fixture and performance tested as a complete unit.

E. Fixtures fitted to walls shall have backs ground square and true. Caulk juncture of fixture with wall or floor as directed by the Architect.

F. Exposed Pipe - Exposed flush, waste and supply pipes at fixtures shall be chromium plated brass pipe, iron pipe size.

G. Vandalproofing - Provide vandalproof fittings for all fixtures.

H. Acceptable Manufacturers -

1. Fixtures - American Standard, Crane, Gerber, Kohler, Sloan, Toto, Zurn. 2. Faucets and Drains - American Standard, Bradley, Chicago, Delta, Eljer, Elkay, Gerber, Kohler,

Powers, Sloan, Speakman, Symmons, Zurn. 3. Supplies, Stops and Traps - Central, Crane, Dearborn, Eljer, McGuire. 4. Closet Seats - Church, Beneke, Olsonite, Sperzel. 5. Carriers - Josam, MiFab, Smith, Wade, Watts, Zurn. 6. Service Sinks - Florestone, Fiat, Stern-Williams.

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 8

7. Floor Drains, Roof Drains and Downspout Nozzles - Josam, MiFab, Smith, Wade, Watts, Zurn. 8. Stainless Steel Sinks - Advance Tabco, Elkay, Just, Kohler, Kindred, Revere.

2.15 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

A. See Section 23 01 00.

2.16 WATER HEATER - ELECTRIC, INSTANTANEOUS TYPE:

A. Provide wall mounted, electric resistance, instantaneous, point of use water heater as scheduled on the drawings. Unit shall compy with UL 499 and shall be without water storage.

B. Unit working pressure shall be 125 psig minimum.

C. Interior materials shall comply with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable water tank linings. Jacket shall be aluminum or steel with enameled finish, or plastic.

D. Temperature control: flow control fitting in inlet piping.

E. Safety control: automatic, high temperature-limit cutoff device or system.

F. Acceptable Manufacturer – Chronomite Laboratories, Inc., Eemax, Inc., Stiebel Eltron.

2.17 SHOCK ABSORBER:

A. Shock absorbers shall be factory fabricated stainless steel casing and bellows with working pressure of 250 psi, bellows precharged with nitrogen. Construction shall be in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH201, ANSI A-11, 2.26.1, and ASSE 1010.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Josam, MiFab, Smith, Wade, Watts, Zurn.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION:

A. Do not route piping above electrical distribution equipment, per National Electric Code.

3.2 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS:

A. Pitch drain lines at 1/8-inch per foot minimum and 1/4-inch per foot where possible.

B. Drainage below grade - Install immediately after excavation. lay pipe so that entire length gears on firm soil. Excavate for hub. Do not backfill until installation has been observed.

C. Above Grade - Install in structure as high as possible. Independently support each length of cast iron. Support steel pipe according to hanger schedule. Support vertical lines at each floor, both horizontally and laterally.

D. Joints and Fittings for PVC and CPVC plastic piping shall be prepared and solvent welded according to manufacturer's recommendations.

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 9

E. Vents - Slope up to high point. Support each length of vent pipe independently within structure.

F. Sanitary Waste Cleanouts - Install cleanouts where required by code and as shown on Drawings. Set floor cleanout covers flush with adjacent finished surface.

G. Floor Drains, Waste Receptors - Install as shown and connect to cast-iron, deep seal "P" trap. Where a water proof membrane is used, anchor membrane to flange with clamping collar and rustproof bolts.

H. Drain Lines - Install drain lines from air conditioning equipment, tanks and other items of equipment requiring regular drainage, to waste receptors. Terminate above receptors with elbow turned down when piping is run horizontal to receptor.

I. Plumbing Fixtures - Rough-in and install plumbing fixtures at height as recommended by the manufacturer unless otherwise indicated on architectural drawings. Caulk perimeter of wall or floor mounted fixture where it meets wall or floor. Caulking shall be of type and color as selected by Architect.

3.3 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS:

A. Below Grade - Install immediately after excavation, do not backfill until installation has been observed, and lay pipe so that entire length bears of firm soil. For slabs on grade, pipe shall be separated from sand fill beneath poured concrete by a minimum of 6 inches of soil backfill. Isolate copper pipe from concrete at all locations where piping penetrates concrete.

B. Above Grade - Run level as high as possible in building structure, install hangers per schedule, allow for expansion and contraction, and anchor where required. Separate hot and cold pipes, with 6-inch minimum clear space between piping. Install 3/4-inch hose end drain valve at low points. Install ball valve at each plumbing fixture or group of fixtures, and at each point of connection to equipment. Allow access to equipment, for removal and servicing of pumps or equipment without draining system.

1. PEX Piping Installation:

a. Install PEX tubing in accordance with the tubing manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated in the 2006 Plastic Pipe Institute/Plastic Pipe and Fitting Association/NAHB/PATH Design Guide.

b. Exposed PEX piping shall be neatly installed plumb and parallel to building surfaces, and supported to eliminate sags and deflections.

2. Copper Piping Installation:

a. For slabs on grade, copper pipe shall be separated from sand fill beneath poured concrete by a minimum of 6 inches of soil backfill.

b. Isolate copper pipe from concrete at all locations where piping penetrates concrete or masonry construction.

C. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).)

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 10

D. Viega ProPress connections: Copper press fitting joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Pipe shall be approved by manufacturer for use with fittings. Piping shall be square cut, properly deburred, and cleaned. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.

E. Connections to equipment:

1. Connect to each plumbing fixture. 2. Connect to each hydrant. 3. Provide valved connections to each piece of kitchen equipment or owner-provided equipment

requiring water connection. Provide pressure regulators, pressure reducing valves, vacuum breakers, shock arrestors and other accessories as required for equipment supplied.

4. Provide unions or flanged connections at each piece of equipment connected. 5. Install supply connections to fixtures through wall as high under fixtures as possible.

3.4 SHOCK ABSORBERS:

A. Install in accessible locations, see drawings. Provide access panels where required.

3.5 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS:

A. General - Disinfect all domestic water systems. Disinfection shall not start until water systems are complete, connections made, and system is flushed out. Upon completion of disinfection, submit certificate and certified bacteriological test report for approval.

B. Follow the method prescribed by the local Health Department, Building Code Department or water purveyor. In the absence of a prescribed method, follow the procedure outlined in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652.

3.6 GAS PIPING SYSTEM:

A. Above Grade - Run level and as high as possible. Install hangers per schedule. Allow for expansion and contraction. Anchor where required. Install Schedule 10 carbon steel welded gas tight pipe casing around piping in concealed vented areas. Pipe casings to be vented to atmosphere. Pipe casings not required in exposed areas.

B. Below Grade - Installation shall meet the requirements of applicable State and Federal Standards.

C. Above Roof - Support piping at no more than 8 feet on center, with manufactured pipe supports: Miro Industries Model 3-R or approved equivalent. The pipe supports shall be a roller- bearing type designed to support piping or conduit, and to absorb thermal expansion and contraction of piping or conduit thus preventing damage to roof membrane. The pipe or conduit shall rest on a polycarbonate resin roller and a glass-filled nylon rod situated in a polycarbonate resin seat.

D. Connections to equipment - Connect at each appliance or gas using device and provide gas cock unions, and dirt leg.

3.7 TESTING:

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 11

A. Systems shall be tested in accordance with the 2012 International Plumbing Code prior to insulating, covering or concealing this work.

B. Plug or cap lines for testing and disconnect equipment and devices which may be damaged by excessive test pressures.

C. Before final connections are made to site sewer and connection of fixtures, all underground drainage piping shall be hydrostatically tested. All openings shall be capped or plugged and the system filled with water to the top of a vertical section of pipe 10 feet high, temporarily connected to the highest point of the underground system. The water shall be allowed to stand in the system for at least 30 minutes prior to inspection. If the water level remains constant and no leaks are found during the period of inspection, the water shall be drained form the system. Final connections shall then be made to the site sewer and the trenches backfilled.

D. Before any fixtures are connected, all sanitary drain and vent systems, and storm drainage systems above ground, shall be hydrostatically tested. All opening shall be capped or plugged and the systems filled with water. The water shall be allowed to stand in the systems for at least 30 minutes prior to inspection. If the water level remains constant and no leaks are found during the period of inspection, the water shall be drawn off and fixtures, etc., connected. No parts of a system shall be tested with less than 10-foot head of water. No parts of a system using cast iron bell-and-spigot pipe shall be tested with more that a 40-foot head or water, and no parts of a system using screwed piping shall be tested with more than 200-foot head of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the amount of piping he wishes to test at one time, but the above conditions shall not be exceeded.

E. Before final connections are made to a water supply system, all underground water piping shall be hydrostatically tested and proven tight at a pressure of not less than 100 psi, or 50 psi in excess of the working pressure, whichever is greater, at the lowest point in the system. The pressure shall be maintained for at least 1 hour for inspection, the water shall be drained from the system. Final connections shall then be made to the water supply system, and the trenches backfilled.

F. Before any fixtures or equipment are connected, all domestic water systems connected thereto above ground shall be hydrostatically tested and proven tight at a pressure of not less than 100 psi, or 50 psi in excess of the working pressure, whichever is greater, at the lowest point in the system. The pressure shall be maintained for at least 2 hours for inspection. If the pressure remains constant and no leaks are found during the period of inspection, the water shall be drained from the systems and final connections shall then be made to the fixtures, etc.

G. All tests shall be made when there is no danger of freezing, prior to enclosure of any parts of the systems by furrings, suspended ceilings, etc.

H. Test to demonstrate the capacities and general operating characteristics of all equipment, such as water heating outfits, pumps, water coolers, etc. Include written test reports in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

I. Gas piping shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the local building code and the 2012 International Fuel Gas Code.

J. All tests shall be made in the presence of and results approved by the Architect.

K. Should any leaks, flaws, or defective materials or equipment be found during the testing operations, such leaks or flaws shall be corrected, and defective materials and equipment replaced. All defective joints shall be remade, and caulking of threaded joints will not be acceptable. After corrections have been made, tests shall be repeated until all systems are proven tight and satisfactory. All corrections and retests shall be made at Contractor's expense.

BROADWAY PLAZA



PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 12

3.8 CLEANING:


3.9 COMPLETION:

A. Complete each piping system in its entirety. Properly support the system, clean the interior surfaces of the pipe by flushing, and disinfecting domestic water piping as specified. Leave systems filled and free from air, and ready for operation and testing.


BROADWAY PLAZA



BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 01 00 - 1

SECTION 23 01 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Work covered by this section of these specifications will be accomplished in accordance with the respective drawings, information, or instructions to bidders, general requirements, and the supplementary and general conditions of these specifications. Supplementary conditions, special conditions, addenda, or directive which may be issued by the Architect shall be complied with.

B. Bidders shall determine the contents of a complete set of drawings and specifications and be aware that they may be bidding from a partial set of drawings, applicable only to the various separate contracts, sub-contracts, or trades as may be issued for bidding purposes only. The contract documents are combined Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning and Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Drawings and Specifications are on file in the Architect's office and each Bidder shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the complete set of drawings and specifications before submitting his bid. Drawings and specifications form a part of the contract documents for each separate contract and shall be considered as bound therewith in the event partial sets of plans and specifications are issued for bidding only. The submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of the review and examination of drawings, specifications, and addenda issued for this project as no allowance will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with any portion of the complete set of documents.

1.2 SUB-CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS:

A. Sub-Contractor (as a company) and his job superintendent for their portion of the work shall have at least three years of satisfactory experience in completion of projects of comparable size and complexity. Evidence of this experience will be required before approval of the Architect as being acceptable for their portion of the work.

1.3 SCHEDULE:

A. The schedule and sequence of work must be carefully coordinated through the General Contractor

1.4 SCOPE:

A. The work included under this specification consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, transportation, services, etc., which are applicable and necessary to complete the installation of the systems specified in these specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings, or as directed by the Architect.

B. In general, the various lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under this specification shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards so as to complete the work in a neat, quiet, and satisfactorily workable manner. Run work parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted.

C. The construction details of the building are illustrated on the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Each Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details before submitting his bid as no allowance will

BROADWAY PLAZA




be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place inserts to accommodate the ultimate installation of the pipe hangers in the forms before construction. Concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction.

1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE:

A. Contractor shall visit the site, verify existing items shown on plans or specified, and familiarize himself with the working conditions, hazards, existing grades, actual formations, soil conditions, and local requirements involved, and submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of such visit. Proposals shall take these existing conditions into consideration and the lack of specific information on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility.

1.6 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS:

A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work have been obtained from Record Drawings and other substantially reliable sources and are offered separately from the Contract Documents as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. Contractor shall examine the site, availability of utilities as to their relation to the work; the submission of bids shall be deemed evidence thereof.

1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS:

A. Workmanship, material and equipment shall be in accordance with Specifications and drawings and in some instances the requirements exceed those required by codes and standards. Where not exceeded, the codes and standards shall be considered as absolute minimum requirements.

1.8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

A. Materials unless otherwise specified shall be new, free from any defects, and of the best quality of the respective kinds. Like materials used shall be of the same manufacture, model, and quality unless otherwise specified.

B. Manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, adjusted, and conditioned as recommended by the manufacturers, or as indicated in their published literature, unless specifically herein specified to the contrary.

C. Work under this contract shall be performed by competent workmen and executed in a neat and workmanlike manner providing a thorough and complete installation. Work shall be properly protected during construction, including the shielding of soft or fragile materials, and the temporary plugging of open lines during construction. At completion, the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned and tools, equipment, obstructions, or debris present as a result of this contract shall be removed from the premises.

1.9 COOPERATION:

A. Work under these specifications shall be accomplished in conjunction with other trades on this project in a manner which will allow each trade adequate time at the proper stage of construction to fulfill his work.

BROADWAY PLAZA




B. Maintaining contact and being familiar with the progress of the general construction and timely installation shall be the responsibility of this trade to expedite this contract and avoid unnecessary delays in the progress of other trades.

C. Should any question arise between trades as to the placing of lines, ducts, conduits, fixtures, or equipment, or should it appear desirable to remove any general construction which would affect the appearance or strength of the structure, reference shall be made to the Architect for instructions.

1.10 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. The drawings show diagrammatically the locations of the various lines, ducts, conduits, fixtures, and equipment, and the method of connecting and controlling them. It is not intended to show every connection in detail and fittings required for a complete system. The systems shall include, but are not limited to, the items shown on the drawings. Exact locations of these items shall be determined by reference to the general plans and measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other trades and, in all cases, shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of any part of this work without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Should any deviations from the contract documents be deemed necessary by the Contractor, the shop drawings, descriptions, and the reason for the proposed changes shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.

C. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before bids are submitted; otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus.

D. Contractor shall lay out his work maintaining lines, grades, and dimensions according to these drawings with due consideration for other trades and verify dimensions at the site prior to any fabrication or installation; and should any conflict develop or installation be impractical, the Architect shall be notified before any installation or fabrication and the existing conditions shall be investigated and proper changes effected without any additional cost.

E. Manufactured equipment shown, arrangement of parts, openings in floors, roof or walls are sized for a particular manufacturer's equipment. The Contractor shall verify exact sizes and arrangements required by equipment and in submitting his equipment for approval he certifies that the equipment will fit within the space allotted for it.

F. Titles of Sections and Paragraphs in these specifications are introduced merely for convenience and are not to be construed as a correct or complete segregation or tabulation of the various units of materials or work. The Architect does not assume any responsibility either direct or implied, for omissions or duplications by the Contractor and any Sub- Contractor due to real or alleged error in the arrangement of matter in the Contract Documents.

1.11 ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL:

A. In any statement under this Contract where "approval" is required or requested, it is understood that such approval must be obtained from the Architect in writing before proceeding with the proposal, and an adequate number of copies of such proposal shall be submitted to the Architect.

B. The approval by the Architect of any materials, changes, drawings, etc., submitted by the Contractor will be considered as general only and to aid the Contractor in expediting his work. Such approval as may be

BROADWAY PLAZA




given does not in any way relieve the Contractor from the necessity of furnishing the material and performing work as required by the drawings and specifications.

1.12 LOCAL RESTRICTIONS:

A. Contractor shall become familiar with rules and regulations of the City, County, and State; or any other authority having jurisdiction over this project; and if, in his opinion, any work or materials shown on the drawings or specified do not comply with these rules and regulations as to size, type, capacity, and quality, he should make it known prior to the submission of his bid, which shall be deemed evidence of compliance; otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for the approval of work or material; and, in the event that any such authority should indicate disapproval, he shall correct same with materials approved by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner

1.13 ELECTRIC WIRING:

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall erect motors in place ready for power connection and where scheduled or indicated on plans, shall furnish with each such motor a starter of the type specified and deliver it in good condition to the Electrical Contractor for installation. The Electrical Contractor shall mount such starters as directed, furnishing supporting structure where necessary. Those who furnish motors and equipment shall also furnish with each item necessary instructions and wiring diagrams to the Electrical Contractor. Refer to Electrical Sections of the Specifications to determine in further detail the scope of the electrical work.

B. Equipment actually installed on the project generally differs slightly from the equipment specified. To avoid incompatible branch service, prepare a list of electrical consuming items being installed in the project under this contract, which lists volts, phase, service factor, etc., of each and every piece of equipment or electrical device. Formally transmit the list to the Electrical Contractor to verify the compatibility of the electric service provided to each item. This coordination shall be completed prior to finalizing equipment and material purchases for the project.

C. If the Contractor furnishes motors differing in size from those scheduled, he shall notify the Electrical Contractor and make provisions for revised electrical and pay for any changes necessary.

1.14 RESPONSIBILITY:

A. Contractor shall be held responsible for the satisfactory and complete execution of work included. He shall produce complete finished operating systems and provide incidental items required as part of his work, regardless of whether such item is particularly specified or indicated.

1.15 GUARANTEE:

A. Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee in triplicate warranting all materials, equipment, and labor furnished by him to be free of all defects, for a period of one year from date of final acceptance by the Owner. He shall further guarantee that all equipment shall meet the characteristics, capacities, and workmanship specified; and should any defects or non- performance of equipment be indicated within the warranty period, the defects and/or equipment will be repaired or made good without cost to the Owner.

1.16 REFERENCE ABBREVIATIONS:

BROADWAY PLAZA




A. References are made in the various mechanical sections to technical societies, codes, specifications, trade organizations, and regulatory authorities in accordance with the following abbreviations: 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council 2. AFE- Air Filter Institute 3. AGA- American Gas Association 4. AMCA- Air Moving and Conditioning Association 5. ANSI- American National Standards Institute 6. ARI- Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 7. ASHRAE- Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers 8. ASME- American Society of Mechanical Engineers 9. ASTM- American Society for Testing and Materials 10. AWSC- American Welding Society Code 11. AWWA- American Water Works Association 12. CISPI- Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 13. CTI- Cooling Tower Institute 14. FM- Factory Mutual 15. FS- Federal Specification 16. IRI- Industrial Risk Insurers 17. ISO- Insurance Services Organization 18. NAFM- National Association of Fan Manufacturers 19. NCPWB(MCAA)- National Certified Pipe Welders Bureau (Mechanical Contractors Association of

America) 20. NFC- National Fire Codes 21. NFPA- National Fire Protection Association 22. PDI- Plumbing and Drainage Institute 23. SBI- Steel Boiler Institute 24. SMACNA- Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association 25. UL- Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUBMITTED:

A. SUBMITTALS WHICH DO NOT MEET THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS WILL BE IMMEDIATELY REJECTED WITHOUT FURTHER REVIEW!!! 1. Catalog cutsheets and brochures will be preceded by a neatly arranged cover sheet having ample

room for shopdrawing stamps and bearing the following information in a prominent, immediately visible location and size:

a. Equipment name or number as referenced in the contract Documents (example: "AHU-A" or "Type A" light fixture).

b. All options or accessories provided. c. Applicable Specification section and paragraph numbers.

2. Substitutions -

a. Cross reference individual manufacturer and catalog numbers of substitute products to those of specified material.

b. Prior to requesting permission to use substitute or alternate products, the Contractor shall investigate and make certain that the product-

1) Conforms with the standard of performance and quality specified. 2) Will physically fit in the space allocated, with sufficient access and maintenance

space. 3) Involves no additional costs to the Owner or extended construction time.

BROADWAY PLAZA




c. Should the use of a substitute product entail any changes in details or construction, the changes and information documenting the complete coordination with all affected trades shall be submitted prior to approval of substitution.

d. Provide with requests for permission to use substitute or alternate products, drawings, specifications, samples, performance data and other information as may be required to assist in determination of acceptability of the product. The burden of proof is the Contractor's responsibility.

3. All similar or related items shall be submitted together under one cover sheet (i.e. fixtures, insulation, valves, equipment). Do not piece-meal submittals!!!

B. Equipment Items: 1. Submit manufacturer's certified data relative to equipment required for the installation of the HVAC,

plumbing and fire protection systems. 2. Submit adequate engineering data on each piece of equipment to allow a careful check of

compliance with the technical requirements of the Contract Documents. Clearly indicate on submittal data the manufacturer's name, piece number, equipment capacity, and other applicable technical data.

3. Submit the following data for Mechanical Systems-

a. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment, Cuts, Trim and Fittings, Rough Dimension, Drains and Waste Receptors.

b. Specialties, Valves, Gages and Thermometers. c. Foundations, Supports, Hangers, Inserts. d. Expansion Loops, Expansion Joints, Guides, Anchors. e. Insulation. f. Ventilation and Air Conditioning Equipment, Specialties and their Control Systems. g. Fans, Fan Characteristics Curves, Fan Tests. h. Dampers, Louvers, Control Panelboards, Motor Starters and Controls for Electrically

Operated Equipment Furnished by Mechanical Trades. i. Special Products Furnished by Mechanical Trades. j. Openings, Special Framing and Access Doors. k. Isolation Mounting. l. Refrigeration or Cooling Equipment, Compressors, Condensers, or Coolers. m. Data for Testing and Balancing of the Heating, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. n. Installation Instructions - Submit Manufacturer's Printed Installation Instructions. o. Electrical Interlock Wiring Diagrams. p. Temperature Controls. q. HVAC and Plumbing Piping and Fittings r. Air Devices.

1.18 INSTRUCTIONS:

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements of the equipment in each mechanical system. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for videotaping all training sessions and shall submit two copies of the training videos on DVD discs.

C. The number and length of training sessions shall be as specified in the various Sections of the Specification.

BROADWAY PLAZA




D. These requirements are supplemented by requirements for specific equipment or systems in the various Sections of the Specification.

1.19 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Bind in looseleaf binders with the words, "Operating and Maintenance Manual" and the Project identification imprinted on the cover. Prepare four complete sets of records for the Owner, with table of contents, index, and tabbed Section dividers.

B. During the construction period, accumulate the following for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals- 1. Copies or warranties and guarantees on each piece of equipment installed. 2. Fixture brochures. 3. Wiring and Control Diagrams. 4. Approved Shop Drawings. 5. Operating instructions for-

a. Plumbing Systems b. HVAC Systems

6. Recommended maintenance procedures. 7. Lists of major items of equipment with name, address, and telephone number of each local

representative.

C. Submit the manuals for approval at approximately 75 percent job completion.

D. Each manual shall consist of- 1. Complete description of each item of equipment and apparatus furnished and installed -including

ratings, capacities, and characteristics. 2. Fully detailed parts list, including all numbered parts of each item of equipment and apparatus

furnished and installed. 3. Manufacturer's printed instructions describing operation, servicing, maintenance and repair of each

item of equipment and apparatus. 4. Typewritten record of all tests made of materials, equipment, and systems. All such records shall

state the date tests were conducted, the names of all persons making and witnessing the tests, and citing any unusual conditions relevant to the tests.

1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. Accumulate Record Drawings during the construction of the Project. Keep one set of blueline Contract Drawings at the job site at all times, and mark changes, rerouting or modifications which occur, clearly on the Drawings with dimensions.

B. At completion of the job, deliver Record Drawings to the Architect. Record Drawings shall be submitted for approval prior to final payment.

1.21 WELDER'S QUALIFICATIONS:

A. All welding of piping and related systems shall be performed by welders meeting the qualification standards of NCPWB (MCAA).

BROADWAY PLAZA




1.22 CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS:

A. Install and make all necessary piping connections to equipment furnished by others, where so noted.

1.23 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:

A. Provide gas, water, waste and vent connections for scheduled equipment. 1. Equipment installed under other Sections of these Specifications - provide rough-in as required and

make final connections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are scheduled or specified for the purpose of establishing standard of design, quality, appearance, performance and serviceability, and not to limit competition. Scheduled products (as may be modified by detailed specifications) are those selected as the basis for system design with respect to physical size and space arrangements, required capacity and performance characteristics, and the product quality intended.

B. The Drawings indicate specified products physically arranged in the spaces, as cataloged by specific manufacturers, generally as listed in the Equipment Schedules.

C. Listed "Acceptable Manufacturer's" are those considered capable of manufacturing products conforming to detailed Specifications, and as such, are invited to compete on an equal basis provided the offering is comparable in every respect to scheduled or specified products and actually conforms to the detailed Specifications and Schedule requirements. Listing herein as "acceptable manufacturers" does not imply "accepted", "approved", or "prior approval", or any other such connotation. All product offerings must be submitted for approval after Contract award.

D. Vendors are invited to submit material or equipment bids to bidding Contractors on any comparable equivalent product, whether or not the manufacturer of such product is listed herein as an "acceptable manufacturer". Such product bids should clearly indicate offerings that are not listed as "acceptable manufacturers". In the event a bidding Contractor, after satisfying himself that such unlisted product is in fact "equal" to the specified product with respect to design, quality, performance and arrangement (space requirements), and the Contractor desires to furnish that product on the Project, he may request the name of the manufacturer be added to the list of acceptable manufacturers by addendum prior to bid time.

E. At a bidder's request, an unnamed manufacturer's equipment will be considered to determine additional "acceptable manufacturers" if a request is made in writing no later than ten days prior to the bid opening. If such requests are found acceptable, an addendum will be written listing additional acceptable manufacturers. Consideration will be given only to requests of bona fide bidders (Contractors), not to those received from vendors.

F. Manufacturers of materials and equipment shall be as specified, scheduled, or as listed in each respective product Specification Article.

2.2 FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE DEVELOPED PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS:

BROADWAY PLAZA




A. Materials and adhesives used throughout the mechanical systems for insulation, acoustical lining, filters, ducts, flexible connections, and jackets or coverings regardless of kind, or for piping or conduit system components, shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 without evidence of continued combustion and with a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. If such materials are to be applied with adhesives, they shall be tested as applied with such adhesives, or the adhesives used shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. (Note: materials need not meet these requirements where they are entirely located outside of a building and do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard or where specifically exempted in the body of these Specifications).

B. "Flame Spread Rating" and "Smoke Developed Rating" shall be as determined by the "Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, NFPA No. 255, ASTM E84, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard". Such materials are listed in the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. "Building Materials List" under the heading "Hazard Classification (Fire)".

2.3 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT:

A. Identify outdoor heat pumps with engraved phenolic plastic nameplate to match unit designation on design drawings.

2.4 BEARINGS:

A. All bearings supplied to the Project, regardless of supply responsibility or applications as integral parts of machinery, shall be standard catalog items and interchangeable with those of manufacturers currently represented in the local trade area with replacements stocked locally. Ball bearings shall be radial or thrust design, sealed and enclosed in a dust and moistureproof housing, and selected in accordance with AFBM Rating B-10 for at least 200,000 hour operating life as applied. Grease lubricated bearings shall be arranged for regreasing through alemite fittings located outside machinery enclosures in a convenient location, with grease relief fittings in the bearing housing to prevent overgreasing or seal rupture.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Andrews, Dodge, Fafnir, Hyatt, Link-Belt, MRC, McGill, New Departure, Sealmaster, SKF, Shafer, Rollway, Thompson, Timken, Torrington.

2.5 ACCESS DOORS:

A. Furnish, for installation under appropriate Section of the Work, access doors at each point required to provide access to concealed valves, dampers, damper operators, and other devices requiring operation, adjustment, or maintenance.

B. Shall be 16 gage steel, with mounting straps, concealed hangers, and screwdriver locks, designed for the doors to open 180 degrees, minimum.

C. Access doors installed in fire walls or partitions shall be UL labeled to maintain surfaces.

D. Provide prime coat finish for installation in ceilings or painted or unfinished surfaces.

E. Provide polish chrome plate finish for installation in unpainted finished walls.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers - Baldwin, Hannon, Josam, Miami, Carey, Milcor, Titus, Wade, Walsh, Zurn.

BROADWAY PLAZA




2.6 METAL STRUT FRAMING SYSTEMS:

A. Shall be a basic adjustable slotted steel framing system consisting of components specifically designed for the support of mechanical and electrical systems. Parts shall include modular type channels, available with or without bolt holes, knockouts, or slots, with fittings and hardware requiring no welding, drilling, or other complex fabrication techniques. Basic attachment to channel shall be by means of spring mounted gripping nuts with serrated grooves, and bolts.

B. Available accessories shall include brackets, baseplates, rod connectors, pipe and conduit straps, pipe and conduit hangers, beam clamps, cable clamps, concrete inserts and closure strips.

C. Loading shall not exceed manufacturer's published load capacities for parts, connections, and assemblies for the actual spans involved.

D. Shall be UL listed for the purpose when utilized as electrical raceway.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers - B-Line, Elcen, F and S, Kindorf, Power Strut, Unistrut.

2.7 SLEEVES, INSERTS, ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS:

A. Provide in concrete, carpentry or masonry construction, hangers, sleeves, expansion bolts, inserts, supporting steel, or other fixtures necessary for the support of pipe, equipment and devices furnished under each Section of the Specifications.

B. Provide each pipe, conduit, or duct passing through walls, floors, ceilings or partitions with sleeves having internal dimension approximately 1-inch larger than the outside dimension (including installation) of pipes, conduits or ducts.

C. Sleeves through interior partitions and floors shall be no less than 22 gage galvanized steel, set flush with the finished surfaces.

D. Sleeves through grade slabs, basement or exterior wall shall be steel or cast iron pipe with water stop flange, set flush with finished surfaces, and with the space between the pipe and the sleeves packed with oakum or jute twine and calked watertight.

E. Sleeves in wet or potentially wet floors or spaces such as mechanical equipment rooms or sprinklered areas shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with water stop flange and with the top of the sleeve projecting 2-inches above the finished floor, with annular space packed with oakum or jute twine and calked watertight.

F. Option - Provide link-seal neoprene closure fittings in lieu of packing.

G. Attachments to structure shall be by means of beam clamps wherever practicable. Unavoidable attachments to concrete structure shall be by means of preset concrete inserts whenever the need for such attachment can be reasonably foreseen and the locations and sizes of inserts is known prior to pouring of concrete. In instances where it is necessary to make attachments to concrete and proper inserts have not been preset, the attachment shall be made by means of drilled holes, and expansion anchors of either the bolt stud or flush variety. Design working stress of attachments shall be limited to 25 percent of the average maximum (ultimate) stress values published by the manufacturer.

H. Inserts shall be cast iron or galvanized steel individual type, with accommodations for removable nuts and threaded rods up to 3/4-inch diameter, and permitting lateral adjustment.

BROADWAY PLAZA




I. Fasteners in concrete beams shall be sufficiently above the bottom of the beam to clear reinforcing.

J. Expansion anchors shall be zinc and chromate plated for corrosion protection and to conform to the dimensional requirements of Federal Specifications FF-S-325. Expansion anchors shall be selected and installed in accordance with the recommendations of Expansion Anchor Manufacturer's Institute (EAMI) and the manufacturer's instructions.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers - Grinnell, Hilti, Phillips, or Thunderline.

2.8 FIRE STOPPING:

A. Seal annular spaces between sleeves and penetrating materials in fire rated floors, ceilings, and walls with fireproof and waterproof silicone elastomer applied in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Multiple penetrations shall be sealed with silicone calking. Seal material shall be UL classified for use in fire rated penetration seals, and shall be applied in the manufacturer's recommended thickness for the fire rating of the penetrated structure in accordance with ASTM-E-814 requirements.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Dow Corning, General Electric, Hilti.

2.9 WATERPROOFING:

A. Seal penetrations of wet or potentially wet structures, floors, exterior walls, etc., other than those requiring fire stopping, with sealant to prevent moisture leakage. Apply sealing material (calking) in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Product Research and Chemical Co. "Poly-Sulphide Sealant" PRC- 5000.

2.10 AUXILIARY STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS:

A. Provide auxiliary structural supports as necessary to support mechanical systems from the building structure. Coordinate with structural drawings. Supporting members shall be metal strut framing or standard structural shapes, designed to support imposed loads with a working stress no greater than 25 percent of ultimate stress values of the members, and articulation with the building structure without exceeding structural limitations at the point of attachment to the building structure. Prepare calculations and Shop Drawings of each such support and submit for acceptance. Begin no work until receipt of acceptance from the structural engineer.

2.11 ESCUTCHEONS:

A. Provide escutcheons or 22 gage minimum painted galvanized sheet metal wall flanges (in event standard manufactured product does not exist) for mechanical or electrical penetrations of floors, ceilings, walls or partitions. Escutcheons shall be sized to enclosed the outside of the penetration sleeve and fit snugly to the pipe (or over outside of insulation) of insulated lines. Both exposed surfaces of such penetrated elements shall be fitted with escutcheons which shall both afford a finished appearance and prevent passage of vermin.

B. Except where otherwise specified, escutcheons shall be one- piece (where practicable) or split, hinged, stamped brass type designed to fit the pipe, and to cover the terminating pipe sleeve, in chrome plated finish, with securing device to hold the escutcheon tight to the pipe.

BROADWAY PLAZA




C. Use deep escutcheon on each sleeve set in a waterproof concrete floor.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Beaton and Corbin, Grinnell, Sweet and Donaldson.

2.12 ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND PIPE CURBS:

A. Provide insulated, leakproof equipment supports and pipe curbs approved by the National Roofing Contractor's Association for roof mounted equipment, pipe, or conduits. Supports shall be prefabricated of continuous welded 18 gage minimum galvanized steel, 12-inch minimum height, mitered corner seams, integral cant and base plate, 2 x 4 fire resistant treated wood nailer, and 18 gage counterflashing. Provide integral internal reinforcing necessary to support imposed load, but no less than 600 pounds per linear foot of perimeter.

B. Provide raised cant, thickness to match thickness of roof insulation.

C. Top surface shall be level. Provide pitched base where installed on pitched roof.

D. For pipe curbs, coordinate conduit requirements with Division 26, to provide required openings in a single curb.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers - Pate, Roof Products Systems, Stiles, Thycurb.

2.13 FLASHINGS:

A. Furnish weatherproof flashings for mechanical system related openings through the roof. Coordinate responsibility for furnishing and installing roof flashings for mechanical system related openings through the roof with roofing contractor.

B. Furnish roof flashing for round and rectangular openings, pipes, vents, machinery, devices, or ducts. The flashings shall be constructed to terminate not less than 12-inches above the roof. Provide suitable counterflashing constructed from the same material as the flashing.

C. Furnish flashings for mechanical curbs, and furnish and install counterflashing at each.

D. See Section 22 00 00 for flashings for floor drains, roof drains and plumbing vent pipes.

E. Construct other roof flashings from 10 ounce copper sheets, with a base extending not less than 10-inches beyond the exterior surface of the opening to be flashed.


A. Hold piping in place by accepted hangers, supports and anchors, designed to support weight of pipe, weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation. Arrange hangers to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and supports. Allow clearance for application of specified vapor sealed insulation without cutting pipeline covering or fitting covering in installation of pipe hangers and fittings. Uninsulated copper or brass pipe or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or supports. Piping shall not be supported from roof decking. Furnish and install angle members to span steel joists or distribute load.

B. Suspend and support horizontal and vertical piping from the structure with hangers and metal strut framing system or structural steel supports, spaced as scheduled. Furnish necessary accessories, nuts, lock nuts, bolts, rods and devices to allow installation to freely expand and contract. Hangers shall be

BROADWAY PLAZA




formed steel clevis type, unless otherwise specified, with adjustable attachment to hanger rod. For copper or brass pipe, use plastic sheathed hangers to eliminate all possibility of galvanic action between hanger and copper tubing. Pipe hangers shall fit over vapor sealed insulated piping. 1. Clevis - Grinnel Fig. 260 or 590. 2. Uninsulated copper tubing - Grinnell Fig. CT-99C.

C. Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type hanger and for attachment to vertical pipes, provide steel pipe clamps. 1. Double bolt pipe clamps - Grinnell Fig. 295. 2. Riser clamps - Grinnell Fig. 261. 3. Copper tubing riser clamps - Grinnell Fig. CT-121-C.

D. Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at same level. Trapeze of standard structural steel shapes sized to support load and drilled for rod hanger at each end. 1. Grinnel Fig. 46.

E. Use roller supports with cast iron adjustable bases, where provision for expansion is required. 1. Grinnell Fig. 274.

F. For hanger rods on piping 3/4-inch thru 2-inch inclusive, use 3/8-inch thru 3 1/2-inch inclusive, use 1/2-inch rods; for 4- inch thru 5-inch inclusive, use 5/8-inch rods; for 6-inch, use 3/4-inch rods; for 8-inch thru 12-inch, use 7/8-inch rods; and for piping larger than 12-inches, use 1-inch rods.

G. Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with special conditions, or where vertical or horizontal structural steel supports are required other than those provided in the structure.

H. Provide oversize hangers with hanger shields or blocking the same thickness as insulation to pitch insulated pipes accurately at time of installation.

I. C-Type hangers on sprinkler piping shall have lock nuts.

J. Attach supporting rods to concrete by drilled anchors or inserts placed before concrete is poured.

K. Provide lateral bracing for supporting rods over 18-inches long braced at every fourth hanger with diagonal bracing attached to slab or beam.

L. Attach supporting rods to precast structural members on sides by expansion bolts located above steel reinforcing at minimum of 6-inches above the bottom. Power driven devices shall not be used.

M. Floor Supports - Provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron pipe rests, with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is required, provide pipe roll stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or steel pipe piers; fasten stands to piers.

N. Wall Supports - Provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel J-hook for pipe located close to wall and no larger than 3-inch pipe. For greater loads, up to 1500-pound maximum loading, provide welded steel bracket.

O. Vertical Piping Supports - Support cast-iron soil pipe at every floor and at base of stack; other pipes at every floor unless otherwise scheduled. Use steel extension pipe clamps. Refer to manufacturer's rated maximum loading for each size pipe. Bolt clamp securely to pipe, rest clamp end extension on building structure. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps beneath floor slab within ceiling cavity below.

BROADWAY PLAZA




P. Use inserts of drilled anchors in concrete construction, use beam clamps in steel construction.

Q. Hanger spacing schedule, except for nonmetallic, cast iron, or fire protection systems, shall be as follows: 1. 1/2 and 3/4-inches 6-feet 2. 1-inch 7-feet 3. 1 1/4-inch 8-feet 4. 1 1/2-inch 9-feet 5. 2-inch 10-feet 6. Larger than 2-inches 12-feet

R. Hanger spacing for nonmetallic piping shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but not exceeding four feet.

S. Install a hanger immediately behind the hub of each fitting and each length of cast-iron soil pipe. Install a hanger within 10-feet of each elbow or tee on steel or copper piping systems. Support each valve, strainer or other device in 6- inch and larger pipe systems immediately.

T. Support each length of no-hub or gasketed compression joint soil pipe with a hanger adjacent to the joint on both ends (2 hangers per length).

U. Support piping at each change of direction, at ends of branches, at base and top of riser pipes and drops and wherever necessary to prevent sag, bending or vibration, in addition to above listed hanger spacing.

V. Furnish miscellaneous steel necessary to support piping systems, including those accessories required for trapeze or group hanging.

W. Pipe hangers for fire protection system shall be spaced as scheduled in NFPA applicable bulletins, and shall include hangers and accessories as required by applicable NFPA bulletins.

X. Acceptable Manufacturers - B-Line, Grinnell, Burt Patterson, Elgen, F and S Fee and Mason,. Michigan, Modern.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT:

A. Protect equipment from physical damage and deterioration after it is delivered to the Project, and during the installation period prior to Owner acceptance.

B. The equipment shall be kept clean. Motors and electrical devices shall be covered with suitable materials to prevent dirt or dust accumulation within equipment. Machinery and devices shall be properly oiled and maintained to prevent rusting and deterioration.

C. Repair scratches, mars, or paint deterioration.

3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:

A. Perform excavation and backfill required for the installation of underground pipe, ducts, equipment and devices.

BROADWAY PLAZA




B. Cut trenches true and straight and grade bottom to afford uniform bearing of barrel on firm soil. Stack the excavation material in a suitable location. Shore trenches and excavated areas as required for safety, and for security of adjacent earth and structures.

C. Cut through walks, roads, and other structures as necessary for the installation.

D. Install underground mechanical piping and ducts with a minimum cover of 24-inches from finished grade, or as detailed on plans. Pipes carrying water shall be installed a minimum of six inches below the frost line.

E. Trench width at and below top of pipe shall result in horizontal clearance between trench wall and barrel on both sides.

F. Pipes smaller than 18-inch - at least 6, but no more than 8-inch clearance.

G. Prepare trench bottom. Dig out of joints. Lay pipe in trench so that entire length bears on firm soil.

H. Provide embedment where indicated or if trench is unsuitable for support. Cut excavation a minimum of 6-inches below the required grade. A 6-inch bed of sand shall then be placed and properly compacted to provide accurate grade, and uniform bearing throughout the length of pipe or conduit. The sand shall consist of clean, natural, washed sand with particle sizes which will pass through a 3/8-inch screen, 90 percent through a quarter inch screen, and no more than 25 percent through a No. 50 screen.

I. The backfilling shall not be placed until the Work has been inspected, tested and accepted.

J. Backfill material shall be free of cinder or rocks, and free of clods or lumps larger than 1-inch, up to 12-inches above top of pipe, and 2-inches in remainder. If the excavated material is not suitable, provide adequate material from other locations.

K. Backfill by installing clean earth in accordance with the above Specifications in layers no more than 6-inches thick, tamping (and wetting down, if necessary). Hand place and tamp each layer of initial backfill in 4-inch layers up to pipe centerline, and in 6-inch layers up to 12-inches above the top of pipe. Complete backfill to grade and create a substantial, well-compacted trench to 95 percent compaction by the standard Proctor test.

L. Surplus earth or materials remaining after backfilling shall be removed from the site.

M. Repair utilities, lines, walks, and roads, and other surfaces and structures damaged by these operations to match conditions existing prior to excavation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SPACE:

A. The Drawings indicate specified products physically arranged in the spaces, as cataloged by specific manufacturers, generally as listed in the Equipment Schedule.

B. Coordinate the exact physical space requirements for equipment and servicing of equipment actually purchased for each item of equipment involved.

C. Drawings show pipe and ductwork diagrammatically.

D. Adhere to Drawings as closely as possible in layout of work.

BROADWAY PLAZA




E. Vary run of piping, run and shape of ductwork and make offset during progress of work as required to meet structural and other interferences.

F. Install piping and ductwork in furred spaces wherever possible. Run exposed piping and ductwork parallel to or at right angles to buildings walls.

G. Keep horizontal lines as close to ceiling as practicable.

H. Conform to ceiling heights established on architectural construction drawings.

I. All equipment shall be installed to provide complete access for service, adjustment and filter replacement, as well as complete removal/replacement of unit from equipment room. Coordinate installation with all other trades to ensure that no piping, conduit, ductwork, structure, light fixtures, or other equipment obstruct complete access to the equipment. Coordinate access requirements for equipment actually provided with equipment manufacturer. Equipment installation shall not impede access to room. Equipment installed in violation of these requirements will be removed and re-installed at contractor’s expense.

3.4 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS:

A. Coordinate provision of concrete housekeeping pads for mechanical equipment with General Contractor. Coordinate to fit mechanical equipment actually provided.

B. Furnish templates for bolt installation, along with the anchor bolts.

C. Provide isolation materials where specified with equipment.

D. Provide necessary supporting steel required for the mechanical systems.

E. Set equipment, and grout the equipment to the base, and fill void spaces with nonshrinking grout. Dowel direct driven equipment and driving motors to their common mounting frame after final alignment and run-in.

3.5 INTERFERENCES:

A. Relocate or reroute existing pipe, wiring, or ducts as required to facilitate construction of finished work as planned. Restore surfaces, insulation, and finish to match condition of adjacent work.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Assume costs and responsibility for cutting and patching required to complete the installation.

3.7 PAINTING AND FINISHING AND CLEANING:

A. Provide touchup painting of prefinished mechanical products.

B. Surfaces shall be left clean, debris shall be removed, and equipment shall be furnished in prime coat finish ready for finish coats.

BROADWAY PLAZA




1. Piping, ductwork and equipment - Clean exterior of piping, ductwork and equipment, removing rust, plaster and dirt by wire brushing. Remove grease, oil, and similar materials by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents.

2. Motors, pumps and other items with factory finish - Remove grease and oil and leave surfaces clean and polished.

3. Plumbing Fixtures - Clean and polish fixtures immediately prior to final inspection.

C. Cleaning operations are supplemented by detailed instructions for specific systems.

3.8 OPTION TO RELOCATE OUTLETS AND RELATED DEVICES:

A. Air supply outlets, return air inlets, exhaust air inlets, plumbing fixtures, and sprinkler heads may be relocated at the Owner's option to points within 10-feet of their indicated locations, at no additional cost to the Owner, provided the Contractor is notified prior to Shop Drawing preparation or roughing-in and fabrication.

B. Only work which must be reperformed in this connection will be considered extra.

3.9 MECHANICAL SYSTEM VERIFICATION AND CALIBRATION:

A. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate on-site system verification and calibration session(s) to document that the systems listed below are operating as intended. This shall occur after system start-up and test and balance operations are completed. As a minimum, one 8-hour day shall be scheduled for the first session. Subsequent sessions shall be scheduled as needed until final verifications and calibration are complete.

B. Session(s) shall be scheduled in advance and the General Contractor, Owner and Architect/Engineer shall be invited to attend.

C. On-site attendance and participation in each session is mandatory for the following parties: 1. Equipment/system installing contractor. 2. Equipment manufacturer’s factory authorized representative(s). 3. Temperature Controls Contractor. 4. Test and Balance Contractor.

D. Parts, tools and expertise: 1. The attending contractors and sub-contractors shall be equipped with typical components and

materials to make corrections, adjustments and repairs of the installed equipment. 2. The participants shall bring necessary tools and special equipment needed to make corrections or

adjustments of the installed equipment and sub-systems where operation is being verified and/or calibrated.

3. Personnel with the expertise to make full adjustments and/or programming changes shall be in attendance.

E. Documentation of system verification and calibration: 1. The equipment/system Contractor shall prepare a record of the findings of the verification and

calibration of each equipment item and/or system. The recorded findings shall identify the sequences verified and whether they were accepted or failed. Verification of system operation shall include:

a. Operation sequences. b. Set points.

BROADWAY PLAZA




c. Calibration and coordination of installed sensors and instrumentation. 2. The Contractor shall identify items that do not operate as expected and those requiring further

verification

F. These requirements shall apply to the following equipment/systems: 1. HVAC systems. 2. Temperature controls.


BROADWAY PLAZA



HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00 - HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide all pipe and fittings, piping specialties, valves, expansion joints, traps, tanks, etc., as required for heating and air conditioning systems for the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS:

A. Refrigerant piping may be provided by the mechanical contractor or by the split system equipment manufacturer. Piping from the outdoor heat pump to the building shall be hard copper with soldered fittings. Piping from inside the building may be hard copper or soft copper line sets.

1. Hard drawn refrigerant piping shall be Type ACR copper. Elbows shall be long radius.

2. Line Sets: Line sets shall be premium flexible refrigerant grade copper. Both tubes shall be separately and fully insulated. Insulation shall be ½ inch thickness, flexible closed cell fire resistant foamed plastic material, 0.10 water vapor permeability per ASTM E96 procedure A, , 0.27 K factor at 75°F per ASTM C177 or C518, 5% water absorption by weight per ASTM D1056, molded in cylindrical form to fit pipe snugly. The insulation shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E84-91A. The insulation shall be equivalent to AP Armaflex. in a ½” black custom molded UV resistant foam insulation. a. All four ends shall be protected with plastic inserts.

B. Refrigerant Piping sizes shown on the drawings are offered as a guide for pricing only. Verify all refrigerant pipe sizes, and required accessories, double suction risers, traps, etc. with Manufacturer prior to installation.

2.2 COPPER FITTINGS:

A. Fittings for copper pipe shall be recessed type for soldered connections.

B. Solder used for joining refrigerant piping shall be silver solder having a melting point of not less than 1120 F.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

BROADWAY PLAZA



HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00 - 2

3.1 JOINING PIPE:

A. Furnish labor, materials, and supplies for the proper joining of each piping system.

B. Copper - Cut ends square, ream and polish pipe surface, polish inside of socket fitting, apply flux to pipe into fitting, align, apply heat and solder, sweat together.

1. Flow dry nitrogen inside pipe while soldering refrigerant pipe.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION:

A. Above Grade - Run level and as high as possible, except that refrigerant suction lines shall sloped when recommended by VRFZ system manufacturer. Provide traps in refrigerant suction lines where indicated or where recommended by manufacturer. Install hangers per schedule. Install to allow for expansion and contraction. Anchor where indicated and where required. Allow access to equipment, for servicing. Support piping from beams, joists, or other structural supports.

B. Where piping must be run exposed to view, obtain approval of routing from the Architect. Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor so that exposed conduit and piping are grouped together.

3.3 COMPLETE SYSTEMS:

A. Complete entire piping systems. Properly support the system, leave system filled and free from air, and ready for operation testing.

3.4 TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS:



BROADWAY PLAZA



INSULATION (MECHANICAL) 23 25 00 - 1

SECTION 23 25 00 - INSULATION (MECHANICAL)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Thermal insulation of piping systems, plumbing, casings and equipment installed under other Sections of these Specifications.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

A. ASHRAE 90A - 1980, Section 5.

B. NFPA 90A, Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

C. UL Guide No. V.8.15 (Jackets, Adhesives and Sealers).

D. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit manufacturer's product data on insulation materials, jackets, accessory materials, adhesives, tapes, etc. Submit a schedule for each class of insulation specified, indicating product, thickness, quantities, sizes, installation details, and surfaces to which each class is to be applied.

B. See Section 23 01 00.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS:

A. Insulation shall be installed by a firm whose principal business is the application and installation of thermal insulating material on piping and duct systems. Materials shall be by recognized manufacturers and shall be installed by skilled mechanics in accordance with manufacturer's standard published instructions except as otherwise specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessory Materials - Childers, Fosters, P.K. Insulation, Vimasco.

B. Insulation Material - Armstrong Cork, CertainTeed, Delta Systems, Inc., E.O. Wood, Fibrex, Knauf Fiber Glass, Manville, Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Partek.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS:

BROADWAY PLAZA




A. Hanger Adhesive - Foster 55, red-brown, or approved equivalent.

B. Insulating Cement - P.K. Insulation Quick Coat or One Coat, or approved equivalent.

C. Metal Bands - 1/2-inch wide, 0.20-inch thick aluminum.

D. Flexible Cellular Insulation Adhesive - Armstrong 520 or Foster 82-40, or approved equivalent.

E. Glass Fabric Cloth - 8 ounce per square yard sized woven cloth.

F. Glass Fabric Cloth Jacket Sealer, UL listed lagging adhesive, white - Foster 30-36, or Childers CP-50 pigmented, or approved equivalent.

G. Vapor Barrier Mastic, White - Foster 30-35 or Childers CP-30, or approved equivalent.

H. Weather Barrier Mastic, White - Foster 35-00 or Childers CP-10, or approved equivalent UL classified outdoor grade elastomeric vinyl mastic.

I. Fiberglass Insulation Bonding Adhesive, Amber-Foster 85-15 or Childers CP-82, or approved equivalent.

J. Mechanical Surface Fasteners – Benjamin Foster, Duro Dyne, Manville.

2.3 INSULATION JACKETS:

A. ASJ Jacket - All Service Jacket - Vinyl coated and embossed vapor barrier laminate of 40 pcf white kraft, aluminum foil, and flame snuffing adhesive, reinforced with glass fibers, 0.05 permeability rating.

B. PVC Jacket - 20 mil minimum thickness polyvinyl chloride pipe and fitting jacketing, UV resistant with maximum of 25/50 flame/smoke spread rating per ASTM 84. Install with waterproof solvent welding contact adhesive, vapor barrier mastic adhesive, and PVC tape. Do not staple or penetrate vapor barrier.

1. Equivalent to Johns Manville Zeston.

2.4 TYPE FPC INSULATION A. Fiberglass Pipe Covering, 0.23 K factor at 75 F., molded in cylindrical form to fit pipe snugly, sectional

one-piece construction, with factory applied flame resistant vapor barrier jacket with double self-sealing flap.

B. Conforming to FS HH-I-558B Form D, Type 3, Class 12 and ASTM C547.

2.5 TYPE PFP INSULATION:

A. Plastic Flexible Pipe Covering - Flexible closed cell fire resistant foamed plastic material, 0.10 water vapor permeability per ASTM E96 procedure A, , 0.27 K factor at 75°F per ASTM C177 or C518, 5% water absorption by weight per ASTM D1056, molded in cylindrical form to fit pipe snugly. The insulation shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E84-91A. The insulation shall be equivalent to AP Armaflex.

BROADWAY PLAZA




2.6 PIPE INSULATION SADDLES:

A. Provide 180 degree, 16 gauge galvanized steel protection saddle, 12 inches long, at individual pipe hanger support locations.

B. Provide 360 degree, 16 gauge galvanized steel protection saddle, 12 inches long, at each pipe which is clamped to a trapeze hanger.

2.7 HANGER SHIELDS:

A. Provide penetration shields to encase insulated pipes penetrating fire walls or floors in a 360 degree, 24 gage minimum sheet metal hanger shield with insert of high density, 100 psi, waterproofed calcium silicate the same thickness as insulation and further enclosed within the sleeve, sized for maximum 1-inch spacing between sleeve and insulation shield. Pack annular space between sleeve and shield as specified under "Fire-Stopping" in the Section 23 01 00. Install an escutcheon plate to completely cover the wall penetration opening and fit snugly over the pipe insulation shield. Insert shall extend at least 1-inch beyond penetrated surface and escutcheon.

2.8 PIPE INSULATION FITTINGS A. Fittings shall be premolded of the same material and thickness as the pipe covering and provided with a

matching vapor proof barrier, or build up the fittings from segments of pipe insulation or fibrous glass blanket to the proper thickness and then finish with fire retardant tape and vapor proof barrier. Fittings so covered shall be finished with a fire retardant covering to form a smooth, neat appearance similar to that on the straight length of pipe.

B. Valves, strainers, expansion tanks, and similar appurtenances shall be insulated as specified for fittings except that valve bonnets and strainer cleanouts need not be insulated.

C. One-piece premolded PVC fitting and valve covers may be provided in lieu of fitting jacketing specified. D. Where Type ASJ jacketing is specified, one-piece premolded PVC fitting and valve covers may be

provided in lieu of fitting jacketing specified.

2.9 ADHESIVES, MASTICS AND SEALANTS A. Utilize materials recommended by insulation manufacturer for the application. B. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation

to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - -EXECUTION

3.1 FLEXIBLE FOAMED PLASTIC PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION:

A. Insulation shall be cylindrical without longitudinal joint and slipped over the pipe prior to erection wherever possible. Seal circumferential butt joints with flexible tubing adhesive. Where slip-on technique is not possible, insulation shall be slit longitudinally, applied to pipe, and longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with flexible tubing adhesive.

3.2 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE: PIPE SIZE

(Inches) INSULATION

TYPE THICKNESS (Inches)

JACKET TYPE

A. Domestic Cold Water All FPC ½ ASJ B. Domestic Hot Water & Recirculating All FPC 1 ASJ C. Waste from Electric Water Coolers All FPC 1 ASJ

BROADWAY PLAZA




and Condensate Drains D. Refrigerant Liquid & Suction

1. Inside Building 2. Outside Building

All All

PFP PFP

½ ½

ASJ PVC

E. Pre-insulated line sets – See Section 23 05 00


BROADWAY PLAZA



HEATING EQUIPMENT 23 60 00 - 1

SECTION 23 60 00 - HEATING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide labor and equipment, materials and transportation to receive, install and put into operation complete heating equipment as specified, scheduled, shown, detailed or implied in the Project Documents.

B. Provide accessories required for the equipment to function properly and safely for the service intended.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit complete printed catalog and descriptive data for each piece of equipment, clearly indicating what features, options and accessories are being provided.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC FAN-FORCED CEILING MOUNTED HEATER:

A. Provide heater of size and voltage as scheduled. Unit shall be suitable for surface mounting or flush mounting, as scheduled. All controls shall be concealed behind painted front grille.

B. Heating element shall be sealed tubular type with parallel steel fins and shall be covered by a 5-year warranty.

C. Fan motor shall be totally enclosed and permanently lubricated.

D. Unit shall be provided with unit mounted thermostat and integral power disconnect switch, a automatic reset thermal overload cut-off, and fan delay switch.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers - American Stabilis, Berko, Federal Pacific, Markel, Q-Mark, Raywall.

2.2 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS:

A. Shall consist of non-glowing electric heater coils constructed from resistance wire enclosed in the steel sheath to which steel plate fins are brazed, and UL listed. Heater casings shall be steel construction, designed for mounting from ceiling with attached brackets.

B. Each heater shall be provided with thermal overload protection for the motor, and a separate thermal overload protection for the heater element. Provide with controls transformer and 24 volt wall mounted thermostat. Provide integral disconnect switch.

C. Motor shall be totally enclosed, permanently lubricated, suitable for use in either horizontal or vertical position.

BROADWAY PLAZA



HEATING EQUIPMENT 23 60 00 - 2

D. All heater and control wiring shall terminate in an integral control box.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers - American Stabilis, Berko, Federal Pacific, Q-Mark, Raywall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:

A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and of other sections of the Specifications.

3.2 SPACE REQUIREMENTS:

A. The Contractor shall field measure all existing clearances relative to receiving, transporting and installing equipment where indicated on the drawings.


BROADWAY PLAZA



DUCTLESS SPLIT D-X AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 65 22 - 1

SECTION 23 65 22 - DUCTLESS SPLIT D-X AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide labor and equipment, materials and transportation to receive, install and put into operation complete air conditioning equipment and systems as specified, scheduled, shown, detailed or implied in the Project Documents.

B. Provide accessories required for the equipment to function properly and safely for the service intended.

1.2 SUBMITTAL DATA:

A. Submit complete printed catalog and descriptive data for each major piece of equipment.


1.3 REFRIGERANT AND OIL:

A. Furnish an adequate supply of refrigerant and oil, and maintain refrigerant and oil in the system in proper quantities for one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner.

B. At the end of one year's operation, an inspection of the system shall be made to determine the amount and condition of the oil and refrigerant charges. Conduct test for acidity and the presence of moisture in the system. At that time the refrigerant charge shall be brought up to full charge, oil shall be brought to full charge, and any source of leakage necessitating addition of refrigerant or oil shall be found and corrected.

C. Refrigerant or oil lost or contaminated during the one year period from the date of acceptance to the date of inspection shall be provided without additional charge for both labor and material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT/HEAT PUMP:

A. The condensing unit shall be factory packaged complete with compressor, condenser, controls and refrigerant. Provide heat pump units where scheduled.

B. The compressor shall be reciprocating or scroll hermetic type with internal vibration isolation and shielding to muffle noise. Motor compressor units shall be warranted for 5 years including parts and labor.

C. The condenser shall be complete with finned tube coil and fan. The fan hood shall be designed to protect the motor shaft, bearings and windings, shall have internal air vanes to cool the motor during operation.

BROADWAY PLAZA




The fan motor shall be factory lubricated, inherently protected and resiliently mounted. A high capacity refrigerant liquid drier shall be furnished for field installation.

D. Where scheduled, provide with a low-ambient controller shall allow cooling to -20°F outdoor temperature.

E. Controls shall be factory wired and located in a readily accessible position behind access door. The compressor motor shall have both thermal and current sensitive overload devices. Solid state compressor protection control system shall prevent short cycling on safety devices or power interruption by limiting compressor starts at 4 to 6 minute intervals depending on the reason for the shutdown. Other protective devices shall include low ambient controls allowing compressor operation to 0°F, low temperature lockout for temperatures below 0°F, crankcase heater, oil pressure safety cutout, and high and low pressure safety switches. A 24 volt circuit transformer shall be factory installed in the unit. Provide plug-in wiring connections to controls.

F. Piping-

1. Refrigerant Piping - Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are offered as a guide for pricing only. Verify all refrigerant pipe sizes, and required accessories, double suction risers, traps, etc. with Manufacturer prior to installation.

2. See Section 23 05 00.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers - Friedrich, Fujitsu, LG, Mitsubishi, Sanyo.

2.2 DUCTLESS BLOWER COIL:

A. The unit to be a slim silhouette, compact, recessed cassette or below-ceiling mounted packaged evaporator/blower unit with electric resistance heating coil(s) as scheduled. The units shall be listed by electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. All wiring to be in accordance with the National Electric Code (N.E.C.). The units shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210/240 and bear the ARI label. The system shall utilize R-410A refrigerant.

B. The unit shall be completely factory assembled and wired. The casing shall have a baked enamel finish. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly of multiple, high performance, double inlet, forward curve fans direct driven by a single motor. The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on permanently lubricated bearings.

C. Below ceiling type units shall be provided with a one-way air outlet system. One outlet to be three directional face mounted. The spacing of the blades on the face louver shall be narrow enough to protect the internal moving parts from damage without the use of any additional accessories. A motorized swing flow louver shall provide an automatic change in air flow by directing the air from side to side for uniform air distribution. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter.

D. For cassette type units, the fan shall be centrifugal, direct-drive blower type with air intake in center of the unit and discharge on the perimeter. Motorized louvers can remain stationary or move continuously. Airflow can be directed 2, 3, or 4-ways.

E. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to copper tubing. All tube joints shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. The coil shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan under the coil shall have a factory-installed condensate pump and drain connection for hose attachment to remove condensate.

BROADWAY PLAZA




F. Acceptable Manufacturers – Friedrich, Fujitsu, LG, Mitsubishi, Sanyo.

2.3 CONTROLS:

A. Provide one of the following for each system, as scheduled:

1. A solid-state electromechanical control system which shall control space temperature and determine optimum fan speed. Controls shall include a compatible, non-programmable wall-mounted thermostat.

2. 3rd party interface for operation from Building Control System (BCS),

B. Provide additional control accessories where scheduled or where required for the installation.

C. Except for control wiring shown on electrical drawings, the Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the complete installation of the control systems for all mechanical equipment, including all wiring and ancillary equipment necessary to provide a complete and fully operative control system. Where required by applicable codes, this contractor shall provide the services of a licensed electrician to complete this work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:

A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of other Sections.

3.2 TESTING:

A. Test direct expansion system refrigerant piping and machine assembly for leaks before evacuation, dehydration and charging. Perform tests above 60 F. ambient temperature.

1. Remove controls and valves subject to test damage. 2. Perform testing, evacuation and charging of system in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. 3. Furnish typewritten data for each system, tabulating -

a. Suction and condensing temperatures, and pressures. b. Ampere input of compressor motors under full load (for each phase leg). c. Evaporator temperature. d. Evaporator entering and leaving dry and wet bulb temperature. e. Voltage and ampere input of each supply (evaporator) fan motor (one reading for each

phase leg on 3 phase motors). f. Outdoor temperature at the time above tests are conducted.


A. The Contractor shall field measure all existing clearances relative to receiving, transporting and installing equipment where indicated on the drawings. If necessary, the contractor shall disassemble unit and

BROADWAY PLAZA




reassemble in final installed position. Such disassembly and reassembly shall be approved by and carefully coordinated with the equipment manufacturer.

3.4 TESTING AND BALANCING:


3.5 SYSTEM VERIFICATION AND CALIBRATION:



BROADWAY PLAZA



HVAC EQUIPMENT – AIR SIDE 23 80 00 - 1

SECTION 23 80 00 - HVAC EQUIPMENT - AIR SIDE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Furnish and install air-side heating, ventilating and air handling equipment of all types employed in the Project.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:


B. Submit unit performance including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.

C. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction, components and options.

D. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and service clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations. Indicate unit shipping split locations, and split dimensions, installation and operating weights including dimensions.

E. Submit data on electrical requirements. Include safety and start-up instructions.

F. See Section 23 01 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL DOWNBLAST ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS:

A. Exhaust fans shall be centrifugal wheel, downblast roof ventilators, capacities, sizes, types and accessories as scheduled.

B. Each fan shall be selected to operate quietly and efficiently on its volume-pressure curve, free from objectionable vibration, and shall carry the certified rating seal authorized by AMCA at the scheduled ratings.

C. Square curb base and throat section shall be constructed in one piece, on not less than 12 gage aluminum, with the throat section spun to provide streamlined entrance to the fan wheel. Fan wheel shall be centrifugal, backwardly inclined, non- overloading type, constructed of not less than 12 gage aluminum for blades and bottom inlet of wheel and 1/8-inch aluminum for the top plate.

D. Motor and drive compartment shall be separated from the air stream by a horizontal plate constructed of not less than 1/8- inch aluminum and supported by columns of aluminum round stock or cast brackets.

E. Outer baffle and motor compartment hood shall be removable for service, and shall be one of the following, as scheduled:

BROADWAY PLAZA




1. Spun aluminum of not less than 12 gage. 2. Heavy extruded aluminum louvers with mitered and welded corners.

F. Drives for fan wheels shall be direct or V-belt as scheduled.

G. Supporting members of drive assembly shall be constructed of not less than 1/8-inch aluminum, isolated with multi- directional vibration mountings.

H. Where required, bearings shall be flanged type, mounted in rubber, sealed and prelubricated.

I. V-belt drives shall be furnished with variable sheave on the motor.

J. Motor base shall be adjustable.

K. Motors shall be NEMA standard, resilient mounted, ball bearing, open type with horsepower, speed and current characteristics as scheduled. Furnish with each motor, a factory mounted disconnect switch with motor overload protection suitable for the motor scheduled and factory isolated conduit from the motor compartment to inside the curb cap.

L. Each unit shall be furnished with an easily removable galvanized or polyvinyl coated steel hardware cloth birdscreen and a gravity backdraft damper. Damper shall be constructed of not less than .020 aluminum formed for rigidity and pivoted to an extruded aluminum or heavy rustproofed steel frame with nylon or brass bearings. Blades shall be connected together with pivoted aluminum tie rods.

M. Provide fan manufacturer's prefabricated minimum 24-inch high insulated metal roof curbs constructed of heavy galvanized steel or welded aluminum to match fan construction, full 2- inch thick heavy density internal insulation, rubber curb cap for fan base mounting, factory clips or attachment devices to secure fan tight to curb, counterflashing, wide roof flange, backdraft damper frame, and cant strip. Furnish complete and as recommended by the manufacturer.

N. Acceptable Manufacturers - Acme, Carnes, Greenheck, Loren Cook, Jenn-Air, Penn, Twin City Fans.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of other sections.

B. Coordinate responsibility for providing equipment roof curbs and flashings with roofing contractor. Coordinate curb type with roofing contractor to ensure curb's compatibility with roofing system and with curb-mounted equipment.


A. The Contractor shall field measure all existing clearances relative to receiving, transporting and installing equipment where indicated on the drawings. If necessary, the contractor shall disassemble unit and

BROADWAY PLAZA




reassemble in final installed position. Such disassembly and reassembly shall be approved by and carefully coordinated with the equipment manufacturer.



3.4 TEST AND BALANCE:




BROADWAY PLAZA



DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 23 85 00 - 1

SECTION 23 85 00 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide all necessary labor, equipment, and materials for a complete duct system, including all hardware and accessory devices.

B. Install instrumentation devices in the duct system, furnished under Section 23 90 00.

1.2 STANDARDS:

A. Ductwork shall be fabricated, erected and installed and fitted out with accessories in accordance with current editions of the following -

1. Governing Building Codes. 2. NFPA 90A. 3. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Pressure - Velocity Classification - classifications of duct construction as defined in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, First Edition, 1985 (Table 1-1).

1.4 SUBMITTALS:



1.5 OPTIONS:

A. Equivalent area round ducts may be substituted for rectangular ducts serving a single outlet provided the round duct tap is made into the rectangular with a round take-off fitting with integral volume damper as specified below.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Galvanized steel sheets, lock-forming quality, ASTM A-525 with minimum G60 galvanized coating for both sides of the sheet.

BROADWAY PLAZA




B. Duct Sealant - United, Foster, Hardcast, Minnesota Mining Manufacturing.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS:

A. Provide heavy-duty shutter type dampers, with galvanized 16 gage or extruded aluminum frame and wind stops, minimum 28 gage galvanized steel or 26 gage aluminum blades, 3/16-inch steel shaft with "Oilite" bronze bearings, roll formed blade edged with felt sealer, blades linked with tie bar and adjustable counter weight, to allow full blade position parallel to air flow under full air flow with gravity closing of dampers on reverse flow.

B. Provide frames for required mounting and access doors required for complete adjustment of balance weight.

C. Fan manufacturer's backdraft dampers are acceptable where furnished and installed in conjunction with exhaust fan installations scheduled, and similar to above.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Air Balance, Carnes, Empco, Greenheck, Krueger, Louvers & Dampers, Ruskin, Nailor Industries.

2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS:

A. Provide manual balancing dampers with position locking mechanism as shown and as required to balance the air flow to each outlet or from each inlet.

B. Construction in accordance with SMACNA manuals.

2.4 ROUND TAKE-OFF:

A. A round take-off made from a rectangular duct shall utilize fitting having rectangular opening with 45° transition to round collar on upstream side of fitting. Fitting shall include a butterfly damper with quadrant operator in round collar, with stand-off platform to extend quadrant beyond duct wrap for insulated duct. Provide a wing nut at each end of damper shaft. Fitting shall be equivalent to Wichita Sheet Metal Supply Co. model HETO.

2.5 SHEET METAL HARDWARE:

A. Quality and configuration to conform to Ventfabrics, Inc. Piece number and description, as listed-

1. Ventfabrics No. 641 damper regulator, self-blocking, die- cast, secure to sheet metal on exposed and concealed ductwork above accessible ceilings.

2. Ventfabrics No. 677 damper regulator, self-blocking die- cast, chrome plated cover. To control ductwork located above an accessible ceiling or confined in wall spaces. Control from conditioned space.

3. Ventfabrics No. 607 damper end bearing, die-cast for rectangular ducts, with bearing and opening for shaft inclusion.

4. Ventfabrics No. 609 end bearing, die-cast for cylindrical ducts, with suitable gaskets, bearing and recess for shaft insertion.

5. Ventfabrics No. 615 and 616 tandem placed U-bolts, with washer and nuts to fix damper rod to damper blade.

6. Ventfabrics No. 699 die-cast instrument test hole, with screw, cap and gasket.

BROADWAY PLAZA




7. Ventfabrics No. 611, 160 F. fusible link, 15 lb. load capacity. 8. Ventfabrics No. 613, 212 F. fusible link, 15 lb. load capacity. 9. Ventfabrics No. 90, sash lock, cadmium plated stamp steel construction, for use on reach-thru

doors. 10. Ventfabrics No. 220, die-cast door pulls for use on reach- thru access doors. 11. Ventfabrics No. 150, 2 x 1-11/16-inch galvanized duct hinges, minimum 2 hinges per door, for use

on reach-thru access doors.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Duro-Dyne, Hardcast, Ventfabrics, Inc., Young Regulator.

2.6 FABRICATION:

A. Ductwork -

1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, latest edition. 2. Each duct system shall be constructed for the specific duct pressure of the system. 3. Pressure-Velocity Classification and seal class shall be as follows:

a. Exhaust ductwork shall be galvanized sheetmetal constructed per requirements for the 1" water gage pressure class and seal class "C".

4. Duct Sealant:

a. Seal new exhaust ductwork with Hardcast #601 water based, UL listed sealant or approved equivalent, in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for required static pressure construction class and seal class.

B. Rectangular duct fittings-

1. Elbows, tees and splits shall be constructed with square turns or radius turns which shall have a centerline radius 1-1/2 times the width of the duct as an absolute minimum.

2. If square turns are used, fabricate and install hollow formed turning vanes in each turn for elbows turns for elbows having equal inlet and outlet dimensions.

3. Where elbows have unequal inlet and outlet dimensions, turning vanes shall have leading and trailing edges parallel with the air flow and shall be high efficiency profile type similar to those manufactured by the Aerodyne Company. Vane assemblies shall be made with Aerodyne side rails, and vanes shall be installed on design centers as for the vanes across the full diagonal dimension of the elbow. Cut center section of each rail as recommended by manufacturer so that the required position adjustment may be made.

C. Round duct - Spiral seam, in accordance with SMACNA 1985 Duct Construction Standard.

1. Up to 15-inch: 26 gage steel spiral seam. 2. 15 thru 26-inch: 24 gauge steel spiral seam. 3. 28 thru 36-inch: 22 gauge steel spiral seam. 4. 38 thru 50-inch: 20 gauge steel spiral seam. 5. 52 thru 60-inch: 18 gauge steel spiral seam. 6. Joints-

a. Beaded sleeve joints on spiral duct, 2-inch minimum lap.

D. Round ductwork fittings-

BROADWAY PLAZA




1. Each 90 degree elbow shall be 2-piece welded, die formed construction, and shall have a center-line radius of not less than 1.5 times the duct diameter.

2. Each elbow between 45 and 90 degrees shall be 3-piece construction, with same center-line radius requirements.

3. Provide combination lateral elbow and tee, 90 degree tees, conical tees, double wye's and reducers each as required.

4. Fittings shall be constructed from material 2 gauges heavier than spiral pipe. For systems up to 4 inches static pressure seams shall be spot welded and internally sealed. For systems greater than 4 inches static pressure seams shall be continuously welded.

2.7 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS:

A. Provide as scheduled.

B. Noise-

1. The noise spectrum of the supply units shall be no higher than N.C.-35 as defined in the latest issue of ASHRAE Guide.

2. Units causing excessive air movement, drafts or objectionable noise shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.

C. Volume Control - Furnish supply outlets with key operated volume dampers, unless otherwise specified.

D. Gaskets - Flanges of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be gasketed with foam rubber gaskets to prevent leaking and smudging.

E. Finish - Furnish grilles, registers, and outlets in factory baked white enamel finish, also suitable as prime coat for finish painting in the field, except as otherwise specified or scheduled.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers - Air Concepts, Anemostat, Barber- Colman, Buensod-Stacy, Carnes, Carrier, Conners, Krueger, Metalaire, Seiho, Titus, Tempmaster, Trane, Tuttle & Bailey, Nailor Industries.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MATERIAL APPLICATION:

A. Galvanized steel sheets - use for fabrication of the following-

1. Exhaust ducts except as otherwise specified. 2. Housings for coils, dampers, filters and fans. 3. Roof ventilators and cowls. 4. Volume control dampers. 5. Intake and exhaust plenums, roof caps and goosenecks. 6. Hangers for ducts. 7. Flashing and counterflashing.

3.2 DUCT SIZE AND ROUTING:

A. Ductwork sizes and routing shown on drawings are schematic. Offset, flatten and maintain duct area, and reroute ducts where required to maintain headroom, clear light fixtures, pipes, conduits, structure and other construction.

BROADWAY PLAZA




B. Do not route piping above electrical distribution equipment, per National Electric Code.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Volume balancing dampers-

1. Install at each split in each run of duct. 2. Install at each outside air and return air connection to each piece of air handling equipment. 3. Install at no additional charge, any additional dampers required by the test and balance contractor. 4. Make provisions necessary to ensure that all dampers are easily accessible for balancing and

future adjustment.

B. Sheet metal hardware-

1. Install as required and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Air devices-

1. Each air device of each duct system shall be equipped with a balancing damper, either integral with the device or located in the individual branch duct to balance the airflow from that device.

2. These devices shall be installed after the duct systems are thoroughly cleaned, with suitable accessories as specified or required for proper air distribution.

3.4 ERECTION:

A. Hangers-

1. Provide round hangers, strap hangers, or trapeze shelf hangers in accordance with SMACNA standards.

2. Rectangular ducts 0 thru 47-inches wide, use 18 gage galvanized strap, 10 feet on center, 1-inch strap.

3. Cylindrical, single wall ducts - 0 thru 36-inches in diameter, use 18 gage galvanized strap, 10 feet on center, 1-inch strap.

3.5 ACCESS DOORS:

A. Provide duct access doors as required to clean kitchen hood exhaust ductwork. In other ducts, provide duct access doors as required to service each item of equipment mounted in the ductwork, including but not limited to- 1. Volume dampers. 2. Controls devices.

B. Duct access doors shall be complete with latches, gaskets and frames, and shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA manuals. Provide hinged doors wherever practicable, removable type otherwise. Access doors in lined or insulated ducts shall be insulated.

C. Furnish access doors as specified in Section 23 01 00 for installation in the general construction wherever duct access doors would not otherwise be accessible.

D. Access doors shall be generously sized for the purpose intended. Demonstrate suitability of each to the satisfaction of the Architect.

BROADWAY PLAZA




3.6 TESTING:


3.7 COMPLETION:

A. Complete each entire duct system, perform testing and cleaning operations, and leave each system in a condition with the coils cleaned, the filters clean, and debris and foreign material removed from the duct system.

B. Install a suitable air diffuser, grille, or similar device to cover each duct outlet.

C. Paint bare metal interior surfaces of ducts which can be seen through air inlets or outlets with a flat black paint.

D. Operate system and prove them to be free from excessive noise, free from perceptible air leaks, free from vibration, and capable of delivering the air quantities scheduled.

E. See Section 23 01 00 for additional requirements pertaining to cleaning of exposed ductwork in finished areas and equipment.


BROADWAY PLAZA



TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (HVAC) 23 99 00 - 1

SECTION 23 99 00 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (HVAC)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. This Section applies to the testing, adjusting, and balancing of all HVAC air and water systems in Divisions on 23 of the Specifications. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and establishment of fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

B. The mechanical contractor shall perform system cleaning, testing and start-up before commencement of the test and balance work.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS:

A. Testing, adjusting and balancing (T-A-B) of systems shall be performed by a competent and experienced personnel, certified by the Associated Air Balance Council or National Environmental Balancing Bureau in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, having done similar work in the past, and whose qualifications shall be subject to approval.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit names and qualifications of all persons proposed for testing, adjusting and balancing of mechanical systems and equipment. T-A-B work shall not begin until approval of such submittal is obtained.

B. Submit report format as described below. T-A-B work shall not begin until approval of such submittal is obtained.


1.4 REPORTS:

A. Provide reports and certificates required in each category of testing, adjusting and balancing, signed both by the technician performing the work and the Contractor as representing accurate, factual data, based on readings on the job. Include a listing of the instrumentation used for the procedures along with proof of instrument calibration. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.

B. Reports shall be submitted on 8-1/2 x 11-inch paper format. Submit format for recording data for approval prior to use. Include a copy of final reports in each Operating and Maintenance Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS:

BROADWAY PLAZA




A. Provide all meters, instruments, equipment and materials necessary for performance of tests.

B. Testing apparatus, not part of the permanent installation, shall remain the property of the Contractor.

C. Provide gaskets, lubricants, and other expendable materials required to be replaced during the execution of this work.

D. Fixed-pitch pulleys required for fan adjustments shall be provided on an exchange basis by the party responsible for the equipment installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF TEST AND BALANCE WORK:

A. Clean all dirt and debris from equipment.

B. Service all bearings, gear boxes, wearing surfaces and other equipment components requiring lubrication as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

C. Check all motor driven equipment for proper rotation.

D. Tag all valves and label all equipment.

E. Clean all plenums and ductwork.

F. Perform start-up on all equipment to insure proper operation.

G. Replace air filters.

H. Check all refrigerant systems to insure that they are properly charged with refrigerant and oil, and that they are moisture free.

I. Check all control devices to insure that they are installed correctly and are operating properly.

J. Make preliminary settings and adjustments as required to insure all systems will operate satisfactorily while test and balance work is performed.

K. Provide a set of final shop drawings to the test and balance agency.

L. Furnish and install additional balancing valves, dampers, test plugs and gauge cocks if the test and balance agency determines that such additional items are required to properly balance the systems.

3.2 TEST AND BALANCE PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF TEST AND BALANCE WORK:

A. Obtain design drawings, specifications, and submittals of mechanical equipment and temperature control diagrams, and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent.

B. Walk the systems to become familiar with equipment locations and to determine variations of the installation from design.

BROADWAY PLAZA




C. Prepare schematic diagrams of ductwork and piping systems as installed to facilitate reporting.

D. Prior to beginning of testing, adjusting and balancing procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the Engineer and representatives of the installers of the mechanical and temperature control systems. The objective of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting and balancing.

E. Schedule testing, adjusting and balancing procedures so that air conditioning systems are balanced during summer season and heating systems are balanced during winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5° F wet bulb of maximum summer design condition, and within 10° F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.

3.3 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES DURING TEST AND BALANCE WORK:

A. The mechanical contractor shall cooperate and assist the test and balance personnel in performing the test and balance work. He shall also provide craftsmen and/or technicians of the various trades as required to assist the test and balance agency in performing the test and balance work. The craftsmen and/or technicians provided shall be familiar with the installed systems.

3.4 TEST AND BALANCE PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES DURING TEST AND BALANCE WORK:

A. Provide temperature controls contractor with temperature, pressure and flow measurements as required for the calibration and verification of temperature controls system operation.

B. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing procedures for the various systems as described herein and in accordance with applicable standards of the National Environmental Balancing Bureau, Associated Air Balance Council, and the American Society of Heating and Refrigeration Engineers 1991 Handbook, Chapter 34.



3.6 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS: Note - items marked TBA shall be the responsibility of the Test and Balance Agency; items marked MC shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

A. Air balancing.

1. TBA, Balance all supply and exhaust air systems in accordance with SMACNA and AABC standards, by the use of a direct reading instrument such as "Anemotherm" or "Velometer" which has been properly calibrated.

2. TBA, The quantity of airflow at each inlet or outlet shall be within 10 percent of the design cfm shown on the Drawings.

3. TBA, Blank-off sufficient filter area to simulate a dirty filter condition (maximum pressure drop across filter bank).

4. TBA, Furnish typewritten data tabulating-

a. Quantity of air in cfm at each air outlet and inlet.

BROADWAY PLAZA




b. Dry bulb temperature in each room. c. Dry bulb temperature of the supply air. d. Outdoor dry and wet bulb temperature at the time the above tests are conducted.

5. MC, Adjust belts, sheaves and the alignment of air handling equipment. 6. MC, Where various combinations of sheaves must be installed on fan systems to achieve the

correct air delivery, change the sheaves and continue to take successive readings until the correct combinations are installed.

7. MC, Oil or grease bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Split systems -

1. MC, Test direct expansion system refrigerant piping and machine assembly for leaks before evacuation, dehydration and charging. Perform tests above 60 F. ambient temperature. Remove controls and valves subject to test damage.

2. MC, Perform testing, evacuation and charging of system in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust, align and service split system components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as required to achieve proper operation. Oil or grease bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Furnish typewritten data for each system, tabulating -

a. MC, Suction and condensing temperatures, and pressures. b. TBA, Ampere input of compressor motors under full load (for each phase leg). c. TBA, Evaporator temperature. d. TBA, Evaporator entering and leaving dry and wet bulb temperature. e. TBA, Total quantity of supply air in cfm. f. TBA, Total quantity of return air in cfm. g. TBA, Total quantity of outside air in cfm. h. TBA, Voltage and ampere input of each supply (evaporator) fan motor (one reading for each

phase leg on 3 phase motors). i. TBA, Pressure in inches water gage at inlet and discharge of each supply fan or blower. j. TBA, Outdoor temperature at the time above tests are conducted.

C. Exhaust Fans -

1. MC - Adjust, align and service exhaust fans in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as required to achieve proper operation. Oil or grease bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust belts and sheaves. Where various combinations of sheaves must be installed on fan systems to achieve the correct air delivery, change the sheaves and continue to take successive readings until the correct combinations are installed.

2. TBA - Furnish typewritten data for each exhaust fan, tabulating-

a. Total quantity of exhaust air in cfm. b. Rpm of fan. c. Rpm of motor. d. Voltage and ampere input of fan motor (one reading for each phase leg on 3 phase motors). e. Pressure in inches water gage at inlet and discharge of fan.


BROADWAY PLAZA



BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 01 00 - 1

SECTION 26 01 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL:

A. All work covered by this section of these specification shall be accomplished in accordance with the respective drawings, information or instructions to bidders, general requirements, and the general conditions of these specifications. Any supplementary conditions, special conditions, addenda, or directives which may be issued by the Architect herewith or otherwise shall be complied with in every respect.

B. Bidders shall determine the contents of a complete set of drawings and specifications and be aware that they may be bidding from a partial set of drawings, applicable only to the various separate contracts, sub-contracts, or trades as may be issued for bidding purposes only. The complete scope of work for the electrical trade in this project are illustrated on the complete Contract Documents which consist of the combined Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning plans and specifications. Each Bidder shall thoroughly acquaint himself with all the details of the complete set of drawings and specifications before submitting his bid. All drawings and specifications form a part of the contract documents for each separate contract and shall be considered as bound therewith in the event partial sets of plans and specifications are issued for bidding only. The submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of the review and examination of all drawings, specifications, and addenda issued for this project as no allowances will be made because of unfamiliarity with any portion of the complete set of documents.

1.2 SUB-CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS:

A. Sub-Contractor (as a company) and his job superintendent for their portion of the work shall have at least three years of satisfactory experience in completion of projects of comparable size and complexity. Evidence of this experience will be required before approval of the Architect as being acceptable for their portion of the work.

1.3 SCHEDULE:

A. The schedule and sequence of work must be carefully coordinated through the General Contractor.

1.4 SCOPE:

A. The work included under this specification consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, transportation, services, etc., which are applicable and necessary to complete the installation of the systems described in these specifications, illustrated on the accompanying drawings, or as directed by the Architect.

B. In general, the various lines and raceways to be installed by the various trades under this specification shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, as required to conform to the generally accepted standards and as required by all governing Building Codes so as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. Run work parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted.

BROADWAY PLAZA




C. The construction details of the building are illustrated on the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Be thoroughly acquainted with the details before submitting a bid as no allowances will be made because of unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts to accommodate the ultimate installation of pipe hangers in the forms before concrete is poured. Set sleeves in place in forms before concrete is poured, and in masonry walls while they are under construction.

D. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor, the requirements of all trades for temporary power during the construction phase. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the installation of temporary power distribution for those requirements as part of his work and at no additional cost to the owner.

E. The Contractor shall coordinate the interruption of service to the existing building with the Owner and shall bear all costs and be fully responsible for scheduling his work to accommodate all Owner activities at this facility. He shall also provide temporary electrical service to the existing electrical systems as necessary so that the Owner may have the use of undisturbed portions of the existing building.

1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE:

A. Visit the site, verify all existing items shown on plans, or specified, and be familiar with the working conditions, hazards, existing grades, actual formations, soil conditions, and local requirements involved; submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of such visit. All proposals shall take these existing conditions into consideration and the lack of specific information on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility.

1.6 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS:

A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work have been obtained from city and/or other substantially reliable sources and are offered separately from the Contract Documents, as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. Examine the site, verify the locations, elevations, and availability of all utilities and services required, and be adequately informed as to their relation to the work; the submission of bids shall be deemed evidence thereof.

1.7 INSTRUCTIONS:

A. When specified in other Sections, the contractor shall furnish the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements of the equipment or system specified. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation.

B. The number of man-days of instruction to be furnished shall be as specified in the various Sections of the Specification.

1.8 CODE REQUIREMENTS:

A. All work shall comply with the provisions of these specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings, or as directed by the Architect, and shall satisfy the National Electrical Code and all applicable local codes, ordinances, or regulations of the governing bodies, and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work, or services thereto. In all cases where alterations to, or deviations from, the drawings and specifications are required by the authority having jurisdiction, report the same in writing to the Architect

BROADWAY PLAZA




and secure his approval before proceeding. Upon completion of the work, furnish a statement from the inspecting authority stating that the installation has been accepted and approved. Provide complete utility service connections as directed, and submit, as required, all necessary drawings; secure all permits and inspections necessary in connection with the work, and pay all legal fees on account thereof. In the absence of other applicable local codes, acceptable to the Architect, the National Electric Code shall apply to this work.

1.9 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

A. All materials unless otherwise specified shall be new, free from any defects, and of the best quality of their respective kinds. All like materials used shall be of the same manufacture, model, and quality unless otherwise specified.

B. All manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, adjusted, and conditioned as recommended by the manufacturers, or as indicated in their published literature unless specifically herein specified to the contrary.

C. All work shall be performed by competent workmen and executed in a neat and workmanlike manner providing a thorough and complete installation. Work shall be properly protected during construction, including the shielding of soft or fragile materials, and the temporary plugging of open conduits during construction. At completion, the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned and all tools, equipment, obstructions, or debris present as a result of this portion of work shall be removed from the premises.

1.10 COOPERATION:

A. All work under these specifications shall be accomplished in conjunction with other trades on this project in a manner which will allow each trade to complete his work in a timely fashion.

B. Maintaining contact and being familiar with the progress of the general construction and timely installation shall be the responsibility of this trade to expedite this contract and avoid unnecessary delays in the progress of other trades.

C. Should any question arise between the trades as to the placing of lines, ducts, conduits, fixtures, or equipment, or should it appear desirable to remove any general construction which would affect the appearance or strength of the structure, reference shall be made to the Architect for instructions.

1.11 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. The drawings show diagrammatically the locations of the various conduits, fixtures, and equipment, and the method of connecting and controlling them. It is not intended to show every connection in detail and all fittings required for a complete system. The systems shall include, but are not limited to, the items shown on the drawings. Exact locations of these items shall be determined by reference to the general plans and measurements at the building and in cooperation with other trades and, in all cases, shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make reasonable change in the location of this work without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Should any changes be deemed necessary in items shown on the contract drawings, the shop drawings, descriptions, and the reason for the proposed changes shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.

C. Lay out all work maintaining all lines, grades, and dimensions according to these drawings with due consideration for other trades and verify all dimensions at the site prior to any fabrication or installation;

BROADWAY PLAZA




should any conflict develop or installation be impractical, the Architect shall be notified before any installation or fabrication and the existing conditions shall be investigated and proper changes effected without any additional cost.

D. Titles of Sections and Paragraphs in these specifications are introduced merely for convenience and are not to be construed as a correct or complete segregation or tabulation of the various units of material and/or work.

1.12 ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL:

A. In the statement under this contract where "approval" is required or requested, it is understood that such approval must be obtained from the Architect in writing before proceeding with the proposal, and an adequate number of copies of any such proposal shall be submitted to the Architect.

B. The approval of the Architect of any material, changes, drawings, etc., submitted will be considered as general only and to aid the Contractor in expediting his work. Such approval as may be given does not in any way relieve the Contractor from the necessity of furnishing all materials and performing all work as required by the Drawings and Specifications.

1.13 LOCAL RESTRICTIONS:

A. Contractor shall become familiar with rules and regulations of the City, County, and State; or any other authority having jurisdiction over this project; and if, in his opinion, any work or materials shown on the drawings or specified do not comply with these rules and regulations as to size, type, capacity, and quality, he should make it known to the Architect prior to the submission of his bid.

1.14 ELECTRIC WIRING:

A. Except for such items as are normally wired up at the point of manufacture and so delivered, and unless specifically noted to the contrary herein, the Electrical Contractor shall do all electric wiring for power supply, including contactors, starters, etc. The other Contractors will erect all motors in place ready for connections. The Electrical Contractor shall mount all starters, as directed, furnishing supporting structures where necessary. The other Contractors will furnish with each item requiring electrical connections, the necessary instructions and wiring diagrams to this Sub-Contractor.

1.15 RESPONSIBILITY:

A. This Contractor will be held responsible for the satisfactory and complete execution of all work specified or indicated. He shall produce complete finished operating systems and provide all incidental items required as part of this work, regardless of whether such item is particularly specified or indicated.

1.16 HANGERS AND INSERTS:

A. All hangers, brackets, clamps, etc., shall be of standard weight steel. Perforated strap hangers shall not be used in any work. When two (2) or more conduits are run parallel, they may be supported on trapeze hangers. Other hangers shall be constructed with rods and hanger adjusters of adequate size to carry the loads imposed.

BROADWAY PLAZA




B. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, all horizontal runs of conduit and piping shall be suspended from the floor or roof construction, as the case may be, by means of approved hangers spaced not farther apart than ten feet (10') on centers, except that hangers for piping 1-1/4" in size and smaller shall not be spaced more the 8 feet on centers. Vertical risers shall be supported by approved riser clamps or supports installed at the respective floor lines.

C. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in the raceway systems. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the raceways shall be guided and firmly anchored; anchors shall be approved by the Architect and shall be designed for equal effectiveness for both longitudinal and transverse thrust. No conduit shall be self-supporting, nor shall it be supported from equipment connections. Transmission of vibrations, noise, etc., shall be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampers to minimize transmission shall be used where necessary.

D. Where ducts interfere with the proper location of hangers, furnish and install trapeze hangers. Trapeze hangers may be used to support groups of conduit run parallel.

E. Above roof - Support conduit at no more than 8 feet on center, with manufactured pipe supports: Miro Industries Model 3-R to match existing supports on roof. The conduit supports shall be a roller-bearing type designed to support piping or conduit, and to absorb thermal expansion and contraction of piping or conduit thus preventing damage to roof membrane. The pipe or conduit shall rest on a polycarbonate resin roller and a glass- filled nylon rod situated in a polycarbonate resin seat.

1.17 GUARANTEE:

A. The entire system shall be guaranteed to be complete and installed in accordance with these plans and specifications.

B. Guarantee all new materials and workmanship for a period of one year from and after date of acceptance of installation. Replace, during the period of the guarantee, any parts found to be defective in their operation, without cost to the Owner.

C. Incandescent lamps shall be excepted from requirements of this guarantee, but all electric discharge and quartz lamps shall be covered under the guarantee.

1.18 REFERENCE ABBREVIATIONS:

A. References are made in the various electrical sections to technical societies, codes, specifications, trade organizations, and regulatory authorities in accordance with the following abbreviations:

1. FM - Factory Mutual 2. FS - Federal Specification 3. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. 4. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association 5. IRI - Industrial Risk Insurors 6. ISO - Insurance Services Organization 7. NEC - National Electrical Code(NFPA Pamphlet No. 70) 8. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 9. NFC - National Fire Codes 10. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 11. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

BROADWAY PLAZA




1.19 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUBMITTED:

A. SUBMITTALS WHICH DO NOT MEET THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS WILL BE IMMEDIATELY REJECTED WITHOUT FURTHER REVIEW!

1. Catalog cutsheets and brochures will be preceded by a neatly arranged cover sheet having ample room for shopdrawing stamps and bearing the following information in a prominent, immediately visible location and size:

a. Equipment name or number as referenced in the contract Documents (example: "AHU-A" or "Type A" light fixture).

b. All options or accessories provided. c. Applicable Specification section and paragraph numbers.

2. Substitutions -

a. Cross reference individual manufacturer and catalog numbers of substitute products to those of specified material.

b. Prior to requesting permission to use substitute or alternate products, the Contractor shall investigate and make certain that the product-

1) Conforms with the standard of performance and quality specified. 2) Will physically fit in the space allocated, with sufficient access and maintenance

space. 3) Involves no additional costs to the Owner or extended construction time.

c. Should the use of a substitute product entail any changes in details or construction, the changes and information documenting the complete coordination with all affected trades shall be submitted prior to submittal of substitute or alternate products

d. Provide with requests for permission to use substitute or alternate products, drawings, specifications, samples, performance data and other information as may be required to assist in determination of acceptability of the product. The burden of proof is the Contractor's responsibility.

3. All similar or related items shall be submitted together under one cover sheet (i.e. fixtures, raceways, wiring, equipment). Do not piece-meal submittals!!!

B. Submittal Items:

1. Submit manufacturer's certified data relative to equipment required for the installation of the electrical and electronic systems.

2. Submit adequate engineering data on each piece of equipment to allow a careful check of compliance with the technical requirements of the Contract Documents. Clearly indicate on submittal data the manufacturer's name, piece number, equipment capacity, and other applicable technical data.

3. Equipment, Electrical Systems Submittals:

a. New Power Distribution Equipment. b. Wiring Devices and Cover Plates. c. Lighting Fixtures and Controls. d. Other Special Systems.

1.20 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

BROADWAY PLAZA




A. Bind in looseleaf binders with the words, "Operating and Maintenance Manual" and the Project identification imprinted on the cover. Prepare three complete sets of records for the Owner, with table of contents, index, and tabbed Section dividers.

B. During the construction period, accumulate the following for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals-

1. Copies or warranties and guarantees on each piece of equipment installed. 2. Fixture brochures. 3. Wiring and Control Diagrams. 4. Approved Shop Drawings. 5. Operating instructions. 6. Recommended maintenance procedures. 7. Lists of major items of equipment with name, address, and telephone number of each local

representative.

C. Submit the manuals for approval at approximately 75 percent job completion.

1.21 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. Accumulate Record Drawings during the construction of the Project. Keep one set of blueline Contract Drawings at the job site at all times, and mark changes, rerouting or modifications which occur, clearly on the Drawings with dimensions.

B. At completion of the job, deliver Record Drawings to Architect. Record Drawings shall be submitted for approval prior to final payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are scheduled or specified for the purpose of establishing standard of design, quality, appearance, performance and serviceability, and not to limit competition. Scheduled products (as may be modified by detailed specifications) are those selected as the basis for system design with respect to physical size and space arrangements, required capacity and performance characteristics, and the product quality intended.

B. The Drawings indicate specified products physically arranged in the spaces, as cataloged by specific manufacturers, generally as listed in the Equipment Schedules.

C. Listed "Acceptable Manufacturer's" are those considered capable of manufacturing products conforming to detailed Specifications, and as such, are invited to compete on an equal basis provided the offering is comparable in every respect to scheduled or specified products and actually conforms to the detailed Specifications and Schedule requirements. Listing herein as "acceptable manufacturers" does not imply "accepted", "approved", or "prior approval", or any other such connotation.

D. Vendors are invited to submit material or equipment bids to bidding Contractors on any comparable equivalent product, whether or not the manufacturer of such product is listed herein as an "acceptable manufacturer". Such product bids should clearly indicate offerings that are not listed as "acceptable manufacturer's". In the event a bidding Contractor, after satisfying himself that such unlisted product is in fact "equal" to the specified product with respect to design, quality, performance and arrangement (space requirements), and the Contractor desires to furnish that product on the Project, he may request the

BROADWAY PLAZA




name of the manufacturer be added to the list of acceptable manufacturers by addendum prior to bid time.

E. At a bidder's request, an unnamed manufacturer's equipment will be considered to determine additional "acceptable manufacturers" if a request is made in writing no later than ten days prior to the bid opening. If such requests are found acceptable, an addendum will be written listing additional acceptable manufacturers. Consideration will be given only to requests of bona fide bidders (Contractors), not to those received from vendors.

F. Manufacturers of materials and equipment shall be as specified, scheduled, or as listed in each respective product Specification Article.

2.2 FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE DEVELOPED PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS:

A. Materials and adhesives used throughout the electrical systems shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 without evidence of continued combustion and with a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. If such materials are to be applied with adhesives, they shall be tested as applied with such adhesives, or the adhesives used shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. (Note: materials need not meet these requirements where they are entirely located outside of a building and do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard or where specifically exempted in the body of these Specifications).

B. "Flame Spread Rating" and "Smoke Developed Rating" shall be as determined by the "Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, NFPA No. 255, ASTM E84, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard". Such materials are listed in the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. "Building Materials List" under the heading "Hazard Classification (Fire)".

2.3 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS:

A. Generally, where conduits pass through walls or floors, 22 gauge galvanized sheet iron sleeves shall be used, except those in beams, outside walls, or structural walls or members which shall be standard galvanized steel pipe. The size of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of conduit of the proper size with adequate clearance for movement due to expansion and contraction. Where conduits pass through outside walls, the inside diameter of the galvanized iron pipe sleeves shall be at least 1/2" greater than the outside diameter of the service pipe. After the conduits are installed, fill the annular space between the conduit and its sleeve with a mastic or caulk with lead. Use packing as required to accomplish this.

B. Sleeves in existing masonry load bearing walls shall be schedule 40 steel pipe grouted in place with structural grout. For exterior walls, the space between the pipe and the sleeves shall be packed with oakum or jute twine and calked watertight.

C. Escutcheons, except as specifically noted or specified, shall be installed on all conduits passing exposed through the floors, walls, or ceilings. Escutcheons shall be equal to the Crane No. 10 chrome plated sectional floor and ceiling plates and shall fit snugly and neatly around conduit. Solid chrome plates with set screws shall be used if sectional plates do not fit properly or stay in place.

2.4 FIRE STOPPING:

A. Seal annular spaces between sleeves and penetrating materials in fire rated floors, ceilings, and walls with fireproof and waterproof silicone elastomer applied in accordance with the manufacturer's published

BROADWAY PLAZA




instructions. Multiple penetrations shall be sealed with silicone calking. Seal material shall be UL classified for use in fire rated penetration seals, and shall be applied in the manufacturer's recommended thickness for the fire rating of the penetrated structure in accordance with ASTM-E-814 requirements.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Dow Corning, General Electric, Hilti.

2.5 WATERPROOFING:

A. Seal penetrations of wet or potentially wet structures, floors, exterior walls, etc., other than those requiring fire stopping, with sealant to prevent moisture leakage. Apply sealing material (calking) in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Product Research and Chemical Co. "Poly-Sulphide Sealant" PRC- 5000.

2.6 GROUNDING:

A. Provide grounding of electrical system in accordance with the National Electrical Code NFPA 70, UL 467, and IEEE 837 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code Equipment Grounding Conductor Table on the basis of the circuit overcurrent protection device rating.

2. Bond together the following items to serve as a single grounding electrode for all electric services:

a. Minimum 20 feet BHD copper conductor encased in concrete footing or grade beam in contact with earth.

b. Structural steel building framework. c. 10'-0" X 3/4" diameter copper-clad steel ground rod(s).

1) Where more than one ground rod is required to meet specified resistance, ground rods shall be located at least 10 feet apart. Interconnect with grounding electrode conductor below grade unless otherwise indicated.

d. Metal underground water pipe.

3. The grounding electrode shall be connected by a grounding electrode conductor sized in accordance with the National Electric Code Table 250-94 to the service neutral bus.

4. Provide a main bonding jumper from the grounded service neutral bus to the main equipment ground bus or point of termination of the equipment grounding conductors.

5. Provide bonding jumpers for attachment of each metallic water, fuel, fire suppression, steam, gas or air piping system to the building grounding electrode system. Provide connections with listed connectors applied to the piping in an approved method. The points of attachment of the bonding jumpers shall be accessible. The bonding jumper size shall match the main grounding electrode conductor.

6. Grounding system resistance must not exceed 5 ohms. Final tests shall be conducted to ensure that this requirement is met.

B. Provide equipment grounding conductors for all circuits. A green insulated, copper ground conductor shall be installed with all circuits so as to make an electrically continuous ground system.

C. Ground all non-current carrying equipment, such as cable tray and equipment structures.

BROADWAY PLAZA




D. Grounding Connectors:

1. Listed and labeled by a NRTL acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

2. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy. 3. Welded Connections:

a. Exothermic welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

b. For structural steel, steel grounding stud for compression connector.

4. Compression Connectors: Hydraulic crimped, irreversible compression type kits. Connectors shall be factory filled with oxide inhibitor. All crimps shall be made with a hydraulic tool that embosses the index number on the outside of the connector. Compression type connections shall be allowed above and below grade where any permanent connection is required.

5. All splices and grounding electrode connections shall be made with exothermic welds or with hydraulic compression fittings.

E. Field Quality Control

1. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. Inspect compression type connections for proper die index number embossment.

2. Perform the following testing:

a. After installing grounding system, but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

b. Test completed grounding system as each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

c. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after the last trace of participation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

d. Perform tests for fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. Submit test results to the Engineer.

e. If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, promptly notify Engineer and include recommendations for reducing ground resistance.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Provide engraved phenolic lamacoid plastic name plates with 1/2 inch block engraving. Name plates shall give equipment designation as scheduled on the drawings.

B. After balancing branch circuits, provide each breaker panel with a typed directory which identifies specifically the branch circuit loads and location. Use architectural room names and designations found on the Contract Documents.

C. Provide labels for fused switches indicating equipment served and unit capacity in horse power or full load amperes and the installed fuse rating.

2.8 WIRE AND CABLE:

BROADWAY PLAZA




A. Provide systems of wires and cables for electric power, signalling, and control.

B. Materials:

1. Conductors shall be soft drawn annealed, conductivity of 98% pure copper. No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. No. 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded copper.

2. Other: Pull Cords - 1/8" nylon. Pulling Compound - Ideal "Yellow 77".

C. Install Wire Types:

1. THHN/THWN, XHHW for light and power branch circuits and control wiring. 2. THHN/THWN, XHHW for feeders, sub-feeders, motor circuits and high ambient temperature

locations.

D. Consistently color code wiring continuous throughout the work with insulation factory color-coded by pigmentation.

1. 120/208 Volt Systems:

a. Phase A - Black b. Phase B - Red c. Phase C - Blue d. Neutral - White e. Ground - Green

2. 277/480 Volt Systems:

a. Phase A – Brown b. Phase B - Orange c. Phase C - Yellow d. Neutral - Gray e. Ground - Green

3. Switch legs, travelers, and special systems continuous throughout the work as selected by the Contractor.

4. Where factory colors are not available, code ends of conductors with 1-1/2 inch colored tape.

E. Circuits of multiple phases passing through enclosures shall have phases grouped to reduce the reactance effect.

F. Minimum Sizes:

1. Light and Power Branch Circuits, 15 and 20 amperes OCP:

a. Minimum branch circuit: No. 12 AWG b. 120V longer than 80 feet first outlet to panel: No. 10 AWG. c. 120V longer than 120 feet from first outlet to panel: No. 8 AWG d. 277V longer than 130 feet from first outlet to panel: No. 10 AWG. e. 277V longer than 220 feet from first outlet to panel: No. 8 AWG.

2. All branch circuits shall have dedicated full ampacity neutrals, or shared neutral conductors serving two or three branch circuits shall be sized at 175% of the maximum branch circuit overcurrent device, based on the 75°C ratings in Table 310-16 of the National Electrical Code. Shared neutral conductors shall be considered as current- carrying conductors for the purpose of derating

BROADWAY PLAZA




conductor ampacities for installation of more than three current- carrying conductors in a raceway or cable.

3. Other circuits sized to limit voltage drop per National Electrical Code. 4. Control Wiring: No. 14 AWG, unless otherwise specified.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers - American Inslated Wire Corp., Cablec Corp., Cerrowire, Essex, Guardian, Rome Cable, Triangle.

2.9 OUTLET BOXES:

A. Provide outlet boxes for the installation of wiring devices, lighting fixtures, fire alarm devices and power and control connections. Provide boxes at the terminal of conduit runs to outlets and devices and for installation of conductors as required by the NEC.

B. Locate switch boxes at locations designated by Architectural Documents when indicated. If Architectural locations are not identified use appropriate locations consistent with schematic indications on Electrical Documents. Where application of switches repeats installation type and relative locations shall be consistent throughout project unless indicated otherwise.

C. Provide standard manufactured plugs in unused openings of boxes. Provide plaster rings and covers where required by the building structure. Rigidly attach boxes to structure and ceiling supporting members in suspended ceilings to avoid cutting mechanical ceiling members.

D. Materials: Metallic boxes shall be of welded or one piece cast construction.

1. Flush Mounted Outlet Boxes: Standard, stamped galvanized steel with factory conduit knockouts, one piece and welded construction.

2. In dry walls for single and two gang outlet provide 4S and 4D boxes, for 3 or more outlets use masonry boxes.

3. In block and masonry walls provide masonry boxes of depths required for wall thickness. 4. In ceilings provide 4 inch boxes. Omit covers if standard canopy and device plates entirely cover

the ceiling opening. 5. In exposed work, exterior of the building, in wet locations, and flush in non-waterproofed walls

below grade provide FS and FD boxes. 6. Unless instructed otherwise on drawings, for telephone and data outlets, provide empty flush

mounted wall box with 3/4-inch conduit in wall to accessible ceiling space. 7. See scheduled flush floor boxes on drawings.

E. Location: Install center of box at heights above finished floor unless other directions are indicated in Contract Documents:

1. Wall Switches: 47 Inches 2. Convenience Outlets: 18 Inches 3. Telephone/Data Outlets: 18 Inches 4. Boxes Indicated Above Counters (CT): 6 Inches above backsplash and trim, unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Do not use through-the-wall and back-to-back boxes.

2.10 WIRING DEVICES:

BROADWAY PLAZA




A. Samples: Provide two samples of each type and color of wiring device and respective cover plate utilized in the project. Provide other samples upon specific request for typical NEMA devices. Colors of all exposed devices shall be as herein specified, and shall be submitted for final approval by Architect.

B. Cover Plate and Wiring Device colors:

1. Finished areas: Match existing in adjacent areas. 2. Maintenance and equipment rooms: Grey devices and galvanized steel coverplates.

C. Cover Plates for Telephone and Data Boxes: Blank, brushed stainless steel, unless otherwise noted on plans.

D. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Corrosion resistant finish metal plate, die cast in-use cover, and gasket.

E. Cover Plates for Surface Mounted Outlet Boxes: Zinc coated sheet steel rounded edges, same size as outlet box.

F. Wiring Device Schedule (Based on Leviton Specification Grade) -

1. Standard duplex receptacle - 125V, 20A, NEMA 5-20: #5352. 2. Special receptacles - type and NEMA configuration as indicated on drawings. 3. Ground fault circuit interrupting duplex receptacle - 125V, 20A, NEMA 5-20: #6898. 4. One pole wall toggle switch - 120/277V, 20A: #1221-2. 5. Two pole wall toggle switch - 120/277V, 20A: #1222-2. 6. Three-way wall toggle switch - 120/277V, 20A: #1223-2. 7. Four-way wall toggle switch - 120/277V, 20A: #1224-2. 8. Special switches - As indicated on plans. 9. Acceptable Manufacturers - Eagle, Hubbell, Leviton, Pass and Seymour.

2.11 CONDUITS:

A. Provide a mechanically and electrically complete conduit system.

B. Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel with zinc coated threads and an outer coating of zinc bichromate, complete with one coupling and one end thread protector.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel, complete with one coupling and one end thread protector.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Welded, electro-galvanized thin wall steel tubing.

E. Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel strip core with integral copper ground wire on sizes 1-1/4" and smaller.

F. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit: Hot-dipped galvanized steel strip core with extruded polyvinyl jacket, O-Z Gedney Type UAG.

G. Rigid Nonmetallic Electrical Conduit: Schedule 40 heavy wall polyvinylchloride, high impact resistant.

H. Elbows and Bends:

1. For rigid nonmetallic conduit systems, use rigid metal electrical conduits. 2. For other conduit systems, use same material as the conduit with which they are installed.

BROADWAY PLAZA




3. For all types, size 1-1/4 inch and larger shall be factory manufactured.

I. Bushings:

1. 1-1/4" and Smaller: Same material as the conduit with which they are installed. 2. 1-1/2" and Larger: Hot-dipped galvanized with thermosetting phenolic insulation, 150 Deg.C., O-

Z/Gedney Type "B".

J. Locknuts:

1. 1-1/2" and Smaller: Zinc plated heavy stock steel, O- Z/Gedney. 2. 2" and Larger: Cadmium plated malleable iron, O-Z/Gedney.

K. Hubs: Cadmium plated malleable iron, tapered threads, neoprene "O" ring, insulated throat, O-Z/Gedney.

L. E.M.T. Fittings:

1. Compression Connectors and Couplings: Gland compression type, die cast zinc body, malleable iron nut, insulated throat, O-Z/Gedney, Raco, Red Dot.

2. Set Screw Connectors and Couplings: Die cast zinc body, single set screw for 1/2" - 1" sizes, two set screws for 1 1/4" - 4" sizes, O-Z/Gedney, Raco, Red Dot.

M. Liquidtight Conduit Connectors: Cadmium plated malleable iron body and nut, cadmium plated steel ferrule, insulated throat, integrally cast external ground lug, O-Z/Gedney Type 4QL.

N. Seals for Wall and Floor Penetrations: Malleable iron body, oversize sleeve, sealing ring, pressure clamp and rings and sealing grommet, hex head cap screws, O-Z/Gedney Type FSK.

O. Fire Seals: Heat activated intumescent material, elastomeric sealing ring, socket head cap screws, steel pressure discs and flange, O-Z/Gedney Type CFSF.

P. Expansion Fittings: Hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron with bonding jumpers.

Q. Escutcheons: Chrome plated sectional floor and ceiling plates, Crane No. 10.

R. Accessories: Reducers, bushings, washers, etc., shall be cadmium plated malleable iron on the forms and dimensions best suited for the application.

S. Size conduits as indicated on the drawings and as required by the NEC for the number and sizes of wires to be drawn into conduit. Do not use conduit sized less than 3/4" unless specified otherwise.

T. Conceal conduits from view in all areas except mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, attics and crawl spaces.

1. Should it appear necessary to expose any conduit, bring specific information to the attention of the Architect immediately, and rearrange the work to facilitate an approved installation.

2. Where conduits must be exposed in finished areas, utilize paintable surface mounted vinyl or metal raceways, fittings and boxes equivalent to Wiremold or Hubbell. No exposed circuitry shall be installed in finished spaces without prior approval of Architect.

U. Installation:

BROADWAY PLAZA




1. Install all conduits at elevations and locations to avoid interference with grading of other work, the structure, finished ceilings, walls. Avoid causing cutting of masonry units.

2. Install conduits before concrete is placed, and in advance of masonry work. Run conduits imbedded in structural slabs in the middle of the slab below the top and above the bottom reinforcing steel. Maintain a minimum 1-1/2" cover except where penetration is made. Do not install conduit larger than 1" in slabs.

3. Install conduits through roof in time to be flashed prior to roofing application. 4. Cap or plug conduits with standard manufactured accessories as soon as the conduits have been

permanently installed in place. 5. Where space conditions prohibit the use of standard ells, elbows, and conduits, use cast ferrous

alloy fittings of such forms and dimensions as best required for the application. 6. Make all conduit joints mechanically tight, electrically continuous, and watertight. Pitch conduits in

a manner to avoid creating moisture traps. 7. Connect and couple E.M.T. with compression or set screw type fittings. Do not use indentor

fittings. 8. Install and neatly rack exposed conduits parallel with and perpendicular to the building walls. Do

not install exposed diagonal conduit runs. 9. Do not run conduits exposed on the roof unless approval is obtained prior to installation. 10. Do not place conduits in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines, such as hot

water supply and return lines, which could be detrimental to the conduit and its contents. Maintain a minimum 3" separation, except in crossing, which shall be a minimum 1".

11. Connect motors, equipment containing motors, equipment mounted on an isolated foundation, transformers, and other equipment and devices which are subject to vibration and which require adjustment with flexible metallic conduit from the device to the conduit serving it. Size the flexible conduit length more than 12 diameters, but less that 18 diameters. Rigidly support the points of attachment on each side of the connection. Use external bonding jumpers on sizes 1-1/2" and above.

12. Install escutcheons on all exposed conduits passing through interior floors, walls, or ceilings. Install fire seals on all conduits passing through fire rated partitions. Install wall and floor fire seals on all conduits passing through exterior walls and floors, or use standard galvanized steel pipe sleeves; diameters 1/2" greater than the outside diameter of the sleeved conduit and fill the annular space with mastic.

13. Install rigid metal electrical conduit for feeders and sub-feeders, and for all used in damp and wet locations and in hazardous areas.

14. Install electrical metallic tubing for branch circuits concealed in walls and above ceiling for size 2" and smaller.

15. Install rigid non-metallic conduit with manufactured spacers for feeders and branch circuits run underground exterior to the building, or underground and beneath the building, or where specifically noted. Use rigid metal conduit long radius sweeps for offsets and changes in direction. Use rigid metal conduit for risers and where exposed above slab or grade.

16. Install flexible metal conduit where specified above and where permitted by the authorities having jurisdiction for final connections to lighting fixtures which have isolated junction boxes. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit for exterior applications, in damp and wet locations.

17. Install pull cords in all empty raceway systems, tagged with the identification of service intended and location of opposite end.

2.12 ACCESS DOORS:

A. Furnish, for installation under appropriate Section of the Work, access doors at each point required to provide access to concealed valves, dampers, damper operators, and other devices requiring operation, adjustment, or maintenance.

BROADWAY PLAZA




B. Shall be 16 gage steel, with mounting straps, concealed hangers, and screwdriver locks, designed for the doors to open 180 degrees, minimum.

C. Access doors installed in fire walls or partitions shall be UL labeled to maintain surfaces.

D. Provide prime coat finish for installation in ceilings or painted or unfinished surfaces.

E. Provide polish chrome plate finish for installation in unpainted finished walls.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers - Baldwin, Hannon, Josam, Miami, Carey, Milcor, Titus, Wade, Walsh, Zurn.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT:

A. Protect equipment from physical damage and deterioration after it is delivered to the Project, and during the installation period prior to Owner acceptance. Repair scratches, mars, or paint deterioration.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SPACE:

A. The Drawings indicate specified products physically arranged in the spaces, as cataloged by specific manufacturers, generally as listed in the Equipment Schedule.

B. Coordinate the exact physical space requirements for equipment and servicing of equipment actually purchased for each item of equipment involved.

C. Keep horizontal lines as close to ceiling as practicable.

D. Adhere to Drawings as closely as possible in layout of work.

E. Vary run of conduits and make offset during progress of work as required to meet structural and other interferences.

F. Install conduits in furred spaces wherever possible. Run exposed conduits parallel to or at right angles to buildings walls.

G. Conform to ceiling heights established on architectural construction drawings.

3.3 INTERFERENCES:

A. Relocate or reroute existing conduit, wiring, or equipment as required to facilitate construction of finished work as planned. Restore surfaces, insulation, and finish to match condition of adjacent work.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Assume costs and responsibility for cutting and patching required to complete the installation. Patching shall be finished to match adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect.

BROADWAY PLAZA




3.5 PAINTING AND FINISHING AND CLEANING:

A. Provide touchup painting of prefinished electrical products.

B. Surfaces shall be left clean and debris shall be removed.

C. Clean all light fixture lenses, lamps and reflectors.

3.6 OPTION TO RELOCATE OUTLETS AND RELATED DEVICES:

A. Electrical outlets and light fixtures may be relocated at the Owner's option to points within 10-feet of their indicated locations, at no additional cost to the Owner, provided the Contractor is notified prior to roughing-in and fabrication.

B. Only work which must be reperformed in this connection will be considered extra.

3.7 TESTS AND LOAD BALANCING:

A. Test all circuits to assure them to be free of grounds. Prove and test energy available at the load side of disconnect switches and the final point of connection to driven equipment. Make all reasonable tests as required by the Architect to provide the integrity of the work and leave the complete electrical installation in first class condition and ready for operation.

B. Balance the load on each phase when connecting the various branch circuits in each panel board. When all load is turned on and the system is in operation at 100% demand, the initial unbalance shall not exceed 10%.

C. Furnish at the completion of the job, a final inspection certificate from the local inspecting authority.

3.8 ELECTRICAL DISCONNECTS:

A. Provide disconnects where indicated and where required by the National Electrical Code. Install within sight of electrified equipment served and provide final connection to equipment served.

B. Provide switch sizes as required by the National Electrical Code based on the equipment actually furnished under other Divisions or provided by the Owner.

C. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure indoors, NEMA 3R enclosure exterior, in damp or wet locations and in crawl spaces, flush and surface as specified for outlet boxes.

3.9 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:

A. Provide wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment and control wiring as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.

1. Equipment installed under Other Sections - wiring shall be extended to the equipment, and proper connections made thereto.

2. Flexible connections of short lengths - shall be provided for equipment subject to vibration or movement and for motorized and compressor equipment. Liquid-tight conduit shall be used in wet locations. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across flexible connections.

BROADWAY PLAZA




3.10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING:

A. Provide necessary excavating and backfilling for the installation of work specified in this Division. Trenches for underground conduits shall be excavated to required depths as necessary to insure uniform bearing. Care should be taken not to excavate below depth, and any excavation below depth shall be refilled with sand or gravel firmly compacted. Where rock or hard objects are encountered, they shall be excavated to a grade six inches (6") below the lowermost part of the raceway and refilled to the raceway grade as specified. After the raceway has been installed, tested, and approved, the trenches shall be backfilled to grade with approved material, in 12 inch layers wetted and compacted to density of adjacent soil. Complete backfill to grade to result in a well compacted trench to 95% compaction by the standard Proctor test. Where streets, sidewalks, etc., are disturbed, cut, or damaged by this work, the expense of repairing same in a manner approved by the Architect shall be a part of this work.


BROADWAY PLAZA



POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1200 AMPERES AND LESS 26 16 00 - 1

SECTION 26 16 00 - POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1200 AMPERES AND LESS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide distribution panelboards, branch circuit panelboards, motor control centers, transformers and power factor correction equipment, as scheduled and specified for the electrical distribution system.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Source Quality Control: Tests to meet applicable standards of the following:

1. Underwriters' Laboratories. 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 3. National Electrical Code. 4. American National Standards Institute.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with other Sections. Include layouts showing cabinet dimensions, conduit entrances, electrical ratings, bussing connections, single line diagrams, device locations and ratings, and cable termination provisions.

B. Certificates:

1. Labels of Underwriters' Laboratories affixed to each item of material. 2. Label of Underwriters' Laboratories approval for service entrance use, where applicable, affixed to

material.

C. See section 26 01 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION EQIUPMENT:

A. Branch Circuit Panelboards:

1. Equivalent to Square D Type NQOD and NF, copper bussing. 2. Single phase, 3 wire, and 3 phase, 4 wire, solid neutral design with sequence bussing and full

capacity neutral. 3. Provide scheduled circuit breakers, minimum 10,000 A.I.C. for 208 volt and 14,000 for 480 volt. 4. Provide feed thru lugs where extension of primary feeders is required. 5. Provide cabinets of NEMA type appropriate for application.

B. Circuit Breakers:

BROADWAY PLAZA




1. Resettable, quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic type, ambient compensated, trip free with separate trip position from on and off positions.

2. Multiple pole breakers with common trip and one operating handle. Do not provide handle ties. 3. 15 and 20 ampere, single pole circuit breakers shall be U.L. listed as switching duty rated. 4. Wire with sequence phasing. 5. Provide circuit breakers of appropriate capacity for all unscheduled circuits. 6. For panelboards rated 600 amperes or greater, provide bolt- on type circuit breakers. 7. Provide U.L listed HACR circuit breakers for compressorized equipment loads where the circuit

breaker serves as the final overcurrent protection. 8. Provide arc-fault circuit breakers where scheduled on drawings and where required by the National

Electrical Code. 9. Where indicated on the panel schedule, provide panel mounted power supply to provide 24 volts

DC switching power for remote controlled circuit breakers. 10. Breakers marked "Remote Controlled" on the panel schedules shall be of the latching type. Circuit

breaker contacts shall open when the breaker is in the "OFF" or "TRIPPED" position regardless of the remote signal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Carefully measure and lay out exact locations of equipment in conference with the Construction Manager.

B. Assure that equipment may be installed without adversely affecting the integrity and appearance of the building structure and with the clearances required by the National Electrical Code.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Provide panelboards of the types and ratings scheduled where indicated.

B. Provide flush and surface mounted types where indicated and scheduled.

1. Provide multi-section cabinets as required and scheduled; one-piece covers and doors, main and sub-feed lugs as required.

2. Provide hinged doors with flush tumbler lock and catch, all locks keyed alike. 3. Provide 3 keys for each panelboard.

C. Provide supports to the building structure, independent of raceways.

D. Install tops of panelboard cabinets at 6 feet, 6 inches, above finished floor.

E. Install panelboards in cabinets, centered in door openings.

F. Provide Identification:

1. For Panelboards - Engraved, lamacoid plastic name plate, giving equipment designation. 2. For Distribution and Branch Circuit Panelboards: - Neatly typewritten circuit directory in cardholder

inside panelboard door.

a. For Branch Circuit Panelboards: Identify rooms served using room numbers corresponding to those finally established at the project.

b. For Distribution Panelboards: Identify the equipment served and give circuit designation.

BROADWAY PLAZA




c. For motor starters identify equipment designation as scheduled on the drawings, voltage and phase of service, and the source of power.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Perform manufacturer's recommended field tests prior to energization.

B. Provide copies of test results to the Owner's representative.



BROADWAY PLAZA



MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 26 17 00 - 1

SECTION 26 17 00 - MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide disconnect switches for branch circuit, motor circuits, and all items of equipment in conformance with the National Electric Code.


A. Source Quality Control: Tests to meet applicable Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Standards, the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association and the National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with other Sections. Include enclosure dimensions, type, electrical ratings, fuse provision, installation instructions, and name plate nomenclature.

B. Certificates:

1. Labels of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. affixed to each item of materials.


1.4 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Provide switch sizes as required by the National Electrical Code based on the equipment actually furnished under other Divisions or provided by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. For single phase motors under 1/2 horsepower: Equivalent to Square D Class 2510 Fractional Horsepower single phase two pole manual starter with toggle type switch, locking attachment, neon pilot light, thermal overload elements sized per motor name plate rating and NEMA 1 enclosure indoors, NEMA 4 enclosure exterior, in damp or wet locations and in crawl spaces, flush and surface as specified for outlet boxes.

B. For single and three phase motors, 120, 230, 480 volts, 1/2 to 3 horsepower, requiring manual starters: Equivalent to Square D Class 2510 Integral Horsepower manual starter with toggle type switch, low voltage protection, pilot light, thermal overload elements sized per motor name plate rating with number of poles required for specific application and NEMA 1 enclosure indoors, NEMA 3R enclosure exterior, in damp or wet locations and in crawl spaces, flush and surface as specified for outlet boxes.

BROADWAY PLAZA




C. For Other 250 Volt Equipment: Equivalent to Square D Class 3130 NEMA Type GD Safety Switches, fusible and non-fusible as required by NEC with cover interlocks, with NEMA cabinet required for application, with threaded hubs.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens ITE, Square D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect building structure to which disconnects are to be secured for defects which affect the execution and quality of work.

B. Do not start work until defects are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Carefully measure and lay out exact locations maintaining working clearances required by the National Electrical Code.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide disconnects where indicated and where required by the National Electrical Code.

B. Install within sight of equipment served.

C. Provide final connection to equipment served.

D. Provide name plate secured to cabinet with designation of equipment served, operating voltage, and circuit designation.

3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Provide wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment and control wiring as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.

1. Equipment installed under Other Sections - wiring shall be extended to the equipment, and proper connections made thereto.

2. Flexible connections of short lengths - shall be provided for equipment subject to vibration or movement and for motorized and compressor equipment. Liquid-tight conduit shall be used in wet locations. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across flexible connections.

a. Length of flexible connections for motors shall be at least 11-inches plus 1/4-inch per horsepower up to 100 hp, and need not be longer than 36-inches unless otherwise indicated.

b. Length of flexible connections for transformers shall be at least 11-inches plus 1/4-inch per KVA up to 100 KVA, and need not be longer than 36-inches unless otherwise indicated.

3. Power connections to any vibration isolated equipment shall be made with a length of flexible conduit having a 90 degree bend in it between the junction box on the equipment and any non-flexible conduit.

BROADWAY PLAZA




4. Owner furnished equipment - wiring shall be extended to the equipment, and proper connections made thereto.



BROADWAY PLAZA



LIGHTING 26 50 00-1

SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements are hereby made a part of this section.

B. Provide lighting fixtures, lamps, and accessories for interior and exterior illumination of the building.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturers: Exceptions to manufacturers listed with each item shall be made in accordance with the General Requirements.

B. Laboratory Testing: Photometric testing shall be by Independent Testing Laboratories, Inc., based on Illuminating Engineering Society published procedures, and shall include candlepower distribution tabulation and zonal cavity coefficient of utilization tabulation.

C. Standards: 1. All lighting fixtures shall meet Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., applicable standards. 2. Fixtures shall be provided possessing Underwriters' Laboratories location duty listings as required

by the specific application. a. Exposed Outdoors - Wet Location b. Sheltered Outdoors - Damp location

D. NEC Compliance: Comply with the NEC as applicable to the installation and construction of lighting fixtures.

E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standard Pub. Nos. LE-1 and LE-2 pertaining to lighting equipment.

F. ANSI/UL Compliance: Comply with ANSI/UL Standards pertaining to interior and exterior lighting fixtures for hazardous locations.

G. UL Compliance: Provide light fixtures that have been UL listed and labeled.

H. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts that comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association Standards and carry the CBM label. NECA Compliance: Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation".

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit manufacturer's literature giving materials, finishes, dimensions, coefficients of utilization, and lamp types for each fixture which is the product of one of the listed acceptable manufacturers.

B. Submit samples of fixtures upon specific request.

BROADWAY PLAZA



LIGHTING 26 50 00-2


1.4 CERTIFICATES:

A. Labels of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.; Certified Ballasts Manufacturers, and Electrical Testing Laboratories affixed to each item of material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE FIXTURE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Listed in schedule and with materials.

B. Substitutions: If the Contractor proposes to substitute lighting fixtures for those shown on the drawings or specified herein, he shall submit a list of proposed fixtures together with technical data to substantiate that the substitute fixtures are equivalent in all respects to the specified equipment. Proposed substitute fixtures must be submitted to the architect/engineer for review a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the project bid date. Only original documentation will be accepted for review. Copies sent via facsimile or e-mail will not be accepted. After review of the proposed substitute fixtures, an addendum may be issued to include acceptable equipment. The review of substitute equipment in no way relieves the contractor of the responsibility to provide equipment that is equivalent in all respects to specified fixtures. Lighting fixtures as shown on the drawings or specified herein shall be used as a basis and standard of comparison in the review and consideration of fixtures of other manufacturers. The Architect/Engineer shall have the final authority as to whether the fixture is equivalent to the specified item. The proposed substitution may be rejected for the aesthetic value if felt necessary or desirable. In the event the proposed substitutions are rejected, the Contractor shall furnish the specified item

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Lamps: 1. All fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric Osram/Sylvania, Philips, or

Venture, except where otherwise indicated on drawings. Lamps of other manufacturers may be installed only after written approval is obtained from the Architect/Engineer. Failure to obtain written approval will result in the rejection of all installed lamps, and will require the installation of the lamps specified herein, at no expense to the Owner.

2. Fluorescent (unless otherwise indicated on light fixture schedule): a. T8: Provide F32T8, 32 watt rating lamps that have full rated life when operating on Instant

Start, Rapid Start or Programmed Rapid Start electronic ballasts. Provide lamps with a minimum average rated life of 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start, a minimum color rendering index of 86, minimum initial lumen output of 2950 (for F32T8 lamps) and a correlated color temperature of 3,500 degrees Kelvin, or as noted on the drawings. Provide low mercury lamps that are designed and manufactured to pass the Federal Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) criteria for classification as non-hazardous waste.

b. T5: Provide T5 and T5HO fluorescent lamps with a minimum average rated life of 36,000 hours at 12 hours per start, a minimum color rendering index of 85, minimum initial lumen output of 2,900 (for F28T5 lamps), minimum initial lumen output of 5,000 (for F54T5HO lamps), and a correlated color temperature of 3,500 degrees Kelvin, or as noted on the drawings. Provide low mercury lamps that are designed and manufactured to pass the Federal Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) criteria for classification as non-hazardous waste.

BROADWAY PLAZA



LIGHTING 26 50 00-3

c. Provide 4-pin, T4, triple tube Triple Biax compact fluorescent lamps, wattage as scheduled, with a minimum efficacy of 65 lumens per watt, a minimum average rated life of 12,000 hours, a minimum color rendering index of 82, and a correlated color temperature of 3,500 degrees Kelvin, or as noted on the drawings. Provide low mercury lamps that are designed and manufactured to pass the Federal Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) criteria for classification as non-hazardous waste.

d. Provide 4-pin, T4, quad tube compact fluorescent lamps, wattage as scheduled, with a minimum average rated life of 12,000 hours, a minimum color rendering index of 82, and a correlated color temperature of 3,500 degrees Kelvin, or as noted on the drawings. Provide low mercury lamps that are designed and manufactured to pass the Federal Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) criteria for classification as non-hazardous waste.

e. Provide 4-pin, TT5, long compact fluorescent lamps, wattage as scheduled, that have full rated life when operating on Instant Start or Rapid Start electronic ballasts. Provide lamps with a minimum average rated life of 20,000 hours, a minimum color rendering index of 82, minimum initial lumen output of 3150 (for F40/30 lamps) and a correlated color temperature of 3,500 degrees Kelvin, or as noted on the drawings.

B. Ballasts: 1. Fluorescent fixtures – Provide correct ballast type for application:

a. Indoor applications - Electronic ballast: electronic T-8 ballast, equivalent to GE Instant Start or GE Programmed Rapid Start (if sensors are specified), Advance Discreet Series, minimum power factor of 95 percent, voltage required for application, U.L. Class P, and sound rated "A", designed to withstand line transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE Publication C62.41, Category A, and to meet the requirements of FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 18. Electronic Ballasts shall contain circuitry preventing the third harmonic content from exceeding 25 percent of the input current, and maintain harmonic distortion less than 10 percent.

b. Outdoor applications - provide premium grade, magnetic ballast rated for -20°F ambient starting and operating, minimum power factor of 90 percent, voltage required for application, U.L. Class P, and sound rated "A".

c. Ballasts for fluorescent lamps shall be of the high frequency electronic type, operating lamps at a frequency of 42 kHz or higher with no detectable flicker. Ballasts for fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric or approved equal as in Osram Sylvania, Advance, Universal Lighting Technologies or unless otherwise noted or specified herein. The warranty period for all fluorescent ballasts shall be five years from the date of substantial completion of the project, including all parts and labor. Ballasts shall be specifically designed for the type and quantity of lamps indicated on the drawings, and shall be designed to provide full light output (except for emergency fluorescent power packs). All fluorescent ballasts shall be UL listed and CSA certified. Ballasts shall have an audible noise rating of Class ‘A’, UL55, and RoHS Compliant

d. Ballasts for T2, T4, or T5 lamps shall contain dynamic end of lamp life sensing circuiting to protect against overheated bases and sockets.

e. Universal input voltage (120-277 VAC) ballasts may be provided for T8 instant start, T8 programmed rapid start and T4 compact fluorescent applications. All other ballasts shall have a nominal line voltage of 120 or 277 VAC as indicated on the drawings or as required for proper system operation.

f. Ballasts shall have an input current total harmonic distortion content of less than 10 percent at 120v and less than 14% at 277v (based on the full light output current level). The lamp current crest factor for any ballast shall not exceed 1.4. Ballasts shall have a power factor of 98 percent or greater, shall contain no PCB's and be ROHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) compliant.

g. Ballasts shall comply with all applicable State, Federal and industry performance and safety standards. Ballasts shall comply with FCC requirements governing electromagnetic and radio frequency interference. Ballasts shall comply with IEEE standards for line voltage

BROADWAY PLAZA



LIGHTING 26 50 00-4

transient protection, and shall meet or exceed ANSI and IEEE standards for harmonic distortion. Ballasts shall have internal electronic protection to prevent catastrophic failures.

h. For conventional switched T8 lamp applications according to the fixture schedule, provide instant start ballasts (equivalent to GE UltraMAX to operate lamps in parallel so that if one lamp fails, other lamps will remain operational.

i. For T8 lamp applications according to the fixture schedule and with the use of occupancy sensors, provide programmed rapid start ballasts (equivalent to GE UltraSTART,) to properly heat lamp filaments and minimize glow current during the starting process. Minimum Start time 700 milliseconds.

j. For T5 and T5HO lamp applications, provide programmed rapid start ballasts equivalent to GE UltraSTART, Osram Sylvania Quicktronic Prostart Professional Series.

k. For TT5 lamp applications, provide programmed rapid start ballasts equivalent to GE, Osram Sylvania Quicktronic Prostart Professional Series.

l. For T4 compact fluorescent lamp applications, provide programmed rapid start ballasts equivalent to GE, Osram Sylvania Quicktronic CF – Universal Professional Series (universal voltage 120 – 277 VAC and multi lamp compatibility).

m. Ballasts for Dimming: 1) Linear fluorescent: Provide a fluorescent dimming system consisting of electronic

dimming ballasts (equivalent to Lutron Hi-Lume Series) and controls made by the same manufacturer. Ballasts and controls shall be produced by the same manufacturer who shall have a minimum of ten-(10) years experience with electronic dimming ballasts. Dimming shall be smooth and continuous without flicker down to one percent light output. Ballasts shall be capable of striking lamps at any light level without first flashing to full light. Different lamp lengths of the same type shall dim evenly when controlled by the same dimmer. One- and two-lamp ballasts shall dim evenly when controlled by the same dimmer. Ballasts shall be inaudible in a 27dB room ambient throughout the dimming range. Ballasts must comply with FCC Part 18 regulations and shall not interfere with other properly installed electrical equipment. Ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P and shall meet ANSI C62.41 (IEEE Publication 587, Category A) standards for surge protection.

2) Compact fluorescent: Provide a fluorescent dimming system consisting of electronic dimming ballasts (equivalent to Lutron Compact SE Series) and controls made by the same manufacturer. Ballasts and controls shall be produced by the same manufacturer who shall have a minimum of ten-(10) years experience with electronic dimming ballasts. Dimming shall be smooth and continuous without flicker down to one percent light output. Ballasts shall be capable of striking lamps at any light level without first flashing to full light. Different lamp lengths of the same type shall dim evenly when controlled by the same dimmer. One- and two-lamp ballasts shall dim evenly when controlled by the same dimmer. Ballasts shall be inaudible in a 27dB room ambient throughout the dimming range. Ballasts must comply with FCC Part 18 regulations and shall not interfere with other properly installed electrical equipment. Ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P and shall meet ANSI C62.41 (IEEE Publication 587, Category A) standards for surge protection.

C. Accessories: Manufacturers' standard mounting ring, trim flanges, hanger bars, spacers, supports, plaster frames of nonferrous material or cadmium plated steel. Do not use painted steel plaster frames.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Inspect Architectural drawings and specifications.

BROADWAY PLAZA



LIGHTING 26 50 00-5

B. Inspect Architectural reflected ceiling plans.

C. Inspect installed ceiling components and construction for defects affecting the quality and execution of work.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Utilize Architectural drawings and specifications to determine ceiling material to be installed.

B. Verify ceiling material and alignment.

C. Layout exact locations of fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling plans, fixtures' and switches' outlet boxes and supports.

D. Provide outlet boxes and conduit.

E. Provide fixture trim and hardware appropriate for architecturally selected ceiling materials.

F. Provide appropriate hardware to support outlet boxes from structure. Support light fixtures directly from building structure in accordance with Uniform Building Code Standard 25- 2.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Provide lighting fixtures, lamps, switches, and control systems, and wiring.

B. If designation omitted on drawings, provide same type fixtures employed in rooms of similar usage.

C. Provide spacers for fixtures mounted on low density ceiling material.

D. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures in plaster ceilings.

E. Install fixtures in and on acoustical tile ceilings in alignment with tile joints.

F. Install fixtures in fiber decking and form board so outlet boxes and openings will not be sight exposed.

G. Prepare fixtures and trim required to be painted. Refer to other Section.

H. Note: Outlet boxes locations on drawings are diagrammatic only. Position outlet boxes to coincide with suspension hangers and knockouts.

I. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, submittal data, and details on the drawings.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING:

A. Adjustment: Adjust lamp positions for desired effects. Align fixtures with building walls and tile joints.

B. Cleaning: Remove dirt, grease, and foreign materials from interior and exposed surfaces of all fixtures.

BROADWAY PLAZA



LIGHTING 26 50 00-6

3.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE: Refer to drawings for fixture schedule.



© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 1

SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site. 2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses, and plants. 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 5. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.

2. Section 31 10 01 "Excavation and Trenching." 3. Section 32 84 00 “Landscape Irrigation.” 4. Section 32 92 00 "Turf Grass" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including

preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas. 5. Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit

excavation and planting. 6. The following geotechnical reports are included as an Appendix to the Project Manual.

a. Geotechnical Exploration, Broadway Plaza, dated October 24, 2014 with Supplement dated March 2, 2015.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

C. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 2

D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

G. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

H. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service. c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and

plant-protection zones. d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade. e. Field quality control.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles. 2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 3. Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 2. Warning Tape: 12 inches (300 mm) long; of each color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 3


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth-moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

C. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation-control measures specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" are in place.

D. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

F. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: The Owner will provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Low Volume Change (LVC) Material: Granular material with maximum liquid limit of 40 and plasticity index between 10 and 20. KDOT silty gravel, AB-3, is an acceptable LVC material.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 4

D. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

E. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

F. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 294/D 2940M 0; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

I. Granular Cushion Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448, No. 10; with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve; 85 percent passing No.4 (4.75 mm) sieve, and 20 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve.

J. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

K. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate.

L. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Excavation, Backfill, and Grading shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the observations and recommendations of the Geotechnical Report included at the end of this Project Manual.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth. Geotechnical investigations have indicated rock may be present at depths below the planned foundation elevations. If rock is found at elevations above the foundations, do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect.

1. Existing pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated shall be removed as specified in Section 02 41 19 “Selective Demolition.”

a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast

against grade. d. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches and the greater of 24 inches (600

mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 6

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Comply with requirements of Section 32 20 01 “Excavation and Trenching” for utility trenches. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

C. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3.7 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 7

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Cohesive fill materials shall be placed in loose lifts not to exceed 9 inches (225 mm).

C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 8

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use structural fill. 4. Under building slabs, use structural fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use structural fill.

D. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.13 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 9 inches (225 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.

3.14 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances:


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 9

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Sidewalks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.15 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Section 33 46 00 "Subdrainage."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- (150-mm-) thick compacted layers to final subgrade.

3.16 SUBBASE COURSE UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers

of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

3. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Tolerances: Top surface of finish subgrade under slabs-on-grade shall be plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) from required elevations.

3.17 BASE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 10

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

3. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Place granular fill in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches.

1. Compact granular cushion fill using heavy vibrating equipment, in 3 passes, to achieve a total compacted thickness of 4 inches (100 mm) in presence of Owner’s representative or testing agency.

2. Compact each layer of granular cushion course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

D. Tolerances: Top surface of finish subgrade under slabs-on-grade shall be plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) from required elevations.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material classification and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements.

3. Determine, during placement and compaction, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2937, and ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab but in no case fewer than three tests.


© WSS 2015 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 11

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.19 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



BROADWAY PLAZA 14088 MAY 18, 2015

EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING 31 20 01 - 1

SECTION 31 20 01 - EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING

1.1 SCOPE A. This section covers excavation and trenching work and shall include the necessary

clearing, grubbing, and preparing of the site; removal and disposal of all debris; excavation and trenching as required; the handling, storage, transportation and disposal of all excavated material; all necessary sheeting, shoring, and protection work; preparation of sub-grades; pumping and dewatering as necessary or required; protection of adjacent property; backfilling; pipe embedment; surfacing and grading; and other pertinent work.

B. Attention is directed to the additional requirements set forth in the Supplemental

Specifications.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Excavation work shall be performed in a safe and proper manner with suitable

precautions being taken against all hazards. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be performed therein. Shoring will be required in accordance with current OSHA requirements. At no time will the contractor perform any excavation work that does not adhere to OSHA requirements.

B. Sub-grade surfaces shall be clean and free of loose material of any kind when concrete is

placed thereon. C. Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shall not be

done except by permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials, snow, or ice be placed in any backfill, fill, or embankment.

1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. No classification of excavated materials will be made. Excavation and trenching work

shall include the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or other-wise removed in performance of the contract work, regardless of the type, character, composition, or condition thereof.

B. Rocks greater than 6 inches in any dimension will not be permitted in backfill placed

between 1 foot above the top of any pipe and 1 foot below the top of the finished surface. When the trench is wider than 3 feet, rocks not exceeding 12 inches in greatest dimensions, which originate from the trench, will be permitted in the backfill from 1 foot above the top of any pipe to 5 feet below the finished surface. Rocks greater than 2½ inches in any dimension will not be permitted in backfill within 1 foot of pavement sub-grade.

Subject to the provisions specified herein, the material obtained from project excavations may be used as backfill provided that all organic material, rubbish, debris, and other objectionable materials are first removed. However, broken Portland cement concrete

and bituminous-type pavement obtained from the project will not be permitted in the backfill.



C. All unauthorized excavation shall be replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor in a manner and condition acceptable to the Engineer. In no case shall unconsolidated material be placed in any portion of the trench.

1.4 REMOVAL OF WATER A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove

and dispose of all surface and ground water entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work. Each excavation shall be kept dry during sub-grade preparation and continually thereafter until the pipe to be installed, therein is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result.

B. All excavations for concrete blocking or trenches which extend down to or below static

ground water elevations shall be de-watered by lowering and maintaining the ground water surface beneath such excavations a distance of not less than 12 inches below the bottom of the excavation.

C. Surface water shall be diverted or otherwise prevented from entering excavated areas or

trenches to the greatest extent practicable without causing damage to the adjacent property.

D. The Contractor will be held responsible for the condition of any pipe or conduit, which he

may use for drainage purposes, and all such pipes or conduits shall be left clean and free of sediment.

1.5 STABILIZATION A. Sub-grades for concrete blocking and trench bottoms shall be firm, free from mud and

muck, and sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact under the feet of the workers. B. Sub-grades for blocking or trench bottoms which are otherwise solid, but which become

mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with one or more layers of crushed stone or gravel. Not more than ½ inch depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms when the pipe bedding material is placed thereon.

C. All stabilization work shall be performed by and at the expense of the Contractor.

1.6 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Shall be a coarse sand/gravel with maximum particle size of ½ inch including variously

graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and non-cohesive, either wet or dry. {Designated UD-1 by KDOT Standard Specifications (2007)}.

B. If soft, spongy, unstable, or other similar material is encountered upon which the bedding

material or pipe is to be placed, this unsuitable material shall be removed to a depth ordered by the Engineer and replaced with mealy soil or additional bedding material suitably densified.



C. Bedding material shall first be placed on a firm and unyielding sub-grade so that the pipe is supported for the full length of the barrel. There shall be a minimum of 4 inches of bedding below the pipe barrel and 1 inch minimum clearance below a project bell. There shall be a minimum of 6 inches bedding along the sides of the barrel up to the spring-line of the pipe. The contractor may use select mealy soil or bedding material in the initial backfill. No payment will be made for additional bedding if the contractor elects to use bedding material in the initial backfill section.

1.7 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. The Contractor shall not open more trenches in advance of pipe lying than is necessary

to expedite the work. B. Trench excavation shall be by open cuts unless boring is specified on the plans. If rock is

encountered, the trench shall be over-excavated at least 4 inches. Care shall be taken to avoid over-excavation, except as required to remove unacceptable material. Over-excavating shall be corrected by means of the bedding material as noted above. Compaction shall be in accordance with bedding compaction.

C. The maximum length of open trench shall be 400 feet unless otherwise approved by the

Engineer. At the end of each working day, only a minimal length of trench shall be left open. Barricades or warning tape shall be placed around all open trenches at the end of each working day.

1.6 ALIGNMENT, GRADE AND MINIMUM COVER A. The alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline shall be fixed and determined by

means of stakes. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes and the maximum deflection used in connection therewith and shall be in conformity with requirements of the section covering installation of pipe.

B. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the contract drawings,

trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of the pipe of 48 inches.

C. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves or to provide necessary

clearance beneath existing pipes, conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades, or to provide specified cover after future street grading cuts. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of pipe to original ground or pavement surface elevation.

1.7 LIMITING TRENCH WIDTHS A. The width of the trench at the top of the pipe shall not be less than 12 inches nor more

than 24 inches wider than the pipe. Trenches shall be excavated to a width, which will provide adequate working space and pipe clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and embedment. However, the limiting trench widths below an elevation 12 inches above the top of the installed pipe and minimum permissible clearances between the installed pipe and each trench wall shall be as shown on the Plan Details.



B. Stipulated minimum clearances are not minimum average clearances, but are minimum clear distances, which will be required.

C. Where necessary to reduce earth load on trench banks to prevent sliding and caving,

banks may be cut back on a 3:1 slope, which shall not extend lower than 1 foot above the top of the pipe.

1.8 UNAUTHORIZED TRENCH WIDTHS. Where, for any reason, the width of the lower portion of

the trench as excavated at any point exceeds the maximum permitted, either special pipe embedment or arch concrete encasement, as required by loading conditions and as determined by the Engineer, shall be furnished and installed at the expense of the Contractor.

1.9 MECHANICAL EXCAVATION A. When in the opinion of the Engineer, the use of mechanical equipment would cause

damage to trees, buildings, culverts, or other existing property, utilities, or structures above or below ground, such usage will not be permitted. In all such locations, hand-excavating methods shall be used.

B. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a type, design, and

construction, and shall be so operated that the rough trench excavation bottom elevation can be controlled, that uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an elevation 1 foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench, and the pipe will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between the pipe and sidewalls of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance will not be permitted.

C. All mechanical trenching equipment, its operating condition, and the manner of its

operation shall be subject at all times to the approval of the Engineer.

1.10 CUTTING CONCRETE AND ASPHALT SURFACES A. Concrete and asphalt pavement over trenches excavated for pipelines shall be removed

so that a shoulder not less than 12 inches in width at any point is left between the cut edge of the pavement and the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be greater than at the top and no undercutting will be permitted. Pavement cuts shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines, which unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the centerline of the trench.

B. Cutting shall be started with a concrete saw in a manner that will provide a clean groove

at least 1½ inches deep along each side of the trench. C. Where the trench parallels the length of concrete walks and the trench location is all or

artially under the walk, the entire walk shall be removed and replaced. Where the trench crosses drives, walks, curbs or other surface construction, the surface construction shall be removed and replaced between existing joints or between saw cuts as specified for pavement.

D. Payment for asphalt or concrete replacement shall be subsidiary to other construction,

unless specifically shown in the project quantities.



1.11 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. The trench shall be backfilled in three zones: Bedding, Lower Backfill and Upper

Backfill: 1. Bedding: Bedding shall be as shown in bedding section above and shall be

placed prior to laying the pipe. 2. Lower Backfill: After laying the pipe, backfill to the spring line shall be with

bedding material and shall be compacted as per Engineer's requirements. Backfill to a level of 1 foot above the pipe may be either bedding material or damp mealy soil from excavation. Use little or no tamping of the initial backfill directly over the top of the pipe.

3. Upper Backfill under Roadway: Backfill material shall be moist, mealy soil as approved by the Engineer. Material shall be placed in layers as shown in the Section 1.12 B1, B2 & B3, or less and thoroughly compacted to a density of 90% or greater. In lieu of this method, the Contractor with the City's approval may use flowable concrete backfill. If used, the mix design must have a compressive strength of 75-175 psi, and the Engineer must approve the mix design. The backfill procedure shall continue to an elevation of 6 inches below the road surface. The pavement repair shall be as per asphalt section or concrete section of the specifications. The backfill shall include no rocks greater than that specified in Section 1.02 (B).

4. Entire upper portion of trenches at all other locations: Backfill material shall be compacted to a density of the adjacent undisturbed soil. Mechanical compaction shall be required to obtain this density.

B. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted by means of tamping rollers, sheep’s-foot

rollers, pneumatic tire roller, vibrating rollers or other mechanical tampers. All such equipment shall be of a size and type approved by the Engineer. Impact-type breakers (stompers) will not be permitted over clay, plastic, cast iron, or non-reinforced concrete pipe. Permission to use specific compaction equipment shall be construed as guaranteeing or implying that the use of such equipment will not result in damage to adjacent ground, existing improvements or improvements installed under the contract. The Contractor shall make its own determination in this regard. Material for mechanically compacted backfill shall be placed in lifts, which prior to compaction shall not exceed the thickness specified below for the various types of equipment.

1. Vibratory equipment, including vibratory plates, vibratory smooth-wheel rollers

and vibratory pneumatic-tire rollers - maximum lift thickness of 2 feet. 2. Rolling equipment, including sheep’s foot (both vibratory and non-vibratory), grid,

smooth-wheel (non-vibratory), pneumatic-tire (non-vibratory), and segmented wheels - maximum lift thickness of 1 foot.

3. Hand-directed mechanical tampers - maximum lift thickness of 4”. C. Mechanically compacted backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers of thickness, {not

exceeding those specified in Sect. 1.12 (B1-B3)}, compatible to the material being placed and the type of equipment being used. Each layer shall be evenly spread, moistened (or dried, if necessary), and then tamped or rolled until the specified relative compaction has been attained.

1.12 DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE. Trenches across roadways, driveways, walks or other traffic-ways

adjacent to drainage ditches or watercourses shall not be backfilled prior to completion of backfilling the trench on the upstream side. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. All material deposited in roadway ditches or other watercourses crossed by the line of trench shall be removed immediately after backfilling is



completed and the original section, grades, contours of ditches or watercourses shall be restored. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary.

1.13 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Excess earth from excavations shall be disposed of at a site provided by the Contractor

and approved of by the Engineer. Except as otherwise provided, no waste of excess excavation will be permitted on the construction site.

B. Broken concrete and other debris resulting from pavement or sidewalk removal,

excavated rock in excess of the amount permitted to be and actually installed in trench backfill, junk and debris encountered in excavation work, and other similar waste materials shall be disposed of away from the site of the work.

1.14 BACKFILL SETTLEMENT A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all settlement of backfill, which may occur within

one (1) year after final completion of the contract under which the backfilling work was performed.

B. The Contractor shall make, or cause to be made, all necessary backfill replacements and

repairs or replacements appurtenant thereto, within 30 days after notice by the Engineer or Owner.

1.15 BORING. Any boring shall be accomplished by a dry method. The use of jetting will not be

permitted. If excess voids are produced, the Contractor shall take prompt remedial action to correct. If for any reason, a borehole is abandoned, the Contractor shall immediately fill with pressure grouting all voids. See section on Boring and Encasement for more details.


© WSS 2015 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 1

SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Results:

1. Concrete sidewalks for access to Restroom Building.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and

contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.





B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates.

C. Material Test Reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.



1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete paving mixtures.


A. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

B. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet (30.5 m) or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.



B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.

D. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.


A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type I/II. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M, uniformly graded and as indicated on the Drawings. Provide aggregates from a single source.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.




a. Dayton Superior. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork in preformed strips.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). 2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2

inch (13 mm) according to requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded-wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.



1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

D. Contraction (Control) Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated on the Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, and consolidating concrete.

E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

F. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

G. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.



H. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

I. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish for Sidewalks: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300



mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch

(13 mm). 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per

12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel. 7. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 8. Contraction (Control) Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 9. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

E. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

F. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.11 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.




© WSS 2015 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 13 73 - 1

SECTION 32 13 73 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied joint sealants. 2. Joint-sealant backer materials. 3. Primers.


1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing nontraffic and traffic joints in locations not specified in this Section.





B. Paving-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.




A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type NS.


a. Crafco Inc; RoadSaver Silicone. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.

B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type SL.


a. Crafco Inc; RoadSaver Silicone SL. b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 890-SL Silicone Joint Sealant. c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL.



2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. Joint-Sealant Backer Materials: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold- Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Before installing joint sealants, clean out joints immediately to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions.



C. Install joint-sealant backings to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install joint sealants immediately following backing installation, using proven techniques that comply with the following:

1. Place joint sealants so they fully contact joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:

1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess joint sealant as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturers.

B. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.



© WSS 2015 OUTDOOR SYNTHETIC SURFACING 32 18 24 - 1

SECTION 32 18 24 - OUTDOOR SYNTHETIC SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work included in this Section includes the design, procurement, and installation of a synthetic grass surface.


1. Section 06 10 00 “Rough Carpentry” for edge nailing strips. 2. Section 33 46 00 “Subdrainage” for drainage system trenching and installation.





B. Shop Drawings: For synthetic grass surfacing.

1. Include sections and details. 2. Show locations of seams and method of seaming. 3. Show layout of game lines, numbers, and letters. Indicate application method of each line

and marking. 4. Show location and layout of team logo/graphics.

C. Samples: For each type of synthetic grass surfacing indicated.

1. Turf Fabric: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 2. Infill Material: 4 oz. (100 g) of each type. 3. Shock-Attenuation Pad: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 4. Seam Sample: 24 inches (600 mm) square with seam centered in sample.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each synthetic grass surfacing assembly.

C. Field quality-control reports.



D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For synthetic grass surfacing, including maintenance cleaning instructions, to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Turf Fabric: Minimum of 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) for each type indicated. 2. Infill: Minimum of two bags of each type. 3. Seaming Tape and Adhesive: One roll of seaming tape and one gallon of adhesive. 4. One new set of maintenance tools, of type recommended by synthetic grass surfacing

manufacturer for installation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver surfacing material if either ambient air temperature or material temperature is below 32 degrees F.

1. Do not proceed with installation until weather conditions are satisfactory according to manufacturer’s recommendations.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and is experienced in manufacturing synthetic surfacing materials similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Assume responsibility for engineering synthetic playing surface components to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Provide sufficient production capacity to produce required materials without delaying the Work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who, in the past 3 years, has installed at least 10 synthetic playing field systems similar to that required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace synthetic grass surfacing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration and excessive wear.



b. Deterioration from UV light. c. Excessive loss of shock attenuation. d. Seam separation, including game lines and markings.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Turf Fabric: Turf fabric tested according to the following methods, with additional test method conditions for each method according to ASTM F 1551.

1. Tuft Bind: Not less than 8 lbf (36 N) according to ASTM D 1335. 2. Breaking Strength: Minimum 200 lbf (890 N) in warp direction and minimum 200 lbf

(890 N) perpendicular to warp direction, according to ASTM D 5034.

B. Synthetic Grass Surfacing: Assembly tested according to the following methods, with additional test method conditions for each method according to ASTM F 1551.

1. Relative abrasiveness: Abrasive index of 20.2, when tested in accordance with ASTM F 1015.

2. Shock Absorbency: Less than 180 average GMAX when tested in accordance with ASTM F 1936 and ASTM F 355.

3. Flammability: Passes when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2859. 4. Permeability: Drain up to 10 inches of rainwater over a 24-hour period. 5. Final Grade: One-quarter inch in length of 25 feet of finish grade in any direction.

2.2 SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING

A. Synthetic Grass Surfacing: Complete surfacing system, consisting of synthetic yarns bound to water-permeable backing and infill indicated, suitable for multipurpose surface.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Forever Lawn, “Playground Grass Ultra” or comparable product by one of the following:

a. FieldTurf, a Tarkett Sports Company. b. Shaw Sports Turf Division of Berkshire Hathaway. c. Sporturf International Division of Controlled Products, LLC.

B. Turf Fabric: Tufted turf fabric with colored fiber and UV resistance, complying with the following:

1. Yarn Fiber: Slit-film polyethylene. 2. Yarn Color: Olive green. 3. Lead Content of Yarn Fiber: Maximum of 100 ppm according to ASTM F 2765. 4. Pile Weight: 48 oz./sq. yd. (1627 g/sq. m) according to ASTM D 5848. 5. Blade Height: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) according to ASTM D 5823.

C. Backing: Manufacturer's standard woven or nonwoven polypropylene primary backing with urethane-coated secondary backing; provide perforations or drainage channels sufficient to meet permeability indicated.



D. Infill: Manufacturer's standard rubber infill.

E. Seaming Method: Mechanical bonding.

F. Applied Treatments: Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

1. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Rubber Infill: Ground latex-coated SBR crumb rubber mesh free of metal, nonmetal fibers, and contaminants; mesh size as recommended by synthetic grass surfacing manufacturer.

B. Seam Adhesive: One- or two-part urethane, recommended or approved by synthetic grass surfacing manufacturer, and suitable for ambient conditions at time of installation.

C. Seaming Cord: Seaming cord or thread, recommended by the synthetic grass surfacing manufacturer.

D. Closed Cell Foam Pad: Porous composite or polyethylene pad,consisting of rubber granules bound with urethane adhesive, 1 inch (25 mm) thick; nondimpled. Provide shock-attenuation pad with permeability sufficient to meet synthetic grass surfacing assembly permeability indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where playing surface will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of installed playing surface.

1. Verify that substrates for surfacing are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, and waxy films. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, and similar items located under playing

surface has been completed before installing drainage tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in substrates will not adversely affect installed playing

surface. 4. Verify ambient temperatures are in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations for

installation.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EARTHWORK EXECUTION

A. General: Remove material of every nature or description encountered in obtaining required lines and grades. Excavate and/or place and compact fill to provide for elevation(s) required by Drawings. Excavation is all considered unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.



B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under synthetic grass areas, use satisfactory soil material.

D. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

E. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

1. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

2. Under synthetic turf, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

F. Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances. 3. Conform to elevations and grades shown within a tolerance of plus or minus one-half inch

in 25 feet either direction.

G. Drainage System Trenching: As specified in Civil Specifications.

3.3 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER SYNTHETIC SURFACING

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Shape subbase course and base course to required cross-slope grades. 3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required

grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.4 FIELD DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A. Drainage System Trenching and Installation: As specified in Civil Specifications.

3.5 SYNTHETIC TURF INSTALLATION

A. Over base layer, install closed cell foam pad and synthetic turf in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Seams shall be sewn with thread especially made for the carpet materials, or glued, bonded or welded according to manufacturer’s written instructions.



B. Vibrate blended infill materials into turf at a rate and depth recommended by the manufacturer.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Testing agency shall inspect and test the following:

1. Subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. 2. Compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922,

and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. 3. Surface performance requirements. 4. Surface impact and shock absorbency according to ASTM F 1936 and ASTM F 355

C. Proceed with subsequent work only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.7 WARRANTY MAINTENANCE

A. As a condition of the warranty, Contractor shall review the condition of the playing surface on a yearly basis to evaluate owner’s maintenance protocols.

B. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections throughout the duration of the warranty, and to prepare test reports, to ensure satisfactory performance.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: Upon completion of installation, clean all playing surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensure playing surface is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.



© WSS 2015 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 31 19 - 1

SECTION 32 31 19 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Decorative metallic-coated-steel tubular picket fences. 2. Swing gates.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete post concrete fill.





B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.

1. Provide Samples 12 inches (300 mm) in length for linear materials.


A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Product Test Reports: For decorative metallic-coated-steel tubular picket fences, including finish, indicating compliance with referenced standard and other specified requirements.


A. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Include 10-foot (3-m) length of fence complying with requirements. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DECORATIVE METALLIC-COATED-STEEL TUBULAR PICKET FENCES

A. Decorative Metallic-Coated-Steel Tubular Picket Fences: Comply with ASTM F 2408 for commercial application class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., “Montage Plus; Majestic Style” or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Iron Eagle Industries, Inc. b. Master Halco.

B. Posts:

1. End and Corner Posts (Fence height up to 72 inches (1830 mm): Square tubes 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm) formed from 0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

2. Posts at Swing Gate Openings (Gate Leaf Height up to 72 inches (1830 mm) and Width up to 60 inches (1525 mm): Square tubes 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm) formed from 0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. Post Caps: Formed from steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after forming.

D. Rails: Double-wall channels.

1. Size: 1.50 by 1.4375 inches (38 by 36.5 mm). 2. Metal and Thickness: 0.075-inch (1.90-mm) nominal-thickness, uncoated steel sheet,

hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Pickets: Square tubes.

1. Terminate tops of pickets at top rail for flush top appearance. 2. Size: 0.75 by 0.75 inches (19 by 19 mm) formed from 0.050-inch (1.3-mm) nominal-

thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 3. Picket Spacing: 4.675 inches (118.7 mm) on center, maximum.

F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard tamperproof, corrosion-resistant, color-coated fasteners matching fence components with resilient polymer washers.



G. Galvanizing: For components indicated to be galvanized and for which galvanized coating is not specified in ASTM F 2408, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

H. Finish: Powder coating.

2.2 SWING GATES

A. Gate Configuration: Double leaf.

B. Gate Frame Height: As indicated.

C. Gate Opening Width: As indicated.

D. Galvanized-Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubes 1-3/4 by 1-3/4 inches (45 by 45 mm) formed from 0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.

F. Picket Size, Configuration, and Spacing: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.

G. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet (1.52 m) wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate.

H. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use; one direction swing with opening capability up to 180 degrees.

1. Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing. 2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron; galvanized.

I. Cane Bolts: Provide for inactive leaf of pairs of gates. Fabricated from 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, round steel bars, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Finish to match gates. Provide galvanized-steel pipe strikes to receive cane bolts in both open and closed positions.

J. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.

K. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

L. Metallic-Coated-Steel Finish: Powder coating.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.



C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 50 (Grade 340), with G60 (Z180) coating.

D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron unless otherwise indicated.

1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), 3-inch (75-mm) slump, and 1-inch (25-mm) maximum aggregate size or dry, packaged, normal-weight concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387/C 387M mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.

2.5 METALLIC-COATED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Galvanized Finish: Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply two-coat finish consisting of epoxy prime coat and acrylic topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions to achieve a minimum total dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).

1. Color and Gloss: Matte Black. 2. Comply with surface finish testing requirements in ASTM F 2408 except change

corrosion-resistance requirement to 3000 hours without failure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet (152.5 m) or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

1. Construction layout and field engineering are specified in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

3.3 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails to posts. Peen threads of bolts after assembly to prevent removal.

C. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 24 inches (600 mm) plus 3 inches (75 mm) for each foot (300 mm) or fraction of a foot (300 mm) that fence height exceeds 4 feet (1.2 m).

D. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.

2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.

a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches (51 mm) above grade. Finish and slope top surface to drain water away from post.

3. Space posts uniformly at 8 feet (2.44 m) o.c.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.



3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates.


BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400- 1

SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Design and install an underground sprinkler system as shown and specified. The work includes:

1. Design and installation of an automatic sprinkler system 2. Piping and fittings 3. Sprinklers 4. Quick couplers 5. Valves and fittings 6. Controller and controller wire 7. Electrical connections 8. Accessories 9. Testing of the system 10. Excavating and backfilling irrigation system work


A. Comply with General and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Installer Qualifications

1. Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrated ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specified type(s) in a neat, orderly, and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship.

2. To demonstrate ability and experience necessary for this Project, and financial stability, submit requested by Owner’s Representative, prior to contract award the following: a. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this

Project. Description of projects shall include name of project, location, owner, brief description of work and project budget.

b. Current company financial statement.

C. Materials, equipment and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes and standards

1. National Fire Protection Association. (NFPA) 2. National Electrical Code. 3. American Society for Testing Materials. (ASTM). 4. National Sanitation Foundation. (NSF). 5. The Irrigation Association. (IA). 6. Local City and State Codes 7. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) - UL Wires and Cables 8. Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section.

D. Special Requirements

1. Tolerances - Specified depths of pressure supply lines and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment.

2. Coordination With Other Contracts - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Sections.

3. Damage to Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner.

4. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of backflow preventers, copper service and related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumbers

BROADWAY PLAZA



E. Obtain Owners representatives acceptance of installed and tested irrigation system prior to installing backfill materials.

1.3 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee work in this section for one year following the date of written Final Acceptance by the Landscape Architect or Owner.

1. The entire irrigation system shall be guaranteed by Contractor as to material and workmanship, including settlement in pipes, valves, and sprinklers, sod or paving, and make all adjustments without extra cost to the Owner including the complete restoration of all damaged planting, paving or other improvements for a period of one year following the date of final acceptance.

2. Should any operational difficulties in connection with the sprinkler system develop within the specified guarantee period, which, in the opinion of the Owner, may be due to inferior material and/or workmanship, immediately correct to the satisfaction of the Owner, at no additional cost, including any other damage caused by such defects.

3. The irrigation contractor shall be responsible for blowing out the system by air compression the first fall following installation and turning on the system in the following spring.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions to the Owner’s Representative for each of the system components.

B. Shop Drawings. Prior to any construction, submit complete irrigation layout in the form of shop drawings and details for Owner’s Representative’s review and acceptance of the following.

1. Complete layout plan including: a. Piping locations and sizes b. Size and locations of underground sleeves for lines and wires passing

underneath pavement c. Irrigation sprinkler locations and types of sprinklers to be used d. Locations of valve, valve boxes, quick couplers e. Planting bed lines f. Paved surfaces including buildings, pavement, and walks g. Controller locations

2. Installation details for: a. Irrigation heads b. Piping connections c. Pumps (if required) d. Controllers and hookup materials e. Valves, quick couplers, and valve access boxes

3. Calculations a. Provide hydraulic calculations showing available pressure at the last sprinkler on

the worst case lateral b. Calculations should show available pressure, pressure loss in mainline, valves,

and lateral piping

C. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance:

1. 2 Sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and adjusting each type of sprinkler head and valve supplied on this Project.

2. One 6 foot valve keys for operation of gate valves or stop and waste valves (if applicable).

3. 2 keys for each automatic controller.

BROADWAY PLAZA



4. 1 quick coupler key per 20 quick coupling valves and w matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed.

5. One aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves.

D. Winterization

1. Include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner.

2. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Owner’s Representative.

3. Reopen, and adjust system malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within 3 days of notification by Owner.

E. Provide irrigation system record drawings

1. Legibly mark drawings to record actual construction. 2. Indicate irrigation system elements required in shop drawings. Reference dimensions to

permanent surface improvements. 3. Identify field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by Change Orders.

F. Controller charts

1. Do not prepare charts until record (as-built) drawings have been approved by Owner’s Representative.

2. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 3. Chart may be same size reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting inside

controller door without folding drawing. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility.

4. Chart shall be hardline print of actual “as-built” system, showing area covered by that controller.

5. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color for each zone. Highlight heads, lateral piping, and control valves

6. Following review of charts by Owner’s Representative, hermetically seal each chart between two layers of 20mm thick clear plastic.

7. Charts shall be completed and approved by Owner’s Representative prior to final completion walk-through of irrigation system.

8. Attach approved chart to inside of each controller door.

G. Operation manual

1. Submit an electronic copy of operations manual in PDF format to Owner’s Representative for approval prior to scheduling final completion walk-through. Manual to include the following:

a. Index sheet stating project name, and listing company, address, phone number and contact person of Owner, Owner’s Representative and Contractor, including primary Sub-Contractors.

b. Manufacturer cut sheets for all heads, control valves, quick coupling valves, gate valves, controllers, drip irrigation components, and valve boxes.

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General Guidelines

1. Divide areas into separate zones in which GPM requirements and PSI availability are not violated to insure a uniform precipitation rate.

2. The system should take into account: a. Specific microclimates. b. Exposures. c. Plant material requirements

BROADWAY PLAZA



B. Water conserving practices and equipment is encouraged including:

1. Low gallonage, and anti-fog heads. 2. Wiper seals or check valves within heads to reduce line drainage on steep slopes.

C. Layout

1. The irrigation system is to be designed to provide 100% head to head coverage for all areas.

2. Irrigation equipment and water throw shall be limited to the areas shown on the plan. 3. Make minor adjustments in system layout to clear existing fixed obstructions and to

provide complete coverage of sprinkled areas. 4. The sprinkler system shall provide a uniform water precipitation rate and in no case shall

exceed 60% of the sprinkler coverage diameter between sprinklers. 5. Over-spraying of sidewalks shall not be permitted.

D. Connection to Water Source 1. Refer to Plumbing Drawings.

E. Water Pressure and Flow 1. Contractor shall verify available dynamic water pressure flow. 2. Contractor shall provide measures to increase or decrease water pressure for proposed

irrigation system if required.

F. Piping

1. Provide sleeving for future mainline that will serve street trees and planters along 6th

Street. 2. Provide sleeves for all irrigation lines and control wires passing beneath paved areas or

through walls. 3. Sizing requirements

a. Velocities do not exceed 5 feet per second b. There is no more than a 10% pressure differential between the first head and the

last head on a zone.

G. Sprinklers 1. Lay out the heads to provide the adequate overlap to overcome a minimum ten-mile per

hour design wind.

H. Valves and Fittings 1. Provide quick couplers in the main line in non-irrigated areas so as not to be more than

200’ from another quick coupler, or from a building sillcock or hose bib.


A. Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturer’s original undamaged and unopened containers with labels intact and legible.

B. Plastic pipe 1. Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends,

both threaded and plain. 2. Exercise care in handling, loading and storing of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be

transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads.

3. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be removed and replaced with new piping.

C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration.

BROADWAY PLAZA



D. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinklers, and similar components that can not be immediately replaced, to prevent installation delays.


A. Existing Utilities 1. Contractor is responsible for not interfering with current utility services. Contact local

utility companies for location services as required. 2. Contractor shall assume all associated costs involved with any disruption in service

including, but not limited to its repair.

B. Coordinate the irrigation system layout and installation with work performed by other contractors to avoid interference and to provide complete coverage of sprinkled areas.

C. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by irrigation system work operations to original condition. Repairs will be made at Contractor’s expense.

D. Promptly notify the Owner’s representative of unexpected sub-surface conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General 1. Provide only new materials, without flaws or defects and of highest quality of their

specified class and kind.

B. Plastic Pipe and Fittings

1. Provide pipe continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer’s name or trademark, size, schedule and type of pipe, working pressure at 73 degrees F, and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approval.

2. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) - Class 200 BE (1” - 21/2”) and Class 160 PVC gasketed end (3” & larger).

3. Non-Pressure Lines - Class 200 BE. 4. Drip Tubing – Rainbird Drip System XFD 5. Emitter Tubing - By emitter manufacturer. 6. All pipe to be identified with following indelible markings

a. Manufacturer’s name.

b. Nominal pipe size.

c. Schedule of class.

d. Pressure rating

e. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal of approval.

f. Date of extrusion.

C. Solvent Weld Pipe

1. Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 12454-B, Type 1, Grade 1.

2. Fittings a. Standard weight, Schedule 40, injection molded PVC; complying with ASTM

D1784 and D2466, cell classification 12454-B. b. Threads - Injection molded type (where required). c. Tees and ells - Side gated.

3. Threaded nipples - ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads 4. Joint Cement and Primer - Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings.

D. Gasketed End Pipe

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 1254B, Type 1, Grade 1.

2. Fittings - Epoxy coated steel or ductile iron with push-on joints or mechanical joint. 3. Gaskets - Factory installed in pipe and fittings, having a metal or plastic support within

gasket or a plastic retainer ring for gasket. 4. Lubricant - As recommended by manufacturer of pipe fittings

E. Low Pressure/Volume Systems:

1. Drip Tubing - Manufactured of flexible vinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 4, P14 and ASTM D3350 for PE 1221110.

2. Fittings - As recommended by tubing manufacturer 3. Drip Valve Assembly - As recommended by tubing manufacturer.

a. Wye Strainer - Plastic construction with 150 mesh nylon screen and 1/2” blow out assembly, manufactured by Agricultural Products, Inc.

b. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non-corrosive material; diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained (mounted) without attachment to diaphragm. 700 series manufactured by Hardie.

c. Pressure Reducing Valve - Plastic construction with manual adjusting nut.

F. Copper Pipe and Fittings

1. Copper pipe - Type ‘K’ hard tempered. 2. Fittings - Wrought copper, solder joint type. 3. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and

solids at 1125º F and liquids at 1145º F.

G. Brass Pipe and Fittings

1. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, AMSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe

2. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125 pound class.

H. Sprinklers, pumps, valves, and associated equipment

1. TORO

a. 570Z Series bodies with 570 series nozzles.

b. Super 600, 700, or V1550 sprinklers.

c. P-220 Series valves.

d. Custom Command Series controllers.

e. Quick couplers 473-00

f. Or approved equals of above.

2. RAINBIRD

a. 1800 Series bodies with 1800 series nozzles.

b. T-Bird or Falcon Rotary sprinklers.

c. PGA Series valves.

d. ESP-LX Plus Series Controllers.

e. 33RC/33K Quick Coupler combination.

f. Or approved equal of above.

I. Controller

1. Provide a microprocessor based solid state sprinkler system controller capable of fully automatic or manual operation of the system.

a. Minimum 117-VAC power input capable of operating 24-VAC electric remote control valves.

BROADWAY PLAZA



b. Reset circuit breaker for power overload protection.

c. Equal or greater station capacity compared to number of irrigated zones.

d. Each station capable of operating for 1 to 99 minutes in 1-minute increments.

e. At least two independent programs with 3 automatic starts per day for each program.

f. 14-day programming

g. Monitor readout during operation

h. Manually operable at any time with manual “single station” operation for programmed time or a new time setting potential without affecting the original program.

i. Power Cord: The power cord shall be 6 foot, 16-3 type SJT with grounded plug.

J. Wiring

1. Low Voltage a. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UF UL approved No. 14 gauge direct burial copper

wire for all control wires, and No. 14 gauge direct burial copper wire for all common wires.

b. Wire Colors: Control Wires – Red, Common Wires – White, Master Valve Wires – Blue, Spare Wires - Green (labeled at terminations).

c. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Owner’s Representative.

d. Control wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M direct bury splice, Rain Bird Pentite connectors, or similar dry splice method.

2. High Voltage a. Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate

needs of equipment serviced. 3. Communication Cable

a. Each cable from central to be of a different color approved by Owner’s Representative prior to installation.

K. Valve Box

a. Thermoplastic valve box: size as required for access to valve, with approved evergreen thermoplastic cover.

b. Gate Valves, Drip Line Blow-out Stubs, and Wire Stub Box - Carson #910-12.

c. 3/4 inch through 2 Inch Control Valves - Carson #1419B-13B.

d. Drip Valve Assemblies - Carson #1419B-13B.

e. Control Wiring Splices - Carson #910-12.

L. Valves

1. Manual Isolation Valves for use with PVC pipe shall be all brass threaded globe valves with synthetic rubber disc and pronged type handle.

2. Plastic arranged for low voltage electric, with a manual-adjusting stem to control flow from full open to shut off positions. Closing time will not be less than 4-seconds.

3. Solenoids shall be epoxy encapsulated 4. Gate Valves

a. Gate Valves for 3/4 inch through 2-1/2 Inch Pipe - Brass construction; solid wedge, IPD threads, and non-rising stem with wheel operating handle.

b. Gate Valves for 3 inch and Larger Pipe - Iron body, brass or bronze mounted AWWA gate valves with a clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter of valve; rubber gasket or mechanical joint-type only. Valves shall be able to withstand a

BROADWAY PLAZA



continuous working pressure of 150 PSI and be equipped with a square operating nut.

5. Quick Coupling Valves a. Brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 psi; operable with

quick coupler. b. Equip quick coupler with locking rubber cover.

6. Air release valves a. APCO #75-1”

M. Backflow Device

1. Refer to Plumbing Drawings

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Drainage fill

1. 1/2” or 3/4” washed gravel.

B. Fill: Clean soil free of stones larger than 2” diameter, foreign matter, organic material, and debris.

1. Provide imported fill material as required to complete the work. Obtain rights and pay all costs for imported materials.

2. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate the irrigation system work may be used as fill material subject to the Owner’s representative’s review and acceptance.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine site for compliance to conditions described in the Contract Documents. If Conditions differ, contact Owner’s representative before commencing work.

B. Existing Irrigation System

1. If a previous irrigation system exists on the site the Contractor may utilize existing equipment under the following conditions

a. Equipment is functional

b. Equipment meets the performance standards described in these Specifications.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install fittings, valves, sprinklers, risers, and accessories, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Install pump, suction line, fittings, and accessories as shown or required to complete the system.

B. Excavating and backfilling

1. All excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation and include all materials encountered.

2. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and installation of pipe and fittings.

3. Clearances a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger - Make trenches of sufficient width (14 inches

minimum) to properly assemble and position pipe in trench. Minimum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger shall be 5 inches horizontally on both sides of the trench.

BROADWAY PLAZA



b. Piping Smaller that 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7 inches. c. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of clearance between each line,

and not less than 12 inches of clearance between lines of other trades. 4. Pipe and Wire Depth:

a. Pressure Supply Piping - 24 inches from top of pipe. b. Non-pressure Piping (rotor) - 18 inches from top of pipe. c. Non-pressure Piping (pop-up) - 12 inches from top of pipe. d. Control Wiring - Side of pressure supply line. e. Drip tubing - 12 inches form top of pipe. f. Emitter tubing - 12 inches from top of pipe.

5. Provide 1 cu. ft. of drainage fill aggregate around each pop-up impact type sprinkler head to permit drainage of water from the sprinkler case.

6. Install irrigation lines with a minimum cover of 12” based on finished grades for piping 1-1/2” and smaller, and 18” for larger piping.

7. Excavate trenches and install piping and fill during the same working day. Do not leave open trenches or partially filled trenches open overnight.

8. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density in 6” lifts, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the following methods: a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or Ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohibited within 10’-

0” of building or foundation walls.

C. Plastic pipe

1. General a. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s installation and ASTM

D2774 instructions. b. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction. c. Cut pipe square d. Remove burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation. e. Install plastic pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s instructions. f. Contractor shall make arrangements with pipe manufacturer for all necessary

field assistance. g. Minimum pitch of piping to drains shall be 3” for every 100 feet in length (1:400). h. Place manual drain valves at low points and dead ends of pressure supply piping

to insure complete drainage of system. i. Minimum horizontal clearance between lines in the same trench shall be 4”. j. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. k. Close open ends of pipe by acceptable methods when pipe installation is not in

progress. 2. Gasketed End Pipes

a. Lay pipe and make pipe to fitting or pipe to pipe joint, following oR70 recommendations (Johns-Manville Guide for Installation of Ring-Tite Pipe), or pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Construct thrust blocks behind all gasketed fittings, tees, bends, reducers, line valves, and caps in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.

c. Contact Owner’s Representative prior to placing thrust blocks, for observation of thrust block excavation and initial placement.

3. Joints a. Make plastic to plastic joints with solvent weld joints or slip seal joints. Use only

solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. b. Make plastic to metal joints with plastic male adapters. c. Make solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. d. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system.

D. Sprinklers

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. General a. Set sprinklers perpendicular and plumb to finished grades, except as otherwise

indicated. 2. Spray sprinklers

a. Install with an adjustable double swing joint riser using low-density polyethylene hose with spiral barb elbows.

3. Pop-up Rotary Sprinklers a. Install with an adjustable double swing joint riser of at least 3 standard 90-degree

elbows. b. Fabricate double swing joint risers of schedule 80 PVC nipples and schedule 40

PVC elbows. c. The horizontal nipple connected directly into the side of the lateral line shall be a

minimum of 3” long. d. All other nipples of the swing joint riser shall be of length as required for proper

installation of the sprinkler head.

E. Quick-coupling Valves

1. Install with an adjustable double swing riser assembled by the use of at least 3 standard 90-degree elbows.

2. Fabricate double swing joint risers of schedule 80 PVC nipples and schedule 40 PVC elbows

3. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more that 45º and no less than 10º.

F. Valves and valve boxes

1. Valves a. Set plumb and centered on the valves and tamped around each box to the

undisturbed trench face b. Install cross handle 2 inches below finished grade c. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valve box sides. d. Install each remote control valve in a separate valve box.

2. Boxes a. Install individual valve box flush with grade. Valve box extensions are not

acceptable except for master valve. b. Install gravel sump after compaction of all trenches. Valve box to rest on gravel

sump. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box after valve box is backfilled and compacted.

c. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each control valve box. Brand quick coupling valve box lids with letters “Q.C.” Brand all wore splice box lids with the word “Splice”. Brand all drip tubing blow out stubs with “B.O.” Brand all isolation gate valves with letters “G.V.” Letter and number size shall be no smaller that 1 inch and no greater

G. Manual drain valves

1. Install at all low points of the irrigation piping system 2. Two cubic feet of gravel shall be placed at the outlet of each drain valve for drainage.

H. Rain Sensor

1. Install on vertical surface, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Interrupt low volt ground wire prior to first valve as needed.

I. Control wiring

1. General a. Install electric control cable in the piping trenches wherever possible and

adjacent to pipe.

BROADWAY PLAZA



b. Where necessary to run wire in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover of 12”.

c. Provide sufficient slack at site connections, remote control valves in control boxes, and at wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or splice to surface without disconnecting wires when repair is required.

d. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals. 2. Spare wire

a. Run 2 spare #14-1 wire from controller pedestal to last electric control valve on each and every leg of pressure supply line.

b. Loop a minimum of 24” from all spare wires inside every control valve box operated by controller.

c. Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box. Wire color to be green. 3. Communication Cable

a. Installed per controller Manufacturer’s specifications and details 4. Expansion and contraction

a. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. b. Expansion joints in wire may be provided at 200-foot intervals by making 5-6

turns of the wire around a piece of 1/2” pipe instead of slack. 5. Connections

a. Connect each remote control valve to one station of a controller except as otherwise indicated.

b. Connect remote control valves to common ground wire system. c. Make all splices and electric control valve connections using Rain Bird Pentite

connectors or similar dry splice method. d. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice

valve box. e. Provide tight joints to prevent leakage of water and corrosion build-up on the

joint.

J. Controller

1. Install controller in a common area approved by Owner’s representative.

K. Piping Under Paving

1. Provide for a minimum cover of 24 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving.

2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with construction grade sand or squeegee (a layer 6 inches below pipe and 4 inches above pipe).

3. Compact backfill material in 6 inch lifts at 95% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 using manual or mechanical tamping devices.

4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling and paving operations.

5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, boring, to hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at no cost to Owner using schedule 80 sleeves. Obtain permission and prior approval to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner.

L. Flushing

1. After sprinkler piping and risers are installed and before sprinklers are installed, open control valves and flush out the system with full head of water for a minimum of 10 minutes.

2. Perform system testing upon completion of each section.

BROADWAY PLAZA



3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL

A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials, including unsuitable excavated materials, rock trash, and debris.

B. Maintain disposal route clear, clean, and free debris.

3.4 ACCEPTANCE

A. General

1. Arrange for Owner’s Representative’s presence 48 hours in advance of final review. 2. Supply force pump and all other test equipment.

B. Final review

1. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Owner’s Representative at time of walk-through to insure correction of all incomplete items.

2. Before final approval, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours.

3. Show evidence to Owner’s Representative that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled.

4. Instruct the Owner’s designated personnel in the operation of the system, including adjustment of sprinklers, controllers, valves, pump controls, and moisture sensing controls.

5. Demonstrate to the Owner’s representative the operation of each zone pointing out any discrepancies between the shop drawings and the built system.

6. If after request to Owner’s Representative for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Owner’s Representative finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of incomplete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Owner’s Representative to conduct and document further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work.

B. Remove from site all excess materials, soils, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from sprinkler system installation.

END OF SECTION

BROADWAY PLAZA


LANDSCAPE GRADING 329119 - 1

SECTION 329119 – LANDSCAPE GRADING

PART 1 : GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Preparing and supplying topsoil and/or engineered soils for landscape work.

2. Testing methods of existing and/or imported material.

3. Soil supplements.

4. Fine grading.

5. Aggregate Backfill.

6. Filter Fabric.

B. Related Work in Other Sections:

1. Excavation and Trenching Section 312001


A. Topsoil

1. Submit certificates of inspection required by law for transportation with invoice. File copies of certificates after acceptance of material.

2. Inspection by governmental officials at point of origin does not preclude rejection of materials at project site.

B. References

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM D5268-92: Standard Specifications for Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes.

2. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA)

a. USDA Particle Size Definition.

C. Installer’s Qualifications

1. Firm experienced in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Prior to delivery to site, submit manufacturers’ literature to the following items:

1. Organic Amendments

2. Topsoil

3. Soil Mixes

4. Sand

5. Chemical Additives/Fertilizer

B. Test Data: Laboratory test data for each specified material.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Labeling: Furnish standard products in unopened manufacturer’s standard containers bearing original labels showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store products with protection from weather or other conditions that would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product.

BROADWAY PLAZA



1.5 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS

A. Sampling: Samples of materials may be taken and analyzed for conformity to specifications at any time. Furnish samples as requested.

B. Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor’s expense.

C. Testing Agency: Pay cost of testing imported materials not meeting specifications.

1.6 SOILS ANALYSIS

A. General

1. Obtain an agricultural soil suitability analysis test from an accredited laboratory at the contractor’s expense to asses existing topsoil’s suitability for the proposed planting.

2. Analysis must include recommendations from laboratory for soil supplements to ensure suitability for turf grass, native grasses and forbes.

3. Analysis must be submitted to Landscape Architect for approval.

4. Contractor is responsible for amending soil to achieve nutrient and pH levels recommended by the soil test.

B. Sample Source

1. The collection of soil samples shall comply with the recommendations of the accredited laboratory.

2. A minimum of (1) sample shall be taken from the site for every acre of treatable area after fine grading is complete. Location(s) to be determined by Landscape Architect upon the Contractor’s request and documented by the Contractor.

C. Testing Scope

1. Soil pH

2. Buffer pH

3. Phosphorus

4. Potassium

5. NO3

6. Organic Matter

D. Testing Agencies

1. University of Missouri Extension Offices, Soil and Plant Testing Laboratory, 23 Mumford Hall, University of Missouri, Columbia, MO 65211. Phone: (573) 882.0623 Fax: (573) 884.4288

2. Kansas State University Extension Offices, Soil Testing Laboratory, Throckmorton Hall, Room 2308, Kansas State University, Manhattan, KS 66506. Phone: (785) 532.7897

3. Approved Equal

1.7 ACCEPTANCE

A. Acceptance: Work will not be accepted until the satisfactory completion of all soil preparation work.

B. Notification: Give notification of completion of soil preparation prior to initiating planting operations.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL

A. Existing On-Site Topsoil

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. Topsoil shall meet the general requirements listed in this subsection.

2. Topsoil shall include any amendments recommended by the soil test.

3. Only fertile, friable, well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free of stones over 1 in. diameter, sticks, oils, chemicals, plaster, concrete and other excess materials.

4. Acidity range (ph): 6.0 and 7.5.

5. Organic matter content: minimum 5 percent.

6. No particles larger than 1 inch in size.

7. Process, clean, and prepare imported topsoil to comply with specified criteria.

2.2 ADDITIVES

A. The following additives may or may not be used depending on the outcome of the soils agricultural suitability report

1. Ground limestone

2. Agricultural limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates, ground to such fineness that 50% will pass #100 sieve and 90% will pass #20 sieve.

3. Dolomite lime: Agricultural grade mineral soil conditioner containing 35% minimum magnesium carbonate and 49% minimum calcium carbonate, 100% passing #65 sieve. “Kaiser Dolomite 65 AG” as manufactured by Kaiser, Inc. Mineral Products Department, or equal.

4. Gypsum: Agricultural grade product containing 80% minimum calcium sulfate.

5. Iron Sulfate (Ferric or Ferrous): Supplied by a commercial fertilizer supplier, containing 20% to 30% iron and 35% to 40% sulfur.

6. Sulfate of Potash: Agricultural grade containing 50% to 53% of water-soluble potash.

7. Single Superphosphate: Commercial product containing 20% to 25% available phosphoric acid.

8. Ammonium Sulfate: Commercial product containing approximately 21% ammonia.

9. Ammonium Nitrate: Commercial product containing approximately 34% ammonia.

10. Calcium Nitrate: Agricultural grade containing 15-1/2% nitrogen.

11. Urea Formaldehyde: Granular commercial product containing 38% nitrogen.

12. I.B.D.U. (Iso-Butyldiene Diurea): Commercial product containing 31% nitrogen.

13. Soil Sulfur: Agricultural grade sulfur containing a minimum of 96% sulfur.

14. Iron Sequestrene: Geigy Iron Sequestrene 330 Fe.

B. Organic Soil Amendments

1. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture contents 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 inch(25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substance toxic to plantings; and as follows:

a. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.

b. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

2.3 SLOW-RELEASE FERTILIZER SYSTEMS

A. A complete, slow release fertilizer (root zone applied), having the ability of supply fertilizer for a minimum of 2 years.

B. Composition

1. One ounce packets of 16-8-16 fertilizer, 2 packets per inch of trunk diameter of “Eeesy Grow Root Contact Packet: as manufactured by S&D Products, Prairie Du Chein, Wisconsin OR

BROADWAY PLAZA



2. 21 gram tablet, 20-10-5 “Agriform Planting Tablets,” 2 tablets for ½” of tree trunk diameter or for each 1’ of height or spread of shrubs and evergreens. Tablets are manufactured by Agriform Internation Chemicals, Inc., Newark, California OR

3. Approved equal

2.4 PRE-EMERGENCE WEED CONTROL

A. Garden Alive WOW! Pre-Emergence Weed Control

2.5 WATER

A. General: Clean, fresh and potable, furnished and paid for by Contractor. Transport as required.

2.6 FILTER FABRIC

A. Filter fabric shall be Mirafi®

FW 500 woven monofilament polypropylene geotextiles.

2.7 AGGREGATE BACKFILL

A. Aggregate backfill shall be clean ¾ inch crushed limestone rock conforming to CPA-4 as specified in KDOT Specification Section 1102

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Utilities and Excavation

1. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid possible damage. Hand-excavate, as required.

2. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect before planting.

3. Give written notification if other construction activities threaten to damage existing plants to remain.

B. Protection of Existing Plants to Remain

1. Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park equipment under the branches of all existing plants to remain except as actually required for construction in those areas.

C. Verification of Previous Work

1. Verify that all areas to receive engineered soils have been completed prior to commencement of fine grading.

3.2 SOIL PREPARATION

A. Scarify and re-compact all subgrades to a depth of 6” that are not already addressed.

B. Moisture Content:

1. Inadequate Moisture Content: Add water and thoroughly mix into fill material until the moisture necessary is uniformly dispersed throughout.

2. Excessive Moisture content: Aerate fill material by blading or other acceptable methods until moisture content is uniformly reduced to achieve required compaction.

3. Maintain within 2 percent above or below optimum moisture content at all times during the work.

4. Prevent runoff into the excavated cell.

C. Clearing of Debris:

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. Clear all planting areas of stones 1” inch diameter and larger, weeds, debris and other extraneous materials prior to amending existing soil incorporating imported topsoil.

D. Establish extent of grading by area and elevation. Designate and identify datum elevation and project engineering reference points. Set required lines, levels and elevations.

E. Do not cover or enclose work of this section before obtaining required observations, tests, approvals, and location recording.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Roll placed topsoil ensuring a total thickness of topsoil after compaction shall be not less than:

1. Turf areas – 4 inches

2. Shrub beds – 6 inches

3. Tree pits – as shown on drawings

B. General

1. Grade smooth all planting areas after weeding, topsoil spreading, soil preparation, and soil conditioning have been completed and soil has been thoroughly compacted.

2. Provide finish subgrade elevations parallel to finished surface grades to allow for pavement depths, topsoil and soil amendments. Provide uniform levels and slopes.

3. Provide all grades for natural runoff of water without low spots or pockets. Accurately set flow line grades at 2% minimum gradient unless otherwise noted in drawings.

4. Finish grades shall be smooth, even and on a uniform plane with no abrupt changes of surface unless conveyed otherwise.

5. Grades shall be uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are given, or between points established by walks, paving, curbs or catch basins unless otherwise indicated.

6. Tops and toes of all slopes shall be rounded to produce a gradual and natural appearing transition between relatively level areas and slopes unless specified otherwise.

7. Excavate with a small track backhoe equipped with a toothed bucket to avoid compacting or smearing the underlying soils. The bottom of the excavated for rain garden should be flat and level (not parabolic and/or sloped).

C. Aggregate Backfill

1. Place aggregate after installing perforated drain pipe taking care not to compact subgrade soils.

D. Filter Fabric

1. Place filter fabric on finished surface of placed aggregate prior to installing engineered soil or topsoil.

2. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations at locations shown on the drawings.

3. Apply pre-emergent herbicide prior to installing erosion controls.

E. Grades:

1. Tolerance: All planting areas shall be true to grade within 1 in. when tested in any direction within a 10 ft. straightedge.

2. Finish Grades of Landscape Areas. ¾ in. below top of adjacent pavement, curbs or headers.

BROADWAY PLAZA



3.4 SOIL CONDITIONING

A. Till all planting areas to a depth of 4” below finish grade incorporating amendments as necessary.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide

1. Apply pre-emergent weed control to all areas to be mulched and under erosion control fabric.

2. Comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations to avoid incompatible uses with specific plants.

3.5 CLEAN UP

A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times.

B. Clean up and remove all excess materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Acceptance.

END OF SECTION

BROADWAY PLAZA


TURF GRASS 329220 - 1

SECTION 32 92 20 - TURF GRASS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Requirements: Review the General Contract Conditions and Division One, General Requirements, which contain information and requirements that apply to this Section.

B. Work Included: Provide complete as shown and specified. 1. All new seeded areas 2. All new sodded areas 3. Lawn fertilizer 4. Erosion Control Blanket 5. Reconditioning of existing lawns damaged during construction.

C. Related Work in Other Sections: 1. Planting Irrigation Section 328400 2. Landscape Grading Section 329119 3. Plants Section 329300


A. Certificates of Inspection 1. Submit as required by law for transportation of each shipment of seed along with invoice. 2. Submit copies of certificates after acceptance of material. 3. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection at

project site.

B. Experience Requirements 1. Supplier: not less than 5 years experience in the supplying of the types of products specified. 2. Installation contractor: not less than 3 years successful experience in the installation of similar

types of products specified.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples and Product Data: 1. Seed Mix(es)

a. Seed and seed labels shall conform to all current State and Federal regulations and will be subject to the testing provisions of the Association of Official Seed Analysis.

b. Submit seed labels to Landscape Architect for approval prior to seeding.

B. Submit the Following Materials Certification: 1. Tackifier. 2. A signed statement certifying that the seed furnished is from a lot that has been tested by a

recognized laboratory for seed testing within six months prior to the date of delivery. 3. Test Data: Laboratory test data for each specified material. 4. Seed varieties: Guaranteed statement of composition, mixture and percentage of purity and

germination of each variety, stating botanical and common names. 5. Selection and ordering of seed and sod

C. Unavailable Materials

1. If proof is submitted that any seed and sod is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract price.

BROADWAY PLAZA



2. Substantiate such proof in writing no later than 30 days after award of contract by siting (4) sources with their statements that the product is available.

3. Special Conditions: The above provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for obtaining specified seed in advance if special growing conditions or other arrangements must be made in order to supply specified materials.

D. Maintenance Schedule 1. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of

Acceptance. 2. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for

delay.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Notify Owner’s Representative seven (7) days prior to start of seeding and sodding operations.

B. Protect existing utilities, paving and other facilities form damage caused by seeding and sodding operation.

C. Perform seeding and sodding work only after planting and other work affecting ground surface has been completed.

D. The irrigation system will be installed prior to seeding and sodding. Locate, protect, and maintain the irrigation system during seeding and sodding operations. Repair irrigation system components damaged during seeding and sodding operations at the Contractor’s expense.

E. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established. Erect signs and barriers as required.

F. Provide hose and lawn watering equipment as required.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Proceed with, and complete landscape work as specified within the submitted planting schedule, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.

B. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. 1. Season and Conditions

C. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store and protect all materials from weather or other conditions that would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product.

B. Seed 1. Delivery: Furnish standard seed in unopened manufacturer’s standard containers bearing

original certification labels showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer.

C. Sod 1. Harvest and delivery: Harvest from the source and install within 24 hours. Deliver only as

much sod as can be installed in one day’s work. 2. Review: Sod not placed within this time period shall be reviewed prior to installation.

BROADWAY PLAZA



1.7 ANALYSES OF SAMPLES AND TESTS

A. Samples: Samples of materials may be taken and analyzed for conformity to specifications at any time. Furnish samples as requested.

B. Rejected Materials: Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor’s expense. Pay cost of testing materials not meeting specifications

1.8 FINAL REVIEW AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. General:

B. Specific Requirements: 1. Seed and sod areas will be eligible for review once the lawn area has been mowed after

reaching its prescribed mowing height. 2. Only the entire project shall be considered for review unless partial review areas have been

defined by the Landscape Architect. 3. Seeded areas will be acceptable provided all requirements have been complied with, and a

healthy, uniform, close stand of the specified grass is established free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.

4. Lawn areas shall be mowed at least once 5. All bare areas over 6” square shall be re-seeded.

C. General:

1. Final review and final acceptance procedure shall be combined with those defined Section 329300 Plants.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 TURF SEED

A. Composition 1. Fresh, clean, certified, new crop seed of the following varieties mixed by commonly approved

methods in the proportions as shown. 2. All seed mixes shall not exceed a 9 month shelf life.

Seed Mix Min. % of overall weight

Pure Live Seed (PLS)

Germination Rate

Improved Variety Turf-type Tall Fescue Apache III, 2

nd Millennium or Falcon IV.

90% 98% 90%

Annual Rye

10% 98% 90%

Total Seed Application Rate per 1,000 SF

8 pounds

B. Labeling 1. All seed shall be furnished in bags or containers clearly labeled to show the name and

address of the supplier, the seed name, the lot number, net weight, the percent of weed seed content and the guaranteed percentage of purity and germination.

C. Noxious Seeds

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. All brands furnished shall be free from noxious seeds including but not limited to Russian or Canadian Thistle, European Bindweed, Johnson Grass and Leafy Spurge.

D. Seed which has become wet, moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not be acceptable

E. Seed shall not exceed 1% of weed content. If seed available on the market does not meet the minimum purity and germination percentages of purity or germination by furnishing sufficient additional seed to equal the the specified product, product comparison shall be made on the basis of pure live seed in pounds. The formula used for determining the quantity of pure live seed shall be: Pounds of Seed x (Purity X Germination) = Pounds of Pure Live Seed (PLS)

2.2 WATER

A. Potable water as furnished by Contractor unless otherwise noted in Division 1.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Refer to Section 329119 Landscape Grading

B. Soil conditioning, as defined in Section 329119 Landscape Grading, shall be completed between 2 weeks and 2 months prior to sod installation or seeding

C. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded, settled, or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to seeding.

D. Sod Bed Preparation: 1. Rolling: Roll amended soil with 200 pound water-ballast roller. 2. Moistening: After all unevenness in the soil surface has been corrected, lightly moisten the

soil immediately prior to laying the bed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Seeding 1. All sowing of seed shall be completed between March 1 and May 15 or September 1 and

November 1 unless otherwise specified. 2. Sowing delayed beyond the specified dates, and due to circumstances beyond the

Contractor's control, may be continued upon written approval. 3. The sowing shall be stopped when satisfactory results are not likely to be obtained due to

excessive moisture conditions, high winds or other unfavorable conditions. 4. It shall be resumed only when conditions are favorable again or when alternative or corrective

measures and approved procedures have been adopted. B. Method of Sowing

1. Drill sowing is required unless another method is approved by the Landscape Architect. Drills shall be set 8" apart.

2. Subcontractor shall make 2 passes in the same direction to place rows 3" to 5" apart. Place seed 1/4" to 3/8" in ground.

3. When drilled sowing is utilized, skipped areas wider than 5" between drills or areas averaging more than 5" in width shall be reseeded. Bare areas over 1 s.f. shall be reseeded.

C. Compacting

BROADWAY PLAZA



1. Immediately after sowing the seed, the entire area shall be compacted by means of a cultipacker, roller, or other approved equipment, in order to reduce air pockets and create good soil to seed contact.

2. When a cultipacker or other approved equipment that leaves a roughened surface is used, the compacting shall be along the contour wherever possible.

3. If the mulching operations can be accomplished the same working day the area is seeded, compacting the seed and spreading the mulch should be done at the same time.

D. Mulching

1. The mulch shall be spread uniformly in a continuous blanket, using not less than 2,000 pounds per acre or 1 bale per 1,000 square feet, approximately 1” loose measurable depth over seeded areas.

E. Anchoring

1. Immediately following spreading of the straw, a V-type wheel land packer shall anchor the material to the soil.

2. A disc harrow set to cut only slightly or other suitable equipment that will secure the straw firmly in the ground shall be used to form soft binding mulch and prevent loss or bunching by the wind.

3.3 REPLACING AND RECONDITIONING OF EXISTING LAWNS

A. General 1. Sod all existing lawns damaged by Contractor’s operations including but not limited to the

storage of materials and equipment operations. 2. If the Contractor believes that the lawn in question may be reconditioned, he may request the

Landscape Architect to review all the lawn areas in question for their eligibility for reconditioning.

3. The Contractor may recondition an existing lawn in lieu of replacement upon the approval of the Landscape Architect.

4. Both replacing and reconditioning of existing lawns shall be held to the same standards for acceptance, maintenance, and warranty outlined in these specifications.

B. Replacing Sod 1. Preparation and installation of sod shall conform to this set of specifications.

C. Reconditioning Lawns 1. Mow, rake, and aerate if compacted, fill low spots, remove humps, fertilize, and seed

conforming to the requirements set out in these specifications. 2. Remove weeds before seeding using selective chemical weed killers if necessary. 3. Apply a seedbed mulch, if required, to maintain moist condition.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall maintain all turf areas up until all turf areas have achieved final acceptance

B. Maintenance shall include

1. Watering seed and sod areas per industry standards for the particular plant type and compensating for recent precipitation.

2. Mowing all the planted lawn areas at the prescribed height, but shall not exceeding 3” in height.

3. Top dressing with 1 pound of Nitrogen 1,000 square feet of turf area after first mowing. Do not apply if grass is dormant.

BROADWAY PLAZA



3.5 EROSION BLANKET

A. Install erosion control blanket – staked per manufacturer’s specification on all slopes exceeding a 3:1 slope that are specifically labeled in the drawing to be seeded. Otherwise these slopes shall be staked with sod per Part 3 of this section

B. Provide straw bale checking in ditches or problem swales at intervals required to adequately slow water velocity and impede soil loss.

3.6 CLEAN-UP

A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work.

B. Repair damage resulting from seeding operations.

C. Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area up until Acceptance.

END OF SECTION

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 1

SECTION 329300 – PLANTS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Work Included: Provide complete as shown and specified.

1. Trees 2. Shrubs 3. Groundcovers &Vines 4. Topsoil Amendments 5. Planting Accessories

C. Related Work in Other Sections

1. Landscape Grading Section 329119 2. Turf Grass Section 329220


A. Certificates of Inspection

1. Submit as required by law for transportation of each shipment of plantings along with invoice.

2. Submit copies of certificates after acceptance of material. 3. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not

preclude rejection at project site.

B. Experience Requirements

1. Supplier: not less than 5 years experience in the supplying the types of products specified.

2. Installation contractor: not less than 3 years successful experience in installing similar types of products specified.

C. Applicable Standards

1. ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General

1. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

2. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities.

B. Analysis and Standards

1. Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. 2. Right is reserved to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to

specifications at any time. Furnish samples upon request. 3. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in

accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.

C. Plant Procurement Reports

1. Contractor shall submit a table listing the following: a. plant species (common and scientific name)

b. quantity

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 2

c. size

d. nursery name and location

e. anticipated installation date.

2. Report shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative at the following project milestones. a. One week after Project awarded.

b. One month prior to installation

c. Maximum six month intervals between previous two dates.

3. If substitutions are requested, contractor shall provide written statements from a minimum of four nurseries stating the lack of availability. Documentation should include a proposal for substitutions of the unobtainable plant material including material of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract price.

D. Maintenance Instructions

1. Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner to maintain installed landscape work.

2. Submit prior to Acceptance.

E. Miscellaneous Materials

1. A sample of mulch, exemplifying its size, texture, and color shall be submitted for approval by the Landscape Architect

1.4 MATERIAL INSPECTIONS

A. Plant Material

1. Contractor may request Landscape Architect to review plant materials at place of growth or from nursery shipment site. Contractor shall make the request at least 7 days prior to the review date.

2. Right is reserved to refuse review at this time if, in the Landscape Architect’s judgment, an insufficient quantity of plants is available.

3. Label at least one plant of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

4. Contractor shall accompany Landscape Architect to all review(s) of plant materials at the nursery.

5. Landscape Architect will review and tag plants at place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specifications.

6. The Landscape Architect retains the right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work.

B. Distant Plant Material

1. If on-site review of plant material is not feasible due to geographical location, submit photographs of plant material with point of reference to determine scale.

2. Such review shall not restrict the right to inspect and reject once the Landscape Architect can inspect the material in person.

C. Rejected Materials

1. Remove rejected materials immediately from the site at Contractor’s expense. 2. If conditions prohibit the immediate replacement of the rejected plant material,

the Contractor shall fill open tree pits with mulch or an approved material.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 3

1. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities.

2. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 3. Furnish standard products in manufacturer’s standard containers bearing original

labels legibly showing quantity, analysis, genus, species, variety, and name and location of source.

4. Store products with protection from weather or other conditions that would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product.

5. Do not lift or handle plants by branches or stems at any time. 6. Do not bind or handle plants with wire or rope at any time.

B. Packaged Materials

1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer.

2. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. 3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time. 4. Protect metal containers from sun during summer months with temperatures

above 80 degrees F.

C. Trees and Shrubs

1. Dig balled and burlapped plants with firm, natural balls of earth of diameter not less than that recommended by USDA Standard for Nursery Stock, and of sufficient depth to include the fibrous and feeding roots.

2. Do not prune prior to delivery unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect.

3. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner that would damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape.

4. Provide protective covering during delivery. 5. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery. 6. After preparations for planting have been completed, deliver trees and shrubs

and plant immediately. 7. If trees or shrubs must be transplanted in full-leaf or in hot weather an anti-

desiccant shall be applied to retard excessive loss of moisture from foliage of plant materials.

8. An emulsion type anti-desiccant liquid shall be sprayed on to the foliage of trees and shrubs at the nursery before transplanting and again after installation.

9. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Utilities and Excavation

1. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid possible damage. Hand-excavate, as required.

2. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect before planting.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Planting Time

1. Proceed with, and complete landscape work as specified in the submitted plant schedule, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.

2. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required.

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 4

3. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor is required to maintain all plant materials included in the Contract up until Acceptance.

B. Maintenance shall comply with professional standards and include but not be limited to the following practice.

1. Adequate watering for the given plant type 2. Removal of any undesirable species (weeding) 3. Replace/restore damages stakes, guy supports, or damaged wrappings and

insure that trees are upright 4. Restore mulch beds to maintain proper cover defined in Drawings 5. Treatment of any disease, insect infestation, or other condition detrimental to the

plants’ survival 6. Mowing as prescribed for the grass type 7. Dead-heading of perennials and/or native grasses at the appropriate times

C. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner to avoid conflicts with the existing maintenance practices.

1.9 ACCEPTANCE

A. Only the entire project shall be considered for review unless partial areas of acceptance have been defined by the Landscape Architect.

B. Upon total completion of the specified work, the Contractor shall request the Landscape Architect to review the finished product for Acceptance. Contractor shall request the review 10 days before anticipated review date.

C. If after completing the inspection, the Landscape Architect finds unsatisfactory items, he/she shall compose an Acceptance Punch List for the Contractor and Owner.

D. The Contractor shall correct unsatisfactory items and request the Landscape Architect to review.

E. Additional inspections beyond the previous two inspections shall be at the expense of the Contractor on an hourly basis plus traveling expenses that may be deducted from final payment.

1.10 WARRANTY PERIOD

A. Requirements

1. Warrant that all plant materials are true to species and variety. 2. Warrant that all plant materials installed under this Contract will be healthy and in

flourishing condition of active growth for the specified duration. 3. Exceptions to this warranty are defects resulting from causes outside the

Contractor’s professional responsibility. These causes include but are not limited to: a. vandalism

b. Acts of God

4. Only one (1) replacement will be required after acceptance, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with specified requirements.

B. Warranty Time Period

1. Trees and Shrubs: one (1) year after date of acceptance

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 5

2. Groundcovers, vines, perennials, annuals, native and ornamental grasses: one (1) year after date acceptance.

3. Warranty time period states the minimum amount of time before a Warranty Acceptance will be granted. If the Contractor is tardy in requesting a Warranty Inspection, the warranty shall be extended to the time of Warranty Acceptance.

C. Warranty Acceptance

1. Once the warranty period is complete, the Contractor shall request the Landscape Architect to review all the items under warranty.

2. If any plants are dormant at the time of inspection, the review shall be postponed until they may be adequately assessed.

3. If after completing the inspection, the Landscape Architect finds unsatisfactory items, he/she shall compose a Warranty Replacement List for the Contractor and Owner.

4. The review process shall follow the same procedure as the Acceptance process described in this Section.

5. Materials will be evaluated and recorded by the Landscape Architect as to their qualifications for the one-time replacement warranty the Contractor assumes. Satisfactory replacements will be considered non-warranty items at the point of acceptance.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIALS

A. General

1. Provide trees, shrubs, and other plants of size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock."

2. Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, including but not limited to insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement.

3. Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. 4. Samples must prove to be completely free of circling, kinked or girdling trunk

surface and center roots and show no evidence of a pot-bound condition. 5. Size

a. If a range of size is given, do not use plant materials less than the minimum size.

b. Not less than 40% of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified.

c. The measurements specified are the minimum size acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, when pruning is required.

d. Plants that meet the measurements specified, but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected.

6. Substitutions a. Substituted plants shall be true to species and variety and shall conform

to measurements specified except the plants larger than specified may be used if accepted.

b. Substitute plants shall not increase Contract price unless a Change Order is approved.

c. If larger plants are accepted, increase the ball of earth proportion to the size of the plant.

B. Broadleaf Trees

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 6

1. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed. 2. Multi-stem trees shall have a minimum of (3) stems with a minimum of (2) of the

stems being within the caliper size range specified. 3. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) broadleaf trees.

C. Shrubs

1. Provide container grown deciduous shrubs unless noted on the Plant Schedule.

D. Coniferous and Broadleaf Evergreens

1. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other types, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidal, broad upright, and columnar.

2. Provide normal quality evergreens with well-balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown.

3. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens.

E. Groundcovers, Annuals, and Perennials

1. Provide plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and with not less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size shown or listed.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS

A. Pre-Emergence Weed Control

1. Garden Alive WOW! Pre-Emergence Weed Control

B. Edging

1. 4 inch deep by ¼ inch thick commercial steel edging fabricated in sections with loops welded to face of sections spaced 36 inch on center to receive stakes.

2. Stakes: 16 inch long tapered steel 3. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard black painted finish

C. Mulch

1. Dark, double-grounded hardwood mulch.

D. Anti-Erosion Mulch

1. Provide clean, seed-free salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

E. Anti-Desiccant

1. Emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration, but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants not removable by rain or snow.

2. Deliver in manufacturer's fully identified containers and mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Filtration/Separation Fabric

1. Water permeable filtration fabric of fiberglass or polypropylene fabric.

G. Tree Wrapping

1. Tree-wrap tape not less than 4 inches wide, bituminous, impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, brown in color, designed to prevent borer damage and winter freezing.

H. Water

1. Clean, fresh and potable, furnished and paid for by Contractor.

B. Time-Release Tablets

1. Mycorrhizal inoculum / soil conditioner in a specially formulated compressed 7 gram tablet.

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 7

2. Approved Product: GroLife

I. Stakes and Guys

1. Provide stakes and deadmen of sound new hardwood, treated softwood, or metal, free of defects.

2. Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized iron wire, not lighter than 12 Ga. with zinc-coated turnbuckles.

3. Provide not less than 1/2-inch diameter rubber or plastic hose, cut to required lengths and of uniform color, material, and size to protect tree trunks from damage by wires.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 REVIEW OF EXISTING CONDITIONS & PLANT LAYOUT

A. Do not commence planting work prior to acceptance of soil preparation and final grades.

B. Submit written notification of all conditions inconsistent with specifications for any related Sections before commencing work.

C. Layout plants at locations shown on Drawings.

1. Stake each tree and shrub Using 3-foot lath; large shrub massings may be outlined.

2. Outline planting beds with lime as needed to define limits. 3. Contractor shall request Landscape Architect to review staking and outlining

locations for approval before installation. 4. Locations of markings will be checked in the field and will be adjusted to exact

position before planting begins. 5. Right is reserved to refuse review at this time if, in the Landscape Architect’s

opinion, an insufficient amount of staking or outlining is available for review.

D. Obstructions

3.2 PLANTING OPERATIONS

A. General

1. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds 2. Keep plants that cannot be planted immediately upon delivery in the shade, well-

protected and well-watered. 3. Heel in and protect with burlap all B&B plant materials which cannot be planted

upon delivery.

B. Handling and De-potting of Plant Materials

1. Avoid all damage to containers and rootballs. If rootball is cracked or broken during handling, plant will be rejected.

2. Cut metal containers on two sides with accepted cutting tool. Do not use spade. 3. For plastic containers, tip container to horizontal orientation and carefully remove

shrub. Support rootball during installation to prevent cracking or shedding of soil.

C. Installation

1. If rock, underground utilities, tree roots or other obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be used as directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Where locations cannot be changed, Contractor shall submit a proposal to remove or relocate the obstructions to the Landscape Architect.

3. If left unattended, tree pits shall be temporarily fenced off to avoid potential hazard.

4. Scarification

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 8

a. Plant Rootball i. After removing plant from container, scarify the sides of the

rootball to a depth of 1 inch at four to size equally-spaced locations around the perimeter of the ball.

ii. Completely sever or remove all circling roots over 3/8-inch in diameter.

b. Plant Pit i. Compact before setting of plants ii. Scarify sides of plant pit, thoroughly breaking up all surfaces and

eliminating all “glazed” areas. 5. Positioning

a. Backfill plant pit as required allowing crown of ball 2” above new finish grade.

b. Thoroughly foot-tamp all backfill. c. Position plant in planting pit, maintaining plumb location.

6. Backfilling a. Backfill with topsoil. b. Brace each plant plumb and rigidly in position until planting soil has been

tamped solidly around the ball and roots. c. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full, water

thoroughly and saturate rootball, before installing remainder of the backfill mix to top of pit, eliminating all air pockets.

7. Fertilizer Tablets: a. Place evenly distributed in plant pits when backfilled 2/3 according to the

product recommendations.

D. Adjustment: Adjust plants so that after full settlement has occurred, the grade at the base of the plants is 2 inches above the adjacent planting finish grade.

3.3 STAKING AND GUYING

A. General

1. Trees shall be able to stand upright without support, and shall return to the original vertical position after their tops have been deflected horizontally and released.

2. All plant materials shall remain plumb and straight for all given conditions from installation through the warranty period.

B. Staking

1. Locate stakes in around the trunk equidistant from the trunk of tree and from each other, with one stake aligned with the trunk and the source of prevailing winds.

2. Drive stakes at least 30 inches into firm ground.

C. Guying

1. Wire support straps shall be placed around the trunk in a single loop. 2. Run wire through grommets on support strap, tighten, and keep taut. 3. Guy trees at points of branching, with guys spaced equally around and outside

perimeter of ball. 4. Provide one turnbuckle for each guy. 5. Use 2 cable clamps at each cable connection. 6. Place white plastic guy covers on all guys.

3.4 APPLICATION OF PRE-EMERGENCE WEED CONTROL

A. Apply under mulch in all planting beds and around trees.

BROADWAY PLAZA


PLANTS 329300 - 9

B. Prior to application of pre-emergence weed control, the area shall be smooth and be free of clods and debris larger than 1”.

C. Check manufacturer’s instructions to avoid products that may be harmful to desirable plants or animals.

D. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding preparation and application.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS & WORK

A. Labels: Remove all plant labels, wires and ties from plants.

B. Mulch: Install a 3” deep layer of specified mulch over all planting areas unless otherwise noted on drawings.

C. Watering: Water all plants immediately after completion of planting operations.

D. Wrapping: Wrap trunks of deciduous trees susceptible to sunscald, tying the end securely in place.

3.6 CLEAN-UP

A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat and orderly at all times; remove excess materials and debris from the entire work area up until Acceptance.

END OF SECTION



© WSS 2015 TREE GRATES 32 94 43 - 1

SECTION 32 94 43 - TREE GRATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes tree grating for trees.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification:

1. Tree Grates, Frames, and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size delivered to the site for review, to verify design and color selected.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of tree grate, from manufacturer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE GRATES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ironsmith, Inc. “Market Street Tree Grate,” or comparable product by one of the following: ,

B. Tree Grates: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 (Class 250) or better, gray-iron castings of shape, pattern, and size indicated.

C. Shape and Size: 60 inches (1524 mm) square with adjustable square tree openings; 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) deep.

D. Finish: Powder-coat finish; low-gloss black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive tree grates for conditions affecting installation and performance.



© WSS 2015 TREE GRATES 32 94 43 - 2

3.2 TREE GRATE INSTALLATION

A. Tree Grates: Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces as shown on Drawings. Shim from supporting substrate with soil-resistant plastic. Maintain a 3-inch- (75-mm-) minimum growth clearance around base of tree; break away units of casting, if necessary, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



SANITARY SEWER CONSTRUCTION 33 01 30 - 1

SECTION 33 01 30 - SANITARY SEWER CONSTRUCTION

1.1 SCOPE. This section shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment and labor for excavation,

trenching, placing of pipe, construction of manholes and appurtenances, and backfilling for the sanitary sewage collection system.

2.1 GENERAL A. Clearing and Grubbing: The area within the construction limits on the plans shall be

cleared of fences, trees, logs, stumps, brush, vegetation, rubbish, and other perishable or objectionable matter by the Contractor. Costs incurred shall be considered as incidental to other construction and shall not be a bid item. Such fences and structures within the easement shall be replaced by the Contractor, in good condition satisfactory to the Engineer, unless otherwise specified on the Plans.

B. Construction Stakes: The Engineer will establish construction stakes as necessary to

construct the work to the proper lines, grades and dimensions. The Contractor shall furnish and install, at his own expense, all additional stakes, batter boards and straightedges for lines, levels and measurements. The Contractor shall give the Owner at least 48 hours advance notice of his need for construction stakes. He shall satisfy himself before commencing work as to the meaning of all stakes and marks. When construction stakes are once set, the Contractor shall preserve them. Any work done without lines and grades as given by the Engineer may be ordered removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

C. Subsurface Obstructions: The drawings indicate the general location of certain utilities

and facilities. The Contractor shall locate obstructions by digging in advance of machine excavation where definite information is not available as to their exact location. Where such facilities are unexpectedly encountered and damaged, responsible officials and other affected parties shall be notified. Where closeness of the utility to the work prohibits mechanical excavation and backfill, the contractor will work around by hand excavating, tunneling or other improved methods, at the Contractor's expense, where practicable. Where not possible to bypass or work around the facility, the Contractor shall notify the Owner that such removal or relocation work is necessary to permit new construction to lines and grades designated. Cost of such removal or relocation or relocation work shall be borne by the Owner or Utility.

3.1 PROTECTION OF WATER SUPPLIES A. Separation of Water Mains and Sewers

1. Gravity Sanitary Sewers: When potable water pipes and gravity sanitary sewers are laid parallel to each other, the horizontal distance between them shall not be less than 10 feet (3.0m). The distance shall be measured from edge to edge. The laying of water pipes and sanitary sewers shall be in separate trenches with undisturbed earth between them. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a 10 foot (3.0m) separation, KDHE will consider a proposal providing equivalent protection supported by other methods on a case-by-case basis, if supported by data from the design engineer. Equivalent protection may require sanitary sewer construction with one of the following additional protective features: concrete encasement, vacuum sewers, or jointless pipe such as polyethylene or cured-in-



place. When a water pipe and a sanitary sewer cross and the sewer is 2 feet (0.6m) or more (clear space) below the water pipe, no special requirements or limitations are provided herein. At all other crossings, the sanitary sewer is to be constructed of one of the following materials (or approved equal) and pressure tested to assure water tightness pursuant to Chapter VI of the KDHE Minimum Standards of Design of Water Pollution Control Facilities:

a. Ductile iron pipe conforming to ASTM A536 or ANSI/AWWA C151/A21

with minimum thickness class 50, and gasketed, push-on or mechanical joints in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

b. PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D3034 with minimum wall thickness of SDR41, ASTM F679, ASTM F789, or ASTM F794, with gasketed push-on joints in conformance with ASTM D3212.

c. Reinforced concrete pipe conforming to ASTM C76 with gasketed joints in conformance with ASTM C361 or ASTM C443. Joints in the sewer pipe shall be located as far as practical from the intersected water main. Where a water main is laid across or through an area where there is an existing sanitary sewer, which is not constructed of one of the above specified materials and is 2 feet (0.6m) or less below the water pipe, the existing sewer shall be encased in concrete with a minimum of 6 inches (15cm) thickness for a 10 foot (3.0m) distance on each side of the crossing or the crossed section of sewer replaced to meet the above specified construction requirements. KDHE will consider proposals providing equivalent protection by other means on a case-by-case basis, if supported by data from the design engineer.

2. Sewer Connections: There are to be no physical connections between any parts

of the potable water system with building sewers, sanitary sewers, or wastewater treatment facilities by means of which it would be possible for sewage, even under exceptional circumstances, to reach the wells, storage reservoirs or distribution systems.

3. Pressure Sewer Lines: When force mains run parallel to water lines, the

separation distance shall be as far as practical, but at least a 10 foot (3.0m) horizontal separation shall be maintained. There shall be at least a 2-foot (0.6m) vertical separation at crossings with the water main crossing above the sewer force main. In cases where it is not practical to maintain the required vertical or horizontal separation distance between a water line and a sanitary sewer force main, KDHE will consider proposals providing equivalent protection by other methods on a case-by-case basis, if supported by data from the design engineer.

4. Sewer Manholes: No water pipe shall pass through or come in contact with any

part of a sewer manhole. 5. Storm Sewers: The separation distance between a storm sewer (which is not a

combined storm/sanitary sewer) and a water main should be based on geotechnical considerations. Required separation distances between water mains and combined storm/sanitary sewers are equivalent to those for water mains and gravity sanitary sewers.

6. Drains: Underground drains from fire hydrants or valve pits should not be directly

connected to sanitary or storm drains.



B. Separation of Water Mains and other Pollution Sources: It is of utmost importance that potable water lines be protected from any source of pollution. The following shall pertain to instances where septic tanks, absorption fields, waste stabilization ponds, feedlots, or other sources of pollution are encountered.

1. Tanks and Ponds: A minimum of 25 feet (7.6m) shall be maintained between all

potable water lines and all septic tanks or waste stabilization ponds. 2. Fields and Feedlots: Under no circumstances shall a water line extend through a

septic tank absorption field or feedlot. All water lines shall be located a minimum of 25 feet (7.6m) from the farthest known extent of any sewage contamination. Under no condition will it be considered that encasement of the water main through an area of real or potential pollution would provide the protection needed to the water supply.

C. Cross Connections: There shall be no physical connection between the PWSS and any

pipes, pumps, hydrants, tanks, or non-potable water supplies whereby unsafe water or other contaminating materials may be discharged or drawn into the system. KDHE approval shall be obtained for interconnections between potable water supplies. KDHE does not approve of interconnections of RWD lines and individual or independent water supply sources such as private and domestic wells.

4.1 SEWER PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: This section covers excavating, trenching, placement of pipe and backfilling for

sanitary sewer lines and appurtenances, and all incidental work in connection therewith, including disposing of surplus and waste materials and cleanup.

B. Classification of Excavation: All excavation will be unclassified. C. Surface Drainage: shall be diverted away from the site of open excavations and trenches.

Surface water, which enters or accumulates in open excavations or trenches, shall be removed and the sub-grade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and condition at no additional expense to the Owner.

D. Excavation of Trench: The open trench shall be excavated beginning at the outlet end

and proceeding toward the upper end on a true line and grade as shown on the Plans. Blasting will not be permitted. The foundation of the trench shall be at least 4 inches below the pipe to permit placement of bedding. The foundation of the trench shall be free from standing water and firm at time of bedding and pipe placement. Over excavation shall be replaced with bedding material and compacted. No more than 400 feet of trench shall be open at a time. (For additional information see "Excavation and Trenching.")

E. Dewatering: Where conditions are such that running or standing water occurs in the

trench bottom or the soil in the trench displays a "quick" tendency, the water shall be removed by pumps and suitable means such as well points or pervious under drain bedding until the pipe has been installed and the backfill has been placed to a sufficient height to prevent pipe flotation. Care shall be taken that any under drain is of proper graduation and thickness to prevent migration of material between the under drain, pipe embedment and native soils in the trench below and at the sides of the pipe. (For additional information see "Excavation & Trenching.")



F. Boring: Boring shall be accomplished by the dry method. No water jetting will be permitted. Excess voids and any abandoned boreholes shall be filled with pressure grout. (For additional information see "Boring and Encasement.")

G. Shoring and Bracing: All shoring, bracing and blocking shall be furnished and installed

as required to preserve and maintain exposed excavation faces, to protect existing facilities, and to provide for the safety of workmen and the general public. All shoring requirements shall be equal or greater than those issued by O.S.H.A.

H. Inspection of Materials: The Contractor shall inspect all pipe sections and other materials

prior to installation. All damaged or otherwise unfit material shall be removed from the project site. Foreign material, including dirt, shall be removed from the pipe prior to placement.

I. Laying: The laying of pipe shall start at the outlet end so that the spigot end points in the

direction of the flow. The bedding shall be so graded that the pipe is supported through-out its entire length. A depression shall be made for the bells. Lubricant used for pipe joining shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Spigots shall be inserted into the bell to the insertion mark so that the mark is just visible. No joints shall be covered until inspected and approved by the Engineer. The pipe shall be laid to a true grade and alignment so as to permit lamping between manholes.

J. Pipe in Fill Sections: A pipe bed and embankment, if required, shall be constructed of

selected material which shall be placed systematically on each side of pipe in 6 inch layers and thoroughly compacted.

K. Site Grading: Upon completion of backfilling and trenching work, the entire site of the

work shall be graded to smooth and uniform slope to match the line and grades of the surrounding area. No dips or depressions shall remain in the work area. The contractor shall use the appropriate equipment necessary to obtain the above results. Waste areas and stockpiles shall be broken down and removed, presenting no obstructions to natural drainage. The entire work area or area occupied and used by the contractor shall be clean, smooth and uniform so as to allow for seeding by the seeding contractor or landowner. All excess dirt, rocks, rubble, debris, etc., shall be removed from the project and disposed of at a site approved by the Engineer.

5.1 PIPE MATERIALS A. Gravity Sewer Pipe: The Gravity Sewer Pipe shall be PVC SDR35 unless otherwise

noted. Joints shall have rubber-sealing rings. Pipe shall be J-M Ring-Tite or CertainTeed PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe or Equal. When the use of

Ductile Cast Iron is specified (for specific situations such as highway crossings and railroad crossings) it shall be Class 150 conforming to ASTM A377.

B. Gravity Sewer Fittings: The PVC Gravity Sewer Fittings shall be PVC SDR35 unless

otherwise noted. The fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3034 in sizes 4 – 15 inches. Fittings shall be J-M Ring-Tite or CertainTeed PVC Gravity Fittings or equal. The fittings gaskets shall meet ASTM F 477.



6.1 MANHOLES A. Excavation and Backfill: At designated locations, trenches shall be deepened and

enlarged as required to permit construction of manholes. Limits of excavation shall be no wider than necessary for manhole construction and installation. Backfilling shall conform to applicable requirements for trenches at the respective location.

B. Manhole Material: All manholes shall be precast concrete and shall conform to the

current ASTM specifications C 478, except for the following modifications. Cement used in the construction of precast reinforced concrete manholes shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Portland Cement (ASTM Designation: C150). The compressive strength of the concrete shall be not less than 4,000 psi.

1. The minimum shell thickness for precast concrete reinforced manholes shall be:

At a depth of 0 to 1/12 internal shell 16 ft. diameter or 4 inches, whichever is greater. At a depth of 16 feet 1/12 internal shell or greater. diameter plus 1 inch, or 5 inches, whichever is greater. C. Joints: Joints between precast reinforced concrete sections shall be of such design that

leakage and infiltration can satisfactorily be reduced to the limits noted in the Infiltration-Exfiltration tests section. The use of mastics or rubber gaskets (natural or synthetic) is required for this purpose. If the vacuum test method is used to test the manhole, a hydraulic cement grout shall be used to seal joints and lift holes in addition to the mastics or gaskets.

D. Base Construction: The base shall be poured of 3,000 (minimum) psi concrete with a

maximum slump of 4 inches and consolidated by vibration. The bottom sections of all precast reinforced concrete manholes shall extend into the concrete base a minimum distance of 4 inches. The base shall have a minimum diameter 8 inches greater than the outside diameter of the manhole. The base shall have a minimum thickness beneath the area of the manhole wall as follows:

0 ft. to 8 ft. manhole heights...8 inches

8 ft. to 12 ft. manhole heights...10 inches 12 ft. and above manhole heights...12 inches

Steel reinforcing in the manhole base shall be #4 rebar at 12-inch centers both ways. All

interior surfaces of poured in place concrete shall be steel trowel finished. Dips or projections capable of holding water or solid materials will not be permitted. The concrete shall set for 24 hours before any pipe inside the manhole is trimmed.

E. Inspection of Materials: Any material which has been damaged such that the water-

tightness or structural integrity of the section has been affected adversely shall not be utilized in the construction of the manhole.

F. Drop Type: Where shown on the plans, an outside drop line shall be provided for a

sewer entering a manhole at an elevation of 24 inches or more above the manhole invert. The outside drop pipe shall be protected against breaking or settling by the use of a



concrete encasement. The drop pipe shall have the same nominal diameter as that of the incoming sewer.

G. Diameter: The minimum inside diameter of manholes shall be 48 inches. The minimum

diameter of manhole covers and manhole entryways shall be 22 inches. H. Flow Channel: The flow channel through manholes shall be made to conform in shape

and in slope to that of the sewers. Sewer pipe shall be stubbed into the manhole and then concrete or grout used to create a smooth uniform transition through the manhole.

I. Castings: Unless otherwise shown on the plans shall be: Manhole steps made of gray

cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48 or plastic coated cast or other corrosion resistant materials shall be provided whenever the manhole is deeper than 4 feet. Steps shall be spaced at intervals no greater than 16 inches. Manhole Ring and lid shall be "Heavy Duty" with the following minimum weights:

Ring: 217 Lbs. Lid: 147 Lbs.

J. Connection between Manhole and Pipe: All sewers extending from manholes shall be supported with concrete to the first 3 feet of pipe from the manhole wall. Concrete support may be eliminated if a flexible water-tite gasket joint is used to join the pipe to the manhole. (A-Lock 285 gasket or approved equal.)

7.1 BRANCH FITTINGS & SERVICE LINES A. Branch Fittings: Fittings for service lines in new construction shall be molded or

fabricated with all gasketed connections. Wyes, tees or saddle branch fittings shall be installed at all service line locations. The contractor shall have the option of installing in-line wyes or tees during the normal installation of the sewer pipe or tapping the new line and installing a gasketed saddle, wye or tee.

If the contractor elects to use in-line fittings, he shall provide the necessary caps or plugs for each fitting, in order for the proper testing of the sewer line. If the contractor elects to tap the line after testing, he shall use gasketed saddles with stainless steel clamps. Saddles and/or fittings shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Vertical Risers: Where conditions permit, the branch connection (wye/saddle) shall be

set at no greater than 45° to the horizontal and the riser brought to the appropriate location utilizing no greater slope than that given by the branch connection angle. In situations where the sewer trench is of minimum width and the trench walls are of vertical, firm, undisturbed materials, the branch connection shall be set at 45° to the horizontal and 45° bend shall be placed on the branch. The branch and bend shall be encased in concrete, unless solvent welded PVC pipe is used. The riser pipe shall be set into the 45° bend and extended up the trench wall to the appropriate depth. Each pipe joint shall be securely pinned in place to prevent movement of pipe when backfilling.

C. Fittings Location: After wyes are laid and before trench is backfilled, the stationing shall

be obtained for the wye location. An accurate record of the location of each wye shall be kept by the Contractor independently of records kept by the Resident Inspector. In the event such records are not kept, or are lost or destroyed before final acceptance of the work, the Contractor at no additional cost shall redetermine the locations.

D. Service Lines: The contractor shall when making connections to existing service lines

from fittings use good, clean and appropriate plumbing fittings and pipe. The sewer pipe



used to make the connection shall not be less than Schedule 40 pipe and shall have neoprene/rubber gaskets using stainless steel clamps. Any deviation from this standard shall require the inspector/engineer's approval.

8.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS 8.1 SEWER PIPE A. Inspection of Joints: Joints shall not be covered until approved by the Engineer. B. Approval of Materials: Materials may be used if accompanied by a Manufacturer's

Certificate of compliance pending any test, which may be made by the Engineer. Bituminous joint materials shall be delivered on the job in the manufacturer's container fully marked and unopened.

C. Alignment and Grade: After joints have been inspected and approved, the trench shall

be backfilled to 12 inches above pipe as specified in "Excavate and Trenching." The Engineer shall check the trueness of the grade and alignment by lamping between manholes. The balance of the backfill shall be done only upon authority from the Engineer.

D. Testing: After the pipe has been laid and backfilled the line may be tested between

manholes by low-pressure (ASTM F-1417) or water infiltration - exfiltration test method. The Engineer shall be notified in advance of the method to be used by the contractor. The contractor shall provide the Engineer with schedule and procedure of testing method. No testing shall be started or completed without the Engineer or Inspector approving method and being present during tests. ASTM C-828 is the recommended testing method for Vitrified Clay Pipe and other similar pipe, while ASTM F-1417 is the recommended testing method for Plastic Pipe and other similar material pipe.

1. Infiltration/Exfiltration: The following information is not intended to be all inclusive

of the method, procedure, equipment or manner of this type of test. It is only intended to make the contractor aware of type of procedure and the approximate amount of work involved. The contractor shall be responsible to obtain the required information to complete, perform and document this test.

a. Infiltration: Tests for water-tightness shall be made by the Contractor in

the presence of the Engineer. The sewer and connections shall not leak under the exterior normal ground water pressure in excess of the rate of 250 gallons per inch or nominal diameter per mile of sewer per day. If such leakage occurs, the Contractor shall locate any leakage and make repairs as necessary to control the infiltration. The tests and measure-ments of infiltration shall be conducted in a manner as approved by the Engineer.

b. Exfiltration: The contractor shall conduct an exfiltration test on each reach of sewer between manholes. The first line between manholes shall be tested before backfilling and before any sewer pipe is installed in the remainder of the work. Thereafter, individual or multiple reaches may be tested at the frequency recommended by the contractor and approved by the Engineer.

Exfiltration tests shall be conducted by blocking off all manhole openings except those connecting with the reach being tested, filling the line, and measuring the water required to maintain a constant level in the



manholes. Each manhole shall be subjected to at least one exfiltration test. During the exfiltration test, the average water depth above the pipe invert shall be 10 feet, unless manhole depths are such that this is impossible. The maximum depth at the lower end shall not exceed 20 feet and the minimum depth at the upper end shall be at least 5 feet above the crown of the pipe.

The total exfiltration for 12-inch pipe shall not exceed 0.57 gallons per foot per day when there is a 4-foot minimum static head above the pipe invert. The exfiltration for a 10-inch pipe shall not exceed 0.47 gallons per foot per day when there is a 4-foot minimum static head. The total exfiltration for any other size pipe shall not exceed 250 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per mile of pipe per day for each section tested. The minimum length of test shall be 4 hours or as long as necessary to locate all leaks when requested by the Engineer.

2. Vacuum Testing/ASTM F-1417: The following information is not intended to be

all inclusive of the method, procedure, equipment or manner of this type of test. It is only intended to make the contractor aware of type of procedure and the approximate amount of work involved. The contractor shall be responsible to obtain the required information to complete, perform and document this test.

a. Procedure/Method: Low-pressure air testing may be conducted on any

type of 8-inch to 12-inch diameter pipe. Testing methods and air leakage rates shall conform to Uni-Bell's UNI-B-6-85 Standard and/or ASTM F-1417 or their latest revision.

b. Line Plugs: After a manhole to manhole reach of pipe has been backfilled to final grade and prepared for testing, the section of sewer pipe to test shall be cleaned by flushing or other methods. After the line is cleaned, isolate the section of pipe to be tested with the use of inflatable stoppers or other suitable test plugs. The plugs shall be placed in the line at each manhole and secured. The seals shall be tested for sealing by pressurizing the pipe to a minimum of 4 psig but not greater than 9 psig. The plugs shall hold against this pressure without bracing and without any movement of plugs.

c. Constant Pressure Method: When it is determined the pipe plugs are holding against the 4 psig, and then the pressure may be lowered to 3.5 psig greater than the average groundwater back pressure. The airflow rate in standard cubic feet per minute is read directly with the use of a rotameter, which the contractor shall provide. Conversion of this airflow to actual cubic feet per minute of air leaking from the test sections shall be done. The requirements for air loss under constant pressure method shall be considered satisfied if the air loss does not exceed the specified leakage rate in cubic feet per minute per square foot of internal pipe surface area.

d. Time-Pressure Drop Method: When it is determined the pipe plugs are holding against the 4 psi and the test section has stabilized, this method may begin. Disconnect the air supply and decrease the pressure to 3.5 psi. Timing shall commence with an accurate timing device. The time required for a 1.0 psig specified pressure drop shall be used to determine the lines acceptability. This time shall be as listed in the table at the end of this section.

E. Deflection Test: Flexible pipelines shall be tested for deflection by pulling a mandrel

through the entire length thereof.



1. The mandrel (go/no-go) device shall be cylindrical in shape and constructed with nine (9) evenly spaced arms or prongs. Mandrels with fewer arms will be rejected as not sufficiently accurate. The dimensions of the mandrel shall be as listed in the accompanying table. The “D” mandrel dimension shall carry a tolerance of + or – 0.01 inch. Allowances for pipe wall thickness tolerances or ovality (from heat, shipping, poor production, etc.) shall not be deducted from the “D” dimension but shall be counted in as part of the five (5) percent or lesser deflection allowance. Contact length (L) shall be measured between points of contact on the mandrel arm. The length shall not be less than as shown in the accompanying table.

2. The Engineer shall be responsible for approving the mandrel. Proving rings shall be used to verify this.

3. The mandrel shall be hand-pulled by the Contractor through all flexible sewer lines. Any sections of sewer not passing the mandrel test shall be uncovered and the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall reround or replace the sewer to the satisfaction of the Engineer. These repaired sections shall be retested.

4. The testing shall be conducted after final trench backfill.

D and L Dimensions For 9 Arm Mandrel

Nominal D Diameter L SDR 35 SDR 26 SDR 21 8” 8” 7.52” 7.37” 7.41”

10” 10” 9.40” 9.21” 9.24” 12” 12” 11.19” 10.96” 10.96” 15” 15” 13.70” 13.42” N/A 18” 18” 16.76” N/A N/A 21” 21” 19.74” N/A N/A 24” 24” 22.21” N/A N/A 27” 27” 25.03” N/A N/A

8.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS - MANHOLES A. Inspection of Manholes: Manholes shall not be backfilled until approved by the Engineer. B. Approval of Materials: Materials may be used if accompanied by a Manufacturer's

Certificate of compliance pending any test, which may be made by the Engineer. Bituminous joint materials shall be delivered on the job in the manufacturer's container fully marked and unopened.

C. Testing: After the manhole has been placed and before the hole is backfilled, the

manhole shall be tested using either the hydrostatic method or the low-pressure vacuum method. The Engineer shall be notified in advance of the method to be used by the contractor.

1. Hydrostatic Method: Manholes shall be tested using internal hydrostatic

pressure. Full depth exfiltration (max. 25 feet) shall have a water loss of less than 1.14 gallons per foot of manhole depth per 24-hour period. If infiltration occurs before or after the exfiltration test, it shall also be less than 1.14 gallons per foot of depth per 24-hour period.

2. Vacuum Test Method.

a. All lift holes shall be plugged with an approved non-shrink grout.



b. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, (ex. Kor-N-Seal) taking care to securely brace the plug from being drawn into the manhole.

c. The test head shall be placed at the inside of the top of the cone section and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

d. A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than 60 seconds for 48 inches in diameter, and 75 seconds for 60 inches in diameter manholes.

e. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made with a non-shrink grout while the vacuum is still being drawn. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.

8.3 PAYMENT FOR TESTS. The contractor shall provide, at his own expense, all necessary piping,

water, equipment and materials required for the tests. The tests shall not be a bid item and they shall be considered subsidiary to other work.

8.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE. Before any newly constructed Sanitary Sewer is placed into service, all

installations shall comply with all tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Until the Contractor is notified of acceptance, he shall maintain the entire work in good order. When such compliance is met, the Engineer will so advise the Owner.

TABLE NO. 1

Min : Sec. Per Lgth.





PIPE SIZE

100-250' 250-300' 300-350' 350-400' 400-450'

8" 7:34 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 10" 9:53 11:52 13:51 15:49 17:48 12" 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38


VALVES AND FITTINGS 33 12 16 - 1

SECTION 33 12 16 - VALVES AND FITTINGS

1.1 VALVE TYPE A. Valves shall conform to the latest revision of AWWA C-509. Valves shall have an

unobstructed waterway equal in diameter to at least 1/4" greater than nominal valve size. The valves shall be such that the compression-set of the rubber shall not affect the ability of the valve to seal when pressure is applied to either side of the gate. The valve shall be so designed that no metal fasteners or screws other than the stem and stem nut are exposed to water. Acceptable valves shall be Mueller Super-Seal Resilient Gate Valves A-2370-20 or equal. All valves to have pipe restrained fittings used in conjunction with valve installation to secure valve to pipe.

B. Valves shall open left and have non-rising stem operated with 2” square nut. C. Valve boxes shall be road type extendable boxes, Tyler type 564-5 or equal. D. Tapping valve shall be Mueller H-687 (MJ-1 End, Flange-1 End) or equal. E. Tapping sleeve shall be Mueller H-615 or equal, with larger O.D. range gaskets and

flanges to fit old pit cast pipe. F. Cutting-in sleeve shall be Mueller H-841 or equal. G. Air release valve shall be Clow F-3062, model 200-A type, or equal. Inlet size shall be 2".

1.2 FITTINGS A. Wyes, 45°, 22-1/2°, and 11¼° bends shall be ductile iron class 250, mechanical joint

fittings shall be produced in accordance to AWWA C153 for Compact Body fittings. All joint fittings to have pipe restrained fittings used in conjunction with joint fitting to secure fitting to pipe.

B. Mechanical joint tee and crosses shall be ductile iron, class 250 and shall be

manufactured in accordance with AWWA C153 for Compact Body fittings. All tees and crosses to have pipe restrained fittings used in conjunction with fitting to secure fitting to pipe.

C. Couplings shall be ductile iron, meeting ASTM A536, AWWA C-219 of at least class 250

and shall be Romac Alpha Restrained, Hymax Grip, or Smith Blair Quantum with restrained fittings or approved equal.



PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE 33 31 13 - 1

SECTION 33 31 13 - PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE

1.0 SCOPE. This Section covers the quality specifications and placement techniques of the sanitary

sewer pipe.

2.0 GRAVITY SEWER. The gravity sewer pipe shall be PVC, and shall meet the requirements of:

ASTM Specification D 3034 (SDR 26), Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings, 4 to 15 inches. The gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477. The joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3212. Joints shall have rubber-sealing rings. Pipe shall be J-M Ring-Tite PVC Sewer Pipe, or CertainTeed PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe, or equal.

3.0 INSTALLATION. Prior to installation, the pipe shall be inspected for damage and care taken to

remove foreign material from within the pipe and to assure a clean bell and spigot. The spigot shall be lubricated with material supplied by the pipe manufacturer and applied as per supplier specifications. Pipes shall be joined to the reference mark. Installation of sewer pipe shall conform to the specifications for "Construction of Sanitary Sewers."

4.0 CUTTING. When cutting of the pipe is required, the cut shall be square. The end shall be

beveled to conform to the factory bevel.

5.0 GRADE AND ALIGNMENT. The gravity sewer must be laid to the grade shown on the plans.

No pipe shall be installed until the Engineer is assured of proper grade and alignment. Contractor shall run a camera through completed sewer line to check for grade, alignment and obstruction in addition to a light must be visible between manholes on gravity sewer. Installation of sewer pipe shall conform to the specifications for "Construction of Sanitary Sewers."

6.0 BACKFILL. Care shall be taken not to move the pipe during backfill procedures and to meet all

backfill requirements. All excavation and trenching shall conform to the specifications listed in "Excavation and Trenching."

7.0 TESTS. All installed sewer pipe shall meet or exceed the testing requirements listed in the

specifications for the "Construction of Sanitary Sewer."

8.0 SUBMITTALS. A contractor may submit to the Engineer information concerning a different

manufacturer's pipe, other than that specified above, for verification of status "or equal". The Engineer and/or the Owner reserves the right to reject any manufacturer's pipe submitted for "as equal" status, for any reason. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to submit the necessary information to seek "or equal" status, to the Engineer prior to the bid letting allowing the Engineer enough time to verified pipe's status. Any submittals received by the Engineer within seven calendar days of the bid letting will not be considered for approval.



STORM SEWER INSTALLATION 33 41 00 - 1

SECTION 33 41 00 - STORM SEWER INSTALLATION

1.0 DESCRIPTION. Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment and

labor for excavation, trenching, placing of pipe, construction of inlets, and backfilling for storm sewers or drainage pipes as shown on the plans.

2.0 PIPE MATERIALS A. Round Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) or Round Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPEP)

also known as (HDPE): The pipe shall be Schedule 80 PVC pipe, SDR 26 Gravity Sanitary Sewer PVC Pipe, HDPE Dual Wall Pipe or approved equal. All pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3034, F758, F894, F714, F2648, F2306, F477 or AASHTO M-252, M294.

3.0 INSTALLATION A. Excavation: 1. The trench shall be excavated beginning at the outlet end and proceeding toward

the upper end, true to line and grade shown on the plans or as established by the Architect. The width of the trench shall be sufficient to laying the pipe, placing bedding as required and to place backfill, but in no case shall be less than the external diameter of the pipe plus six inches on each side.

2. When necessary, according to safety regulations, common sense, and good construction practices, the trench shall be adequately shored or sheeted to insure safe and satisfactory construction and backfilling.

3. The foundation in the trench shall be so formed as to prevent subsequent settlement. If the foundation is mealy soil and can be worked easily, then bedding will not be required. All other circumstances dealing with poor trench foundation, rocky soil, debris, or geological reasons, the storm sewer shall be bedded according to the bedding requirements.

4. If the foundation is in good firm earth, the earth shall be pared or molded to give full support to each pipe for a depth at least equal to ¼ the external diameter of the pipe, notches being cut to receive the bell (when bell and spigot pipe is used).

5. The contractor shall have the option to undercut the trench and backfill at his expense, with bedding materials to insure proper, uniform bearing of the storm sewer pipe.

6. The pipe shall be laid, erected or installed using a minimum cover of 12 inches, B. Laying/Installation: 1. The laying of pipes in finished trenches shall be started at the outlet end so that

the spigot ends (when bell and spigot pipe is used) point to the direction of flow. 2. All pipes shall be laid with ends abutting or connected and true to line and grade. 3. Pipes shall be so lowered into trenches as to avoid unnecessary handling and

damage to the pipe. 4. As each section of pipe is laid, the bell or hub of the preceding pipe shall be

cleaned and the bottom portion kept free from any foreign materials as the two pipes are joined.


STORM SEWER INSTALLATION 33 41 00 - 2

5. All joints and lift holes to be sealed to provide a tight, water resistant surface. C. Bedding of Pipe: 1. When required, the pipe shall be bedded in crushed stone or rounded gravel-

bedding material placed on the trench bottom. The bedding material shall have 95% passing a ¾ inch sieve and 45% retained on a No. 8 sieve. The material UD-1 of the KDOT Standard Specifications for Under-drain aggregates will be considered suitable, as well as, a well-graded road gravel blend. The contractor shall deliver a sample of the material he proposes to use to the Architect for approval.

2. The bedding shall have a minimum thickness beneath the pipe of 6 inches or 1/6 of the outside diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater, and shall extend up the sides of the pipe to a minimum of 12 inches or 1/4 the outside diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater. No separate payment will be made for pipeline bedding, such work and materials being subsidiary to the pipe.

4.0 PREFABRICATED CATCH BASINS, INLETS OR JUNCTION BOXES A. Prefabricated Catch Basins, Inlets, Sumps or Junction Boxes for small area drainage

shall be manufactured from High Density Polyethylene, PVC, Fiberglass or other approved material that shall meet ASTM and ASSHTO requirements for Class B loads. (Medium-duty pneumatic tire traffic, autos and light truck at speeds less than 20 m.p.h.) NDS 1200NGB, TUF-TITE AD1, ADS NYLOPLAST or approved equal. All structures shall require material submittals. The structures shall be shaped and sized as per project plans or as approved.

B. Grates for catch basins, inlets, sumps shall be of design and shape as specified and

shown on the plans. All grates shall be ADA compliant and shall require material submittals.

C. Covers for Junction Boxes shall be watertight covers with one or two holes or slots for

ease of remove and mechanism or fasteners to secure cover to top of box. All covers shall require material submittals.

D. Installation of prefabricated structures shall be as per manufacturer specifications and

shall meet ASTM and ASSHTO requirements for Class B Loads. Installation methods and practices shall be submitted for approval.

5.0 CONCRETE INLETS, CATCH BASINS, JUNCTIONS OR SUMPS A, The concrete boxes shall be in accordance with concrete construction specifications for

concrete constructed miscellaneous structures or as specified on project plans.


SUBDRAINAGE 33 46 00 - 1

SECTION 33 46 00 – SUBDRAINAGE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The Conditions of the Contract and all Sections of Division 1 are hereby made a part of

this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Included: 1. Prepare trench bottom to have continuous contact with pipe at specified elevation

as shown in plans. Ensure trench is sloped as specified in plans to flow toward outlet.

2. Provide EZ Flow product and install beginning at the low-point and work upstream using internal coupling to connect EZ Flow.

3. Provide and install specified fill material over EZ Flow pipe. 4. Provide and install grass, or other cover medium, by using method per plans. 5. Supplying all labor, equipment, materials and apparatus not specifically

mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are incidental and required to complete the work specified.

B. Related Work: 1. Subgrade preparation under Section 31 20 01 Excavation and Trenching. 2. Subsurface drainage materials - Section 33 41 00 Storm Sewer Installation,

when needed. 3. Irrigation installation - Section 32 80 00 Irrigation, when needed.

1.3 Quality Assurance A. Follow Submittal Procedures requirements. B. Submit manufacturer’s data as required by specifications. C. Installation: Performed only by skilled workpeople with satisfactory record of

performance on landscaping or drainage projects of comparable size and quality.

1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Protect EZ Flow Pipe sections from damage during delivery and store under tarp to

protect from sunlight, when time from delivery to installation exceeds one week.

1.5 Project Conditions



A. Review installation procedures and coordinate EZ Flow work with other work affected. Generally, EZ Flow will be installed concurrent with other site drainage.

B. Cold weather: 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost if in an

area needing compaction or required to support load. C. Protect partially completed EZ Flow installations against damage from other construction

traffic when work is in progress.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 AVAILABILITY A. NDS, Inc., 851 North Harvard Avenue, PO Box 339, Lindsay, California 93247. Toll Free

(800) 726-1994. Toll Free Fax (800) 726-1998. Phone (559) 562-9888. Fax (559) 562-4488. Website: www.ndspro.com. E-Mail [email protected].

2.2 MATERIALS A. EZ Flow Pipe 1. Pipe shall be manufactured from High Density Polyethylene and shall be both

corrugated and perforated. 2. EZ Flow shall have Expanded Polystyrene Aggregate surrounding the pipe and

enclosed by fabric mesh. 3. Expanded Polystyrene aggregate must be made from 100% Recycled

Polyethylene. 4. Expanded Polystyrene aggregate shall have a measured void space of 57%. 5. EZ Flow sections must be provided in 10 foot sections. 6. Internal couplings shall be used to connect EZ Flow sections. Part Number Part Description Diameter Flow Rate Length

B. Soil

EZ-0701F EZ Flow with 3” Pipe 7” 80.8 gpm/ft 10’

EZ-0701A EZ Flow without Pipe 7” 37.1 gpm/ft 10’





3C05 3” Internal Coupling 7” n/a n/a





1. Obtain specified fill material as backfill over EZ Flow drain pipe.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine excavated trench for smoothness and ensure trench is free of debris. Inspect

trench for correct slope and elevation in accordance with plans. Do not start EZ Flow installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Inspect EZ Flow product to ensure product has not been damaged during delivery.

Inspect interior of pipe for debris, soil or other foreign objects, if found remove before installation.

C. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory

performance. If existing conditions are found unsatisfactory, contact Quality Control Manager for resolution.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Excavate trench as specified in plans to desired width accommodating the EZ Flow pipe

system. B. Slope trench as specified in plans to flow toward outlet(s). C. Prepare and shape smooth trench bottom to have continuous contact with pipe at

specified elevation as shown in plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EZ FLOW DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Provide EZ Flow product and install beginning at the outlet point and work upstream. B. Use internal couplings provided by NDS to connect EZ Flow sections together. C To cut EZ Flow pipe to lengths other than ten foot intervals, mark the mesh where cut

needs to be made and carefully make a cross-sectional cut in the mesh to access Polystyrene Aggregate. Remove and set aside sufficient aggregate to expose the pipe and to re-connect the mesh to the pipe. Using an appropriate connector such as a nylon wire tie, reattach the mesh to the pipe, making sure remaining aggregate is properly contained. Cut the exposed polyethylene pipe to the measured length. Dispose of remaining aggregate properly.

D At the end of the work day all upstream open ends of EZ Flow shall be covered or

plugged to prevent intrusion of dirt, debris and foreign objects. E Connection to onsite storm drain systems and structures shall be considered incidental to

the completion of this specification section.



F Provide and install specified fill material over EZ Flow pipe. Lift thickness and compaction density shall be in accordance with plans and specifications. Areas subject to H-25 traffic loading shall maintain 1’ – 0” minimum cover to final subgrade elevation. Areas subject to construction traffic shall maintain 1’ – 6” minimum cover while subject to construction traffic loading.

G Install surface medium as specified in plans.


Date post:	19-Sep-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times